Home

Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual

1. 2 2 02 cece cece cece cee cece eee eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeees 176 A A a ev nea VER Ee Me NN 176 REMOVING MNCS net oS S58 eos a dean a cist tani RS 176 Defining the default page 0 22 22 cece cee cee cece ee cee cence cece cee nrnna 176 Defining triggers 2 22 c cece cee ee eee e eee ee cece eee cece ee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 176 Esc e ee ene Re ev tS ee ea te ne OTe ny te ye 177 TESUMG GOMOIMONS esencia etnia aa to obs sale al beaten 177 Dynamic teca a a te da id dd Laren 177 E IIA NR IE RR A 178 Frequently asked questions oooccccc ccc cee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee eens 183 A ites oe ct et a E he ee a ey ee Nine a eet 183 Is the free software a cut down demo version _ 2 2 2222 e cece cece cece cece eceececeeceeeeeees 183 Does the Designer software support the Apple Macintosh 2 22 22222 22 eee eee 183 What are the PC minimum requirements for Designer software 2 22 22 22 2 183 14 Contents Are project files compatible across versions and platforms _ 2 2222222220ee eee eee 183 Can have multiple versions of Designer on my computer 2 22 22 22 22 e ee eee eee 183 What documentation is available 0 0 0 00 2 e eee e eee nono 183 How many timelines can program How many fixtures etc 0 2 0 2022 eee eee eee eee eee 183 How can tell what DMX levels are being generated
2. 0 0 0 187 What warranty does ETC offer 00 00 0 0 o ccc cece cece cee cee cece cece eee nrnna 187 What user serviceable parts are there in a Controller or Remote Device _ 2 187 Standards compliance A a a ts 187 A AAA AA AA IEA 187 What are the differences between connecting to a PC via USB and Ethernet 187 How do the Unison Mosaic products cope with sharing a network with other non lighting AA A A A AS A AA at 188 What about remote focus units portable control stations IR etc o oooooococcccccccccccccooo 188 Is there a way to call up channels for focus _ 12 22 22 eee cece cee cece ec ceeceeceeceeceeees 188 TROUDICSHOOUING ii raoba dan 189 What are the Controller s LEDs telling me 2 02 2 c cece cece e ccc ecceccecceeceeceecees 189 MSC and AVG Status LEDS ee oa id id tido 189 TPC Status LEDS 0d ri a 189 Ar A E E 189 Why can t see the Controller in the Designer network window _ ooocccccccccccccccccccccccncccnncos 189 USB PODISMS 54d ta tera io da as Dita dira do 189 Ethernet problems network 2 22 cece cece ccc ec cece ccc eeccecceccceceeccececcceeceeteeceeeees 190 Ethernet problems one to one 2 22 e eee eee cee cee cece ec cee cnn 190 Incorrect Ethernet cable CAT5 5E 6 pairing 0 022 eee cece cece cee cee cece ceecceceeceeceeees 190 can see the Controller in the network window but it is shown in grey 2 2
3. 2 2 22 o cece eee eee eee eee eee 184 WHEE S UNdO MA he eee sesh Bt MIR 184 e A A A A a 184 What are the Unison Mosaic Designer file extensions 2 2 02 222222 e ee eee eee cece eens 184 Can the project file be retrieved from the Controller S 02 22 222222 e eee eee eee eee eee eee 184 How best to archive a project 2 02 22 ccc eee eee eee eee cee cece eee eeeeeeeeeees 184 How do programme RS232 RS485 or Ethernet triggers 0 0 2222 e eee eee eee eee eee 185 FIXOS AA A A A RAN 185 What happens if need a fixture that isn t inthe library o ooccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoo 185 have a fixture with lots of DMX modes which mode should use _ 2 22 22 2 185 BELFER h 1 2 Rand ne A ORO OO RE RE A OCU Peewee ae Tae ER aN Tene SPR eee eee 186 Which revision of MSC 1 amp 2 hardware do l have _ 2 0 22022 c eee cece eee eee eee ee eee 186 What show control interfaces does the MSC 1 2 amp 4 support _ 20 22 022 2 e ee eee 186 Is Unison Mosaic RDM compatible _ 2 2 22 2 cece cece eee cece eeeeeeeeees 186 Will need more memory on the Controller 0 00 2 cece cece eee eee cee eee eee 186 Are there any diagnostic tools _ 0 00 2 o cece cece eee cee cee ee eee none 187 When should l use reset occ cee ce eee cee cee cee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 187 Should keep Controllers in the field up to date with the latest firmware
4. 2 22 02 22 222 eee eee eee eee ee 147 To synchronize the Time Server s date and time to Designer 22 2 222 222 147 Memon Card gi ncp ode et ies eerie o e eno ol 147 Storing configuration settings on the memory card optional 2 2 2 0 2222 e eee eee eee eee ee 147 Network Controller properties _ 0 0 0 2 l lei ccccececceee ec eee cece cece ee eeeceeeeeeeeeees 149 Pri A A eae Bae 149 So AA A A AA A A II 149 Playback Refresh Rate TPC and MSC only o oooooccccccccccccccccccccocccccccnnc cnc cnc cnc 150 A A aeestia nese ee 150 Network Controller protocols _ 22 0 00 2 o lc cc eee cece cece eee eeeeseeeeeeseeees 151 Network 2 Protocol 00 00202 o cece cece cece cece cee ee ence eee cece cece eee eeeeeeseeeeees 151 TPC revised MSC 1 2 amp 4 ooo o oo ccc ccc ccc cence ce cc ence cececcecececececescccecucecuceceececs 151 AD Contents MOS dd ai 151 DMX Proxy MSC TONY coc irrita isis 152 INC ar ate a ess at cee ae a ES ek ad 152 KiNet power supplies 2 0 2 c eee cece cece cece cece eee cece cece eee e cee eeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 152 DVM ED Eo A A Go ai a a E 152 Network Controller Interfaces _ _ 2 222 2 o lcci cece ccc ee eee eee nro 154 Contigure TPC RIO TPC Only ssp o O a 154 Inputs MSC 1 2 amp 4 and TPC with TPC RIO only 20 00 00202 154 Serial Port s not standalone TPC 0 0 22 2 e cece cece eee conc 155
5. 20 What s new in v1 11 What s new in v1 11 Controllers e Support for TPC RIO 7 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual User Interface The software has been designed to present a consistent graphical user interface and so it is worth familiarising yourself with the layout of a typical window before proceeding further TITLE BAR MAIN TOOLBAR MODE TOOLBAR BROWSER TOOLBAR PLAM CONFIGURATION AREA E z Ww E E Main toolbar The main toolbar contains the File menu to create New projects as well as Open and Save existing projects The View menu accesses various optional typically diagnostic windows and the Zoom menu allows you quickly to manipulate the plan or timeline scale and position The Options menu allows you to configure various application wide options and the Help menu gains access to this help software build details and the means to check for any software upgrades Mode tabs The application is divided into ten modes which can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab See the Quick Start for a brief description of each mode and then the Reference section for more details Mode toolbar The left hand end of this toolbar always carries the New Open and Save project buttons The remainder is pop ulated with tools as appropriate to the selected mode Browser The browser is common to most modes and provides the primary interface for selecting expanding and grouping fixtures in the
6. 79 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Media Presets Preset user named The presets that you optionally created using the Media window to import still and moving images into your pro ject These presets have spatial awareness when applied to Pixel Matrices in that the media clip will be resized to fit the Pixel Matrix s Render Window NOTE If no Media presets have been created the Media Presets folder will not be displayed Media Slot Presets The Media Slots that you optionally created using the Media window These presets have spatial awareness when applied to Pixel Matrices in that Unison Mosaic MediaManager will generate media for the Media Slot at the dimensions of the Pixel Matrix s render window Mover Presets Mover presets do not have a length only a transition Shown on the timeline with the settings persisting until another Mover preset is encountered or the timeline released They are applied to the dedicated Movers rows of a timeline a Preset user named The presets that you optionally created using the Mover window to control the other parameters typically position and gobo of any automated lighting in your project NOTE f no Mover presets have been created the Mover Presets folder will not be displayed DALI Presets Like Mover presets DALI presets do not have a length only a transition with the settings persisting until another DALI preset is encountered However
7. Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual v1 11 Copyright 2009 2013 Electronic Theatre Controls Inc All rights reserved Production information and specifications subject to change Part Number 7180M1240 1 11 Rev A Released 2013 12 v1 11 11 12 2013 Custom Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual ETC permits the reproduction of materials in this manual only for non commercial purposes All other rights are reserved by ETC Contents Contents COMES A A A EEEE 3 AS 20 o HOW aa a a edhe cienatent aise Moe a Serat ta era RSS s ee a e a EOE 20 PIA ONO Bsee areas A hha ae eae nae eee ee Soe a 20 Apple Quick Vite secara cabal t2 media dada ageveuedabioaaenee somadatsdaondateseseeaosauswaiaadeananee 20 Help Overview aoaaa aaoo aaao aoaaa a aaa aaa a LLLA LLDD LLDD DALDAL DDPA D DLLD DALL D aa L oaan 22an 20 A A a a aS 20 SPPON A A IN O E ee a ae aS eae 20 ACEEA a a a 000 E EEE E E E AA EE 21 Els y AAA IA IN AO E A a NS IS 21 USer Interface oneens dci accurate cd oscar EEREN 22 MET too APRA A A AN A A O eee eses 22 os A dc T E sue EEEE E E T aebeensielecaes seated badsomuanecucessaussiie 22 Mode ole 07 ec 22 A el tees gta ass am A 22 Browser lOO Dal usas aoa bee aida halt ee tebe ome ia Sai os il Dalai Eto 23 E e chs pase came vtec A A A 23 Configuration area nino 23 Stats Dar cocina alacranes ET EEE EEE TAE TE EE AOE AE TEES 23 Keyboard shortcuts coccion 24 Notes Tor Mac OSX USES iia dodo tata dades 2
8. we want Sunday to be 7 rather than 0 if N O then N 7 end end decrement N No SIN if N O then Inject Crrigger 2 gt rons ACCION Orn rigger 2 end The trick here is to detect whether it is the first time round the loop if the Controller has started up today then N will have no value and so not N will be true otherwise N will have been left with the value zero when the script ran yesterday When we detect it is the first time then we set its initial value in the same way as before have also used a different method to do the timeline release Rather than calling stop timeline directly from the script am causing trigger number 2 to fire We can then configure trigger number 2 to have an action that releases the correct timeline It is sometimes easier to write scripts like this when they are going to be sent out to a customer who does not know how to modify them In this case all the customer needs to know is to modify the 220 Trigger Programming Guide start and release timeline actions in the trigger window if they want to change which timeline is run they do not need to modify the script Track motion sensor activity over a period of time A foyer has 8 pressure pads under the carpet connected to the contact closure inputs of the Controller We need to count how many times the pressure pads are activated in any 15 second period as a simple measure of activity in the foyer One of 4 timelines should be
9. E Collapse all Collapses all so that only group rows are displayed Groups with any programming even on a concealed mem ber will be shown in blue a Hide unused Use this filter to hide all the unused rows press again to turn off Only items with any programming even ona concealed member will be shown in blue Selecting timelines The timeline picker on the toolbar will be populated with every timeline in the project select from the pull down list to open a timeline for editing Use Ctrl Apple Tab to select the next timeline Shift Ctrl Tab the previous Copying timelines Timelines can be copied using the Copy Timeline button the copy is a brand new instance that operates inde pendently useful for creating similar timelines Deleting timelines Timelines can be deleted using the Delete Timeline button a warning dialog will you prompt you to confirm Note that there must be at least one timeline in the project Maintaining indefinite output There are two ways of maintaining a timeline s output beyond the end of the last preset This is a particularly important feature for architectural use where a simple wall panel could be used to recall scenes at random which would remain active indefinitely until another is recalled Hold Press the Hold button to prevent the timeline from releasing at the end the default Presets will remain active until overridden effects and media will continue to play Pr
10. Navigate to your Applications folder located on the the Hard Drive typically named Macintosh HD Locate the application called Unison Mosaic Designer Right click or control click on it and choose Show Package Contents from the menu that appears Now navigate to Contents Resources firmware to find the file toc fw 196 MSC Recovery MSC Recovery Revised MSC 1 2 4 Hardware serial numbers 006xxx onwards The MSC has a built in failsafe against firmware problems it stores two versions of firmware So if one copy of the firmware fails to load or becomes corrupted due to a loss of power during a firmware reload the other can be used instead However in the event that the MSC will not startup there is a method to recover the MSC using the memory card Please follow these instructions carefully 1 Remove the memory card from the MSC and insert it into your computer 2 Wipe all files on the memory card ensure you have made any necessary backups 3 Locate the firmware directory in the Designer installation directory or app bundle 4 Copy the file ocr2 fw from the firmware directory to the memory card 5 On the memory card rename the pcr2 fw file to pc app 6 Reinsert the memory card into the MSC and restart the MSC The MSC will boot but will take longer to boot than normal Please be patient and wait for the Active LED to illuminate continuously 7 Connect to the MSC using Designer and reload the firmware as norma
11. e The Active LED illuminates once the boot up procedure has completed and is indicative of a fully func tional unit e The Ethernet LED indicates network activity not network link e The Output LED indicates that a show is loaded and eDMX data is being output Error codes Additionally the red status LEDs are used to indicate any boot failures of the Controller that prevent the unit from going active Refer to the Installation Guide for details Why can t see the Controller in the Designer network window Presuming that the Controller has successfully booted its firmware thus its Active LED illuminated then there is a communication problem between the Controller and the PC running Designer USB problems e Windows Did the USB driver install when you connected the Controller for the first time Try unplugging the USB cable wait for a bit then plug it into a different port the Found New Hardware wizard should open to guide you through the process this will happen twice e ls the USB cable too long or damaged Are you using an extension cable Are you using a hub Try a dir ect connection with a short 1M cable e ls the Controller correctly earthed and a connection made between chassis ground earth and signal ground OV e ls the Controller s firmware compatible with Designer Update it with the MSC recovery procedure or MSC X Recovery Tool 189 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual e Still not working Have you
12. the colour of the space between bands property background colour COLOUR 0 QO 0 get the combined width of band and separator local total band width band widthtband spacing get the number of visible bands local bands width total band width modulo operator ab function mod a b return a math floor a b b end The pixel Tuner von function pixel frame x y 237 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual if mod x total band width gt band width then in band separator return DackGround colour end get the band in which this pixel falls local band math floor x total band width get the fraction through the effect local t frame frames optionally reverse the ripple if reverse then t t end get the height of the band in which this pixel falls local band height math sin band bands wavelength t math pi 2 172 adjust y to be relative to the center of the effect y y height 2 0 5 decide if this pixel is inside the band local h math abs y height 2 Lf t h lt band height then return band gradient lookup h else return packgr ouna Colour end end Y ou will notice that adding properties to the example involved little more than changing the variable definitions at the start of the script There are also two new properties wavelength for setting the wavelength of the ripple and reverse for changing the direction of the ripple By adjustin
13. 2 22 22 22 2222 192 Output viewer o oo ee pet ee cece Auto a le et a eee 193 Unpatched universe 2 22 22 2 eee e 193 Patched simulator not running reset 0 0 0 02 2 ee eee cece cece cece eee cee cee eee ceeceeeee 193 Patched simulator running playing or paused 2 2 022 2 eee cece cee cee eee eee teen eee 193 SN A AI E nae erie tere eee mT tet ener EA 194 LO VIC WON rsa ta db ena ad tai oo ina bi 195 A ARA A A teh eae cd ae cae Se Ceci cosas 196 MSC Recovery A tidah ooas soe aend adenosine e auaue conga coueeasuanbens 197 Revised MSC 1 2 4 Hardware serial numbers OO6xxx onwards 2 22202 202 eee cece eee eee eee 197 Original MSC 1 2 Hardware serial numbers 001xxx DOBXXX 222 22 e eee ee eee 197 MS AAA A 198 To update the bootloader o oooooccccoccccccccccccccccccoccococnncn correas 198 TO recover corrupt firmware occ nn 198 PLOW VOICI ais eerste tdi otto tt picaro acabas 198 Connect the MSC via USB o oooocoococcccoccoconccnco nono 198 Run the tool MA A A A 198 MSC X Recovery Dl sa 199 WNENTOUSCIL 23 3 abt dada AS as tilo dd ts aac A 199 To recover corrupt firmware occ nn 199 To install a new or larger capacity card 020 2 eee ee eee cece eee 199 2 LUC 6 Ly STE A o e we See eee ee Rei eu 199 Remove the MSC X s Compact Flash card 2 2 2 2 cece cece cece cece cece eee eeceeeeeees 199 Plug the Compact Flash card into a CF card reader ona P
14. 28 Quick Start Programming Timelines 1 2 9 10 Click on the Program tab at the left to change to the Program view Note the fixture browser now has timeline rows associated with each fixture group or matrix and two Mover rows have been created Note also the preset directories on the lower right hand side of the win dow the Group directory includes built in presets that can be applied to Group and Fixture rows the Matrix directory includes built in presets that can be applied to Pixel Matrices the Media directory has been pop ulated with any media you imported and the Mover directory has been populated with the Mover presets you Created Click on the Group directory tab Select and drag the Fixed Colour preset to your All LED group and drop at the start of the row You can adjust the position and length of the effect on the row by dragging it on the timeline and selecting the handles at the end of the preset The preset properties in this case just colour can be edited in the Properties pane Fade times and characteristics can be edited in the Transitions pane Choose other presets from the Group directory such as Rainbow and Sparkle experiment with dropping them on your groups or open up the group and apply to individual fixtures and edit parameters To view your timeline drag the Simulate tab at the left onto the Program view to open the Simulate window on top of the Program window Click on the play button to ru
15. Use the configuration pane to select which Controller should process the trigger Select the BPS button number or leave as Any see variables and the type of button event Press Held Repeat Release Setting the button number to Any will capture the pressed button as a variable a Paradigm Indicator Use this trigger for integration with a Unison Paradigm system Specify an Indicator Type and then the relevant trigger matching information for that indicator Setting a parameter to Any will capture the value as a variable Note To use this trigger ensure a Paradigm Processor IP address has been specified in the Network tab Remote Device Online Use this trigger not the Startup trigger which will fire before the Remote Devices can be detected if you wish to act upon the detection of a Remote Device for example to configure it with settings other than its defaults Use the configuration pane to select which Controller should process the trigger and select the Remote Device s type and identification number or leave as Any see variables Remote Device Offline Use this trigger if you wish to act upon the loss of a Remote Device for example to enter a failsafe state and issue a warning Use the configuration pane to select which Controller should process the trigger and select the Remote Device s type and number or leave as Any see variables Advanced action types Y Set Timeline Rate The set timeline rate acti
16. 5 May 2 19 13 ro Mas 19 13 Receive project project incoeing 25 Ma 18 18 ACTION Seart Timeline TEST 29 Mas 18 18 Eltartio gE Peal 29 Has 18 15 Hesary usage Aftar project lead total E0595B used TORR free CLASE 29 Hay 2 18 18 Aatro Clock Hert suerise 04 52 00 Hert gusset 21 03 00 20 May 18 18 Starting Lina ervir 29 May 19 18 18 Project unigueld 00 44001274 6 oT 0240be 35 25 Hay 19 18 18 Projet loaded Han ufsetari g teat LFCL 29 Hay 19 16 18 Ceefiquriag Reise bsod 38400 data bite Perityinces top bite 29 Ha 18 18 Coes time is os 13 18 18 GAT 1 Daylight Bawing On 29 Mar 18 10 17 Stariteag 216 load preject 29 May 18 18 17 Tica 18 18 17 OT 25 May 18 18 17 Dat 79 Hay 2005 29 Hay 18 18 17 10 initialized 78 Mar 12 18 11 Kn dor dar tad mi The log can be cleared and saved to file using the Clear and Save buttons Two types of log are provided General log A blow by blow account of all activity including input output RS232 serial strings for example and trigger match ing Extremely useful in helping debug complex interfacing and triggering arrangements Alternatively the log can be viewed directly from within Designer over an Ethernet or USB connection using View gt Controller Log System log A less verbose log of the Controller s system activity useful for examining the boot up sequence to help debug problems 168 Web interface Default pages TE teres SCT Foyer LPC Out
17. function pixel frame x y Vocal c COLOuUr MewiZo57 0 01 return c red c green c blue end This fills every pixel of every frame with red 231 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Earlier in this document we stated that the pixel function should return 3 numbers representing the red green and blue components of a colour This was not the entire truth We are also allowed to return a single variable of type colour This function is therefore equivalent to Listing 8 Listing 9 function pixel frame x y toal c COoTour HewiZooj Us 0 ret rn c end Once again we return to our vertical band example and use colour variables to specify the band colour and the background colour Listing 10 width of the bands in pixels band width 4 space between bands in pixels band spacing i the colour of the band band colour colour mew 2397070 the colour of the space between bands background colour colour new 007293 get the combined width of band and separator local total band width band widthtband spacing get the number of visible bands local bands width total band width modulo operator ab function mod a b return a math floor a b b end the pixel function function pixel frame x y if mod x total band width gt band width then gt in band separator recura Dackground Colour end get the band in which this pixel falls local band math floor x tot
18. is set to run on controller but no controller has Reconfigure the trigger with the correct Controller that number number Reconfigure the trigger with the correct Controller Action will not be run because controller isn t a TPC number Action requires a serial port but controller doesn t Choose a Controller that does have a serial port have a serial port Action is set to use controller which requires the Controller only supports one serial port so set the serial port to be set to 1 action serial port to 1 Action requires the serial port on controller to be set Reconfigure the serial port of the Controller to use to RS232 the correct mode see Controller Interfaces 180 Issues Action uses the RS485 serial port but controller doesn t have an RS485 serial port Action on trigger requires a valid RS485 port number Action requires the serial port on controller to be set to RS485 Action uses the MIDI Out port but controller doesn t have a MIDI Out port Action is using the same variable to select the BPS number and the button number Trigger requires input on to be configured as a digital input or contact closure Trigger requires to be configured as an Audio input device Trigger uses frequency band on but that device doesn t provide that band Condition requires input on to be configured as a d
19. start timeline timeline index Make a timeline loop N times The designer has requested that a particular timeline runs once at sunset on a Monday but twice at sunset ona Tuesday three times at sunset on Wednesday etc He is planning to keep changing the timeline so does not want to have lots of copies There are actually lots of perfectly reasonable ways to solve this using script Let s assume we have a single astronomical clock trigger that fires at sunset and runs the following script 219 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual N realtime weekday 0 is Sunday 1 is Monday we want Sunday to be 7 rather than 0 if N O then N 7 end start timeline 1 The timeline would be set to loop when it was programmed We also put a flag on the timeline at the end and make a flag trigger that runs a second script decrement N N N 1 if N 0 then release timeline 1 in time 5s stop tame bine 175 end Note how this works by setting the value of the variable N in one script and then using that variable in another script which is often a useful technique have used two scripts here but it is possible to do the same job using only one can you see how In this case you would have the sunset trigger start the timeline directly and use the following script on the flag trigger is this the first time round LE NOE Naor WN S 0 then N realtime weekday 0 is Sunday 1 is Monday
20. 1 Point the IR remote at the BPS and press and hold the key to test e The button s that has learnt this code will illuminate solidly all others will extinguish 2 Release the key and test the others 241 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual To exit Learn Mode 1 Press the reset button or wait for 60 seconds e The buttons will now revert to normal operation e Network communication will resume 242 File formats File formats Fixture plan file format csv The fixture plan file format is versioned to ensure that CSV files generated for Designer 1 7 x and later will be imported into any version of Designer from 1 7 0 onwards Version information must be added to the first line of the CSV file as follows version 2 The current version is 2 Lines starting with are comments and are ignored except the version line Blank lines are ignored Fixture type syntax manufacturer id model id mode id where manufacturer id and model id are the numbers which can be found in the fixture s identification fields in Setup mode id is optional leaving it out assumes mode 0 or that it is irrelevant e The fixture type must be specified before any fixture position line s e Multiple fixture type lines can appear consecutively in a file for batches of different fixture types Fixture position syntax fixture number name x position y position rotation angle width height comment
21. E Timeline Ended and M Timeline Released The Timeline Started Timeline Ended and Timeline Released triggers capture the timeline number as variable 1 if the Timeline parameter is set to Any Digital Input The Digital Input trigger will capture the input number if the Input parameter of the trigger is set to Any If triggering from a RIO s digital input the trigger will capture the input number if the Input parameter of the trigger is set to Any The RIO number will be captured as variable 1 and the input number as variable 2 if both these para meters are set to Any If only one of these parameters is set to Any then the captured number will be stored as variable 1 U Analog Input Captures the analog input as a percentage in variable 1 For example if the input range of the Controller s analog input is set to 0 10V and the input is 4V then variable 1 will be 40 If triggering from a RIO s analog input the analog input value is captured as a percentage in variable 1 then the RIO number if set to Any and the input number if set to Any in subsequent variables If the RIO number and the input number are set to Any then variable 2 will be the RIO number and variable 3 will be the input number If the RIO number is specified then variable 2 will be the input number 01 Serial and im Ethernet Input Serial and Ethernet trigger data is entered as a string of data bytes represented in either ASCII hex or decimal form Any single b
22. Here you can change the audio behaviour for example to include audio from a clip playing on the effect row or from the live input or simply to adjust volume levels AVC Presets If there are no AV fixtures in the project the AVC Presets folder will not be displayed LLE Preset user named Used to play the clips that you created using the Media window to import video and or audio into your project This preset requires a player and can be placed on either the main row for full screen playback or the effect row for PIP or luma key effects 90 Program Working with the Audio Visual Controller LN Block Used in a multi timeline playback scenario to temporarily for the length of the block preset inhibit row pro gramming from other running timelines This preset does not require a player and can be placed on any of the AVC rows Live input Used to display live video and or audio This preset does not require a player and can be placed on the main row for full screen playback or the effect row for PIP or luma key effects abc Dynamic text Renders a text message which can be changed at runtime Text Colour the colour of the text Base Colour the colour of the background Alpha the transparency of the colour X Position Y Position the top left in pixels of the text s rectangle Width the width in pixels of the text s rectangle height is determined from the font Period the number of seconds t
23. Managing project TPCs and MSCs If you will use a different type of Controller for your project such as a TPC for a touch screen interface or an MSC X for a high DMX channel count or more than one Controller if the installation is large or distributed then you will 141 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual want to modify the list of project Controllers To add and set the type of a project TPC or MSC 1 Press the Add Controller button on the Controller toolbar Use the Controller Properties pane to give the Controller a useful name perhaps describing where in the installation it is or what it controls 3 Use the type pull down to select whether it is a TPC MSC or MSC X 4 Select the number of universes that the Controller supports unless using the original MSC 1 2 hardware The Controller has now been added to the project If the project has a TPC with a TPC RIO then the TPC RIO will be configured automatically by the TPC You can add a TPC RIO toa TPC in project by checking the Configure TPC RIO check box in the TPC s Controller Inter faces tab To delete a project TPC or MSC 1 Select the project TPC or MSC by clicking the left hand button the row will highlight 2 Press Delete Controller on the Controller toolbar IMPORTANT Deleting a project TPC or MSC that has been patched will result in the loss of this patch data Managing project AVCs If your project requires audio visual control for example a plasma sc
24. cece e eee cece eee 190 can see the Controller in the network window but it is shown in red _ 2 22 22 eee e eee eee ee eee 190 Simulation looks fine but when upload to the MSC nothing happens 2 2 02 022e0 191 Trigger conditions do not work in simulation why 0 22 22 cece e eee cee cee cee ccecceecceceeceeces 191 Output Live does nothing eect GAs atau ada 191 Why do see a delay between the simulation and the MSC in Output Live 0 000 00 222 191 The Controller s playback performance is deteriorating over time Why 22 022 ee eee eee 191 Uploading was working ok but now always fails 2 22 2 e eee ccc ee cee cece cee ceeceecceceecees 191 When try to Upload see a list of issues instead 2 2 0 lle cee cee cee cee cee cece eeees 191 Is there a way of seeing what the Controller is doing 0 0 2 e eee eee eee cee cece cece eeees 191 get a Magic number does not match error when opening a project file 192 15 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual get loads of warnings about custom fixtures when opening a project file 192 have forgotten the Controller s password _ 2 0 02 02 c eee cece cece ee cee cee cece ec ee cee eeeeee 192 have checked the FAQ and troubleshooting but I m still stuck ooo 192 When using DMX In on a MSC or AVC is my DMX line terminated _
25. has disable hardware watchdog DIP switch set Controller has serial debug DIP switch set Controller has configuration for a module that is not attached to physical controller Controller doesn t have configuration for a module that is attached to physical controller Controller has no DMX fixtures patched to it troller set as the time server can support see DALI The PC running Designer and the Controller are in dif ferent time zones see Location Synchronize the Controller s realtime clock to the PC see date and time Clear the DIP switch setting for factory testing use only Clear the DIP switch setting for factory testing use only Clear the DIP switch setting for factory testing use only Attach the Expansion Module Module attached to the wrong Controller move it or reconfigure Patch the fixtures or ignore if working with DALI only 178 Issues DALI programming has changed on Interface since the ballast configuration was last uploaded peate META E pArA ts eee ian Timeline uses Timecode Bus but no input is con Ensure that the timecode source routed to that bus nected to that source Timeline uses Audio Bus but no input is connected to Ensure that the audio source routed to that bus that source Timeline uses band on Audio Bus which is not Select a band that is available for that bus or provided by the assigned input c
26. printed version is shipped with every Controller There is user help available within the software this document this is also available as a PDF for printing Visit our website for more resources How many timelines can program How many fixtures etc See system limits and capacities 183 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual How can tell what DMX levels are being generated During programming when simulating using Output Live there is a DMX viewer available in the View menu which displays the DMX values generated by Designer During Controller playback you can use the web inter face to view the Controller s DMX output Where s Undo Sorry there isn t one yet Remember that accidental drags can be aborted by hitting Esc For more serious mis haps Designer can make backup copies of the project every time you save so you can always revert to this last saved version see below Backing up Designer can keep a number old versions of the project file when you save In the Preferences dialog you can set the number of old files to keep Before saving your project Designer will rename the project file on disk by adding the current time and date to the file name such as my_project_bak_ 2007 04 18 15 58 09 mdp If you already have the number of specified backups the oldest backup will be removed from the disk The rest is up to you so save early save often Use File gt Save As to produce manual backups of the project
27. 1 2 4 hardware and the AVC can be configured here to receive the DMX protocol directly MIDI In MSC 1 2 amp 4 only The MSC s MIDI Input can read MIDI Timecode MTC allowing a presentation to be synchronised with audio visual or show control equipment The configuration options are e Route To select one of the six Timecode Buses to which the MIDI timecode MTC should be routed e Regenerate for select the number of frames that should automatically be generated in the case of loss of a valid signal e Ignore jumps for select the number of frames that should be considered a valid jump in the timecode value MIDI messages other then MTC for example MIDI Notes or MIDI Show Control MSC require no configuration and these protocols can be used simply by setting up the appropriate triggers Ethernet The Controller s Ethernet port can send and receive Ethernet messages allowing a presentation to be syn chronised with Building Management Systems BMS or show control equipment The configuration options are e Route To select one of the five Ethernet Buses to which the incoming Ethernet messages should be routed e Type select the messaging protocol UDP TCP or Multicast the latter will require an IP address e Port enter the appropriate port Note that the Controllers do not use a specific Ethernet protocol but instead can generate or match any Ethernet string by setting up the appropriate triggers DMX In MSC X and
28. 142 To identify a Controller beacon 22 2 2 cece cece eee cee cee cece eee e eee eeeeees 142 MVS SS oa pee A e ds o a 143 To change the Time Server occ occ 143 WED InteMaCe1O0l S reer renee ct ee ae aes ete itt De el ete a te ts at Sh EE 143 To view a Controller s web interface 2 222 22 o cece cece eee eee cece cece ee eeeeeceeeeees 143 To create files for uploading via the web interface _ 0 02 002 c eee cece eee cece eens 143 PG Ui ANS AAA noth A IO A E SMa eee eae a he ale eae 143 To transfer files to and from a Controller s memory card 2 22 2 2222 cece cece eee eee ee 143 MacOS USES ss loe ad cios SO ia 144 GONHolekStatUsS censor stas cons a sal ds lla oso ie lio al 144 Disabling UU o sia Slap ais ad Calg a ai 144 Network Controller configuration _ 0 0 2 02 c ccc e cece cece cee cece eee eee eeceeeeeeeee 145 o ce ten ts eee wera 145 Roc 2 Hats hee ota test e oe cao A een weet anne neo sad aie aden 145 Wale oo AAA A A Oe Eee RIOT 146 Remote Logging via Syslog 22 02 c cece cece cee ce eee eee cee cee cee cece ee eeeeeeeeeees 146 NIP SSR A A A A Bento NN 146 NA A o o da 146 Admin Password A 146 To change the Controller configuration settings 0 0 02 002 22 e eee eee eee cece cece eee eee 146 Dei ge itl TINE eee eee ace E RET en nC eT EN Oe mete rea Se NE RTT EE AAN 147 To change manually the Time Server s date and time
29. 15 seconds from the first digital input and then stop and wait First we would modify the timer timeline say it is number 5 so that it no longer loops Then we would modify our script on the digital inputs to be Lf Count 0 then stare timeline 5 end count count 1 221 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Inverting a DMX input before it is used with a Set Intensity action A client s existing DMX control system is connected to the Controller s DMX Input Channel 12 controls the houselights and they want the intensity of our LED installation to increase as the houselights go to black out and to decrease as the houselights come on to full We can configure a DMX Input trigger so that it fires any time the value of channel 12 changes As a side effect the DMX Input trigger will always capture the value of the channel it is watching as a trigger variable If the client wanted the intensity of the LEDs to vary with the houselights we could put a Set Intensity action directly onto this trigger and take the level from the input However the client wants an inverse relationship so instead we will put a simple script in between to invert the value The DMX input trigger will run the following script get the value of the DMX channel from variable chan variable 1 invert it chan 255 chan now pass it to a second trigger Li jeCk LinLoger 2 Cham Trigger 2 can be a soft trigger but its action should be Se
30. 161 To associate a project Remote Device with a real device manual addresses 16 gt 100 161 Remote Input Output RIO device properties ooooccocccccccccccccccccccccccocccnccnc non 162 A e a rs e 162 I O Configuration ops Stents Sse Sieieliah ec aonan rron 162 PUNO raspa id te taras ar ieee ae Selah nen Oa 162 MIU YRS OS asi ra E O A tana a cto 162 AA A A RE 163 DAN oe sl a io ed da o ROT ee e Dee et 163 Button Panel Station BPS device properties ooooocccccccccccccccccccccccccccnccnccnccnccnncnnccnoos 163 ORCS AAA heck tae at eet as ae eat A 163 Button Configuration ooo 163 A A eg a A A es ee ee 164 FREDO TOON aM sicario disco ce pee ds ae e li cata 164 A A etna aa aan te 164 E st eee aaa ote T E E ete eh tN ees nee ee ee TS 164 ME UM cases pease tsi ea tice enc ence E E E ase 164 AUBIN a s cl aco ctra oe See ee ee ee e eo ao o heey Da 164 AA O ee ee ene A IA 165 e AA A A AA A AA 165 Network A A A A ia Eee 165 13 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual NS See ee eat Meo O E Pi ate RTE RR eRe ec NN 165 SS A 165 Report spreadsheet dd eae 165 Exporting a report ti edad 165 Web interface Default pages ooocccccccccccc ccoo 166 FOU AAA 166 FOI ia ches a ah Joss casein A ened een taei ete 167 AAA E Aan Lae A 167 OUDS rs e id a de UN as ee E 167 E A a VE SLOT Se A he tet Tey OO TR OES ee OPE oe ER ey eT eT AUT eee rT ee 168 E e A A E Ie Ae Ae ee 168 SEL O 3 fase ores tenants se
31. 40 5 gt decide if this pixel is inside the band local h math abs y height 2 IE ho lt band height then return rainbow band bands t else offset hue by quarter return rainbow band bands t 0 25 end end We have defined a new function rainbow which returns a fully saturated r g b value for a given hue This func tion is then called with different arguments depending on whether on not a pixel falls inside or outside of a band User defined functions can be used whenever you want to use a similar piece of code in multiple places with dif fering arguments Running this script you will see that the bands are now coloured with a rainbow which changes over time and the area above and below the band is filled with a colour that is pi 2 radians out of phase with the band s colour Working with colours Working with colours as 3 separate components can produce a wide variety of effects but sometimes it is more convenient to treat a colour as a single entity We can do that with the colour library To create a variable of type colour call colour new passing in three values between 0 and 255 which rep resent the red green and blue components of the colour i e Local 6 lt coLourcnew 255 0 0 The variable c has the type colour and represents red Colours have three properties red green andblue which can be used to access and alter that colour Here is a simple example using the colour type Listing 8
32. 80 and RIO 44 have inputs that can be configured as digital or analog inputs in the Remote Devices tab of the Network view Use the Controller and Input settings to specify which Controller s analog input should be considered the input source Alternatively leave the Input set to Any to match any of the inputs of the Controller and to capture the input as a variable To use a RIO s input as the input source change the Device from Local and select the RIO number or leave this as Any Now you should specify the range of voltage to trigger on You can choose whether to trigger every time the voltage changes within the specified range Changes in range or to only trigger when the voltage enters the specified range Enters range Enters range is generally more useful when you are using analog inputs to trig ger timelines but Changes in range would be required if you were using an analog input as a variable passed to a Set Intensity action to control the intensity for a group The voltage range of a Controller s or RIO s analog input can be configured in the Network view The smallest measurable voltage change is 0 25V g Serial Input RS232 remains a very popular protocol for interfacing equipment and the RS232 port of a Controller or Remote Device can be configured to support most common data formats RS485 is a more robust alternative to RS232 better noise immunity longer cable lengths and faster data rates and is a widely suppor
33. Browser unprogrammed remain black Colour picker amp user palette The majority of presets allow you to select one or more colours and so the colour picker and user palette is used to select a colour either graphically or numerically two modes are provided ic d 80 E 86 Program Working with presets Sh a Le ci a i e ss a HE De i 5 eR E E o o TE A i A user colour palette is displayed on the right hand side The top three buttons automatically keep track of the last three colours deployed and below them is the user palette which comes pre loaded with useful primary and sec ondary colours white and black To add your own colour simply mix it using the picker hold Ctrl Apple and click on a palette slot either empty or occupied in the latter case the new colour will replace the old If more slots are required then Ctrl Apple click on the plus sign at the bottom of the palette you must first scroll down The user palette is stored with the project Warm Cold fixtures The temperature slider takes effect on fixtures with warm white and cold white control channels and on fixtures with a single colour temperature channel Transparency Some preset types support transparency This is where one of the colours within the effect is specified as trans parent allowing whatever programming is running underneath to be seen It is a very powerful feature allowing some very specific effects to
34. If intensity is specified fade can also optionally be specified and should be between Os and 25 4s bps get_state button For example MDPS get POSAL if MyeBPoroel stave 2 HELD then mpBPS set LED Z FAST FLASH LO Ov end Accessing trigger variables The variable must have been captured by the trigger running the script variable index Value of variable with given index Writing messages to the Controller s status log log string Writes string into the log Storing data on the memory card Using a Lua script it is possible to store data as a file on the memory card Unlike variables in memory data stored to a file will not be affected by resetting the Controller or cycling the power The file can be read back at any time to access the data This can be very useful in show control situations where some system status inform ation needs to be stored persistently even if the Controller is reset Alternatively it can allow you to store large data tables on the memory card and only read the data when it is needed To work with files on the memory card use the standard I O library functions described in the Lua documentation When writing to a file always close the file explicitly to make sure your data is correctly stored The full file path to a file on the memory card differs per Controller so we have provided a function to create the full file path for you get_resource_path my_file Returns the full file path
35. Phos Pp TE betes Assim Sollee enha ps 16591 betes Baseina eras pg Tid bytes Sepals eel b 5 je og Wweba a crs le betes contact him BESS bytes comillas hirn 2351 bytes custom hin EJE bytes Laan ac 17542 bees boca eben EFE bytes rides hirri Tes MER hes paiia hina TA bye a m Mm i Sets Delaut Remove Cies ok Adding files To add files to the web interface click Add Files You will be prompted for a directory that contains the files to add The contents of the chosen directory will be added to the root of the web interface If any filenames clash they will be overwritten Sub directories will be recursively added with the exception of directories called default query or trigger which are reserved names Any file type can be included but since they are stored as part of the project file be aware that they will take away from space available for programming and will increase show upload times Removing files To remove a file select the file and press Remove Toremove all files press Clear Defining the default page To pick a default file select the file and press Set As Default The default page will be displayed when you browse to http xxx xxx xxx Xxx where xxx xxx xxx xx iS the IP address of the Controller Defining triggers Custom web pages can trigger the Controller by creating a hyperlink to trigger xyz where xyz is the trigger number displayed in the first column of the Tri
36. Zoo LE NA AO E end However if you changed your mind about the colours that you wanted for your gradient it would be significantly harder to alter Listing 12 than it would be to change the colours in the first two lines of Listing 11 Working with gradients The gradient library adds support for more complicated gradients that cannot be achieved by interpolating between two colours To create a new variable of type gradient call yradient new passing in two colours i e 233 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Tecal El 3CO LOour new 00 04 0 Local az co Lour new Oy 0 255 local g gradient new cl c2 To find the colour of the gradient at a specific point use the 1ookup function passing in a number between 0 and 1 For example Listing 13 local red colour new 255 0 0 local blue colour new 070 255 local g gradient new red blue function pixel frame x y note the use of the colon operator return g lookup x width 1 end This creates a horizontal gradient from red to blue but we have already seen that there are other ways to generate the same result which will probably be more efficient To show where the gradient library offers more power Listing 14 Local red colour new2357 07505 local blue colour new 0 0 255 local g gradient new red blue add a third point to the middle of the gradient local green colour new 0 255 0 gradd point 0 5 green function pixel
37. a TPC Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Page drop down list from the Touch Editor project see Controller Properties Set the Page field to the name of the target page or use the variable injection syntax to make this action work for several pages with similar names the syntax is the same as for the Serial and Ethernet Output action 116 Triggers TPC triggers Disable TPC The entire user interface of a TPC can be enabled or disabled Set the Controller number to the target TPC then choose whether to enable or disable the user interface Lock TPC If TPC security has been setup in Touch Editor then this action can be used to show the lock screen on the target TPC The user must enter the correct code on the keypad in order to unlock the TPC Set the Controller number to the target TPC then choose whether to lock or unlock the user interface Set Screen Brightness The brightness of the backlight of a TPC may be set using this action Set the Controller number to the target TPC then set the value as a percentage or elect to set this from a variable NOTE the brightness of the TPC screen can be set automatically in response to changes in ambient light see Controller Properties 117 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Triggers Conditions Sometimes you only want a trigger to function in certain circumstances for example during the day but not during the night This
38. and check the 14 bit variable checkbox In MSC messages if the Cue number and List number are left blank the received values will be captured in variables Cue number is captured into variable 1 and list number into variable 2 Extended messages support the same wildcard format as serial triggers The only difference is that lt 2c gt cap tures a 16 bit value in serial triggers and it captures a 14 bit value in MIDI triggers If triggering from a RIO A s MIDI input the RIO A number will be captured as the first variable if set to Any DMX Input When a DMX Input trigger matches it will implicitly store the channel value as variable 1 lid Audio Input When an Audio input trigger matches it will implicitly store the level for the band as variable 1 If triggering from a RIO A the RIO A number will be captured if set to Any 124 Triggers Variables A DALI Input If the trigger is using a Min to Max range then the matching number will be stored as variable 1 A DALI Ballast Error If All is selected instead of a specific address then the address of the ballast reporting the error will be stored as variable 1 BPS Button If the button number is set to Any the trigger captures the pressed button as variable 1 Alternatively if the BPS station number is set to Any then the station number is captured as variable 1 and the button number as variable 2 E Paradigm Indicator If any of the parameters
39. as possible their actual deployment the software will com pensate for gaps and irregularities in a matrix so that media will be rendered correctly Fixtures that have been rotated on the Plan during Setup will be placed on the Matrix using this rotation although this is only relevant to compound fixtures Such fixtures can be rotated separately for each Matrix by dragging them around when the cursor indicates rotate mode note that the first element of a compound fixture is displayed a darker pink for easy orientation To remove a fixture from a Matrix right click on the fixture on the plan and select Remove Fixture To break a composite fixture apart into individual pixels right click on the fixture on the plan and select Break Fix ture You may create as many Matrices as you like and any fixture can be used as a pixel in any Matrix but clearly those that can colour mix are the sensible choice RGB LEDs being by far the best due to their large colour gamut and fast response That being said the software will render coloured media as grey scale on intensity only fix tures H Crop render window Use the Crop Render Window button to trim the Render Window to fit the extents of the fixture array Manual sizing of the Render Window is provided by typing in appropriate Width and Height size values and it is perfectly allowable to undersize the Render Window to achieve effects such as picture in picture or oversize it to concentrate on a par
40. be achieved that would otherwise be impossible However it also allows you to break some of the usual rules of Unison Mosaic playback and so it may need some extra thought or experimentation to get the result you are looking for Here are some tips on how to get the best from this feature e Before using transparency make sure there isn t a way to achieve what you want using the existing opaque presets If there is another way to get what you want then that may make life simpler Use trans parency for those very specific effects that cannot be achieved any other way e t can sometimes be difficult to make transparent effects behave tidily when a timeline loops Use it in timelines that don t loop or hold at end when you can or make a point of turning off the transparent effect before the point when it loops e t may be easier to get the result you want by using several timelines Often problems can be avoided by having one timeline that contains the transparent effects and putting the background non transparent effects into a separate timeline e When you are using multiple timelines don t forget about the timeline priority setting This can be a way of ensuring that transparent effects stay on top while you change the background underneath Mover presets Mover presets can be dropped onto the Mover rows at the required time to synchronise their control with the rest of the presentation Unlike the other presets Mover presets remain active fo
41. ce ac es 112 KOF OO E pino ee ur cto ol Ea o o eh cae e Eto aa de 112 Set BPS Button LED o 113 Paradigm AM a ade e ee lated le 113 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Disable AUdIOIANPUt 2 al ea RC 113 Toggle eDMX Pass fhru oo A ae 113 Hardware A O A A A A A 113 Triggers TPC triggers occ cece ee eee cee ee eee cece eee eee cece eee eeeeeeees 114 TRES a WEE ETE OPT Ee re OR ee 114 WE AAA eae ee ie Ae ae E 114 ITPC Slider VION Cri arca tc set her ld dl e id tos cha emis liada soii 114 TPC Cobu Changa oo tt il ais oh ee eh A anaes wn ee ee eee ea enaane sue 114 TPO Keypad C ode AA A eR ty ee eee EIT ee 115 TPC Page Change a ise cra apse a a tol bicis 115 PS A A AN 115 TOMA A das 115 TPE aCUONS o eo ol 116 Set TPG CONTO Vale occasion src a do to ta sata 116 Set IPE CONTO Sle cose a A A id 116 Set TPC Control Capone di a E coeds a aa 116 AA O A A IN IN 116 Disable TPC cre ee cs tice nus hese atest data lis te eka ei Ets do te ao 117 LOCK TE A A A O A ee eR ETS 117 Set Screen Brightness ooo 117 Triggers Conditions ici is ee eS SS 118 CONGINONAY DESe narra rd dd iaa 118 al A Na ee Niece yey aa ante nee encanta cI 118 THIMGNNG ONS LAGE ot Mer ete oot ete es oaks es Soke oso eine ea erga o be EAEE 118 A ERA A 118 o A a a a a end Reel aed ea iets enntasae aloe ies 120 A fecha ace AAA hts eee sitet aes eine idee ee ease TEN 120 LAA A VNTR OOS Baa eR 120 Be EUAN WN OC AAA A IN IN ean a et ae 120 AA AEE 121 BI LA A ete ehh a P
42. cee sen ones ee duc dette idad team ac 130 Program window play head Timeline mode only 2 2 2 2222 ce eee cece cece eee cece eee 130 Testing trigger variables 0 0 0 0 0 0 o cece eee cee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee ence eee eee eee 130 Testing moger COMGIMOINS dial acta 130 Simulating MECO a Es Do 130 Simulating WA des 131 Simulating the AVC o a a iberia dd 131 OUI A E NN ae 131 Tear off simulator 2 2 2 2 2 occ cee eee eee eee eee eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeseees 131 Upload A II a ee de ocean ae AN 133 Upload tothe AA 133 ISSUES aara a e a E A E DC 134 Restore after upload 0 00000000000000 000000000000000 0000000000002 SOT lea suet een Oe eee eee 134 What s actually uploaded lt lt A A A AA A AE A 134 Can the project file be retrieved from the Controller s 0 ooococcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoo 134 PATS TAWA ONO COn ia cd da e el rl ea ase e ee 134 Network Overview _ 02 2 aoaaa aoaaa aaa ccc eee cece ee eee cence cece cece cece eee anaana 135 o NS agen age tae hee II NS Oa eee 135 Tessera Panel Controller TPC 0 0 00 02 o occ cece cece ec cece cee cece cece cee eeeeeeeeees 135 TPC Wt TORIO as se a os ar ea cone alg ole dae eet aie encarta oct aaa Plis 135 Mosaic Show Controllers MSC _ 0 0 002 2 o cece cece ee eee eee eee eee cece eee eeeeeeees 135 Audio Visual Controller AVC 20 0 0 0202 c cece cc ccc cece cee eee ccoo cnc 135 Expansion MOQUIES ato ios ii A id
43. cell of a slot to edit the text stored in that slot e Youcan remove unused text slots by pressing Remove e Press Ok to save changes and Cancel to discard changes The Set Text Slot trigger action allows you to change the value of a text slot from a trigger There are two built in slots lt time gt and lt date gt which show the current time and date respectively You can change the format of how the time and date are displayed in the Dynamic Text Configuration dialog Press the button next to the Text property to open this dialog At the bottom of the dialog you can select from some standard time and date formats or type your own using the following codes a Abbreviated weekday name ZA Full weekday name b Abbreviated month name B Full month name Yc Date and time representation od Day of the month 01 31 H Hour in 24h format 00 23 Hour in 12h format 01 12 Yoj Day of the year 001 366 Ym Month as a decimal number 01 12 YM Minute 00 59 p AM or PM designation S Second 00 61 U Week number with the first Sunday as the first day of week one 00 53 Yow Weekday as a decimal number with Sunday as 0 0 6 YW Week number with the first Monday as the first day of week one 00 53 YX Date representation YX Time representation y Year last two digits 00 99 Y Y Year Z Timezone name or abbreviation Y A sign All other text is used verbatim The computed output will be truncated to 255 characters
44. default value is the initial value of a property when first added to a timeline The value passed in here depends on the type of the property and this is outlined below Certain types of properties also allow some addition arguments to be specified and these will also be described for each type below Boolean properties property invert BOOLEAN true The default value should be true or false Integer properties property county INTEGER number min max stepl The default value should be a number between min and max e minis the minimum allowed value default 2147483648 e max is the maximum allowed value default 2147483647 e step Is the difference between allowed values default 1 min max and step are optional Float properties property count FLOAT number min max resolution The default value should be a number between min and max e minis the minimum allowed value e max is the maximum allowed value e resolution is the number of decimal places to display default 2 min max and resolution are optional Colour properties property background COLOUR red green blue red green and blue are the default values of the components of the colour Gradient properties property gradient GRADIENT fraction red green blue sas 236 Custom Preset Programming Guide The default value of a gradient is a list of fractions and colours where fraction Is in the range 0
45. es on the specified interface 110 Triggers Advanced Aa Set Text Slot The Set Text Slot trigger action allows you to change the value of a text slot from a trigger see the Dynamic Text preset You select the slot either by picking from the Text Slot list or by specifying a variable If you use a variable the variable must have captured a string in the trigger and that string must be the name of an existing text slot The value to put in the text slot is then selected with the second variable Y Inject Trigger Use this to fire a Trigger You can specify which trigger you want to fire or which variable you want to use to get the trigger number from You can also choose whether you want test the conditions of that trigger or not i Run Script Use this to run a Lua script press Launch Editor to open the script editing dialog If you can not achieve what you want with the triggers and actions provided it is almost certain that a script can be defined to solve your problem Unison Mosaic Controllers support a scripting language that can be used for handling complicated conditional trig gering or other advanced control requirements The user can write scripts and set them to run in response to any trigger event From within a script you can do all the things that you can do with a trigger in the triggers screen access passed in variables test conditions and perform actions but you can also define more complicated co
46. expired gt Timeline onstage Use this condition to determine if a timeline is currently affecting the output of the Controller It will be true as long as one fixture patched to this Controller is being controlled by the timeline It does not matter whether the timeline is running or holding at end D Real Time Real time conditions can be used to limit the operation of a trigger to certain times A single condition can be set to match if the current time is before after or equal to the time specified Remember that the advanced dialog can be used to set a mask this can be particularly useful with the equal setting for defining ranges for example daily opening times Where you want to specify a very specific range of times you can use two real time con ditions on the same trigger one specifying the time it must be after and the other the time it must be before and both must match The conditions work by creating a mask of times where each value of a component year month day day of week hour minute or second can either be in the mask or not When a trigger that has this condition on it is triggered the current time will have a single value for each component If the operator is Equals the mask must contain those values for the condition to be satisfied 118 Triggers Conditions Date and Time Date Tire G Ever day Are Time O Week Days 5 Every How 7200 2 mrizec Once aweek Sunday O Once 00 02 00 ho
47. for a match Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Page drop down list from the Touch Editor project see Controller Properties The Page field should be set to the name of the page you re interested in this is a property of pages that is set in Touch Editor Either pick a page name from the list or type it in You can also specify wether you want the trigger to fire when entering or leaving that page You can use one trigger to respond to multiple pages by using variables the syntax is the same as for Serial and Ethernet Input triggers See actions that use variables for how to make use of the captured variables fhn TPC Inactivity Whenever the sleep awake state of a TPC screen is updated triggers of this type will be checked for a match Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to trigger for the correct controller Choose whether to trig ger after a period of inactivity or when the TPC becomes active is touched again The timing for when the controller is set to inactive is in the Controller Properties area of the Network tab l Temperature The TPC has a temperature sensor which can be used in triggers Use the Controller to specify which TPC should be considered the input source Select the units as Celcius or Fahrenheit then choose how to respond to changes You can choose whether to trigger every time the tem perature changes within a specified range Changes in range o
48. for reference only and can not be edited Name amp number Here you can enter a new name for the fixture useful to help make the browser easier to navigate and the means to change the fixture s unique user number Every fixture added to the project is assigned a user number which is used as a shorthand method of selecting it using the web interface s command line for example Use the up and down arrows to change the number but note that only available numbers are shown so you may need to change the number of another fixture first to make that number available Note that the user number does not affect the order of the fixtures in the Browser and thus the order used for transitions Locked Select Yes to prevent the fixture s from being moved or included in drag selections Evidently once locked drag selection is prohibited to select multiple fixtures to unlock so you must use the Browser instead Comments Below this are two fields for entering any comments about the fixture useful for annotating the project s doc umentation These comments will appear in the fixture report and in exported CSV fixture plans 35 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Fixture Position Use these fields to set numerically the fixture s position and orientation on the plan and to change the size and shape of the fixture s icon useful for tweaking their scale to that of the plan background if the default scale not used 1cm 1 pixel It is d
49. have learning IR sensors so they can be programmed to respond to any IR remote Is there a way to call up channels for focus Yes on the Control page of the web interface there is a command line that allows the user to enter fixture intens ity amp RGB values This also provides a park function as values set here override any programmed values 188 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting The following section lists common problems and their solutions beginning with an explanation of the Controller s LED indicators What are the Controller s LEDs telling me MSC and AVC Status LEDs The ETC logo will illuminate when power is applied to the Controller The red LEDs on the top front of the Con troller indicate the unit s current status e The Active LED illuminates once the boot up procedure has completed and is indicative of a fully func tional unit e The Ethernet LED s indicates network activity not network link while the remaining LEDs indicate com munication on the various ports of the Controller e The DMX original MSC 1 amp 2 Output TPC MSC and MSC X and PAL NTSC AVC LEDs indicate that a valid project file has been loaded from the memory card and that playback has started TPC Status LEDs The top red LED on the front and rear of the Controller will illuminate when power is applied The other red LEDs on the front of the TPC visible when the magnetic overlay is removed indicate the unit s current status
50. in the Browser and drag them onto the required start address of the graphical representation Right click on a patched fixture to unpatch it or clear the entire universe port drag it to move it change its address Fixtures may be patched to multiple addresses and universes ports Patched fixtures are shown in blue in the Browser unpatched black To patch a fixture 1 Use Controller and Universe to select the desired Controller and universe of this Controller if the Con troller has multiple universes 49 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual 2 Select the fixture in the Browser 3 Drag and drop the fixture onto the desired start address To patch multiple fixtures 1 Use Controller and Universe to select the desired universe 2 Select a group of fixtures in the Browser see selecting fixtures 3 Drag and drop the group of fixtures onto the desired start address of the first fixture in the selection To change a fixture s address 1 Use Controller and Universe to select the universe on which the fixture is patched 2 Select the fixture s on the universe layout and simply drag them to a new address to move them to another universe you must unpatch see below then repatch Fixtures may be patched to as many locations and universes as is required although typically a fixture will only be patched to one unique address The Designer software will prompt you with a warning dialogue should you attempt to patch a fixture that is
51. installed any other software with USB functionality especially PC lighting soft ware with USB DMX dongles since installing Designer Unplug the Controller and any 3rd party USB DMX device uninstall and reinstall Designer reboot the PC and try again e Have you installed an earlier version of Designer on top of a later version If so reinstall the latest version you ve used uninstall it then reinstall the earlier version you want to use again It is best practice to always uninstall Designer before installing another version to ensure any files and drivers are properly cleaned up Ethernet problems network e Quit and restart Designer again once you re sure that the network is up use your PC s LAN status tools e By default the Controllers are set to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server is there one on the net work Put one up and reset the Controller or set a static IP address via USB e Do you have more than one network connection on the PC Wireless perhaps If so did you choose the right network the one with the Controller s when you started Designer e ls the Controller s firmware compatible with Designer Update it with the TPC recovery procedure the MSC recovery procedure or MSC X Recovery Tool e Are there any managed switches on the network Traffic storms from 3rd party devices Try pinging the Controller and other network debugging ploys beyond the scope of this document Ethernet problems one to one e Forad
52. missing components are assumed to be 0 so the following function is equivalent to Listing 1 Listing 2 function pixel frame x y return 255 end A real example To demonstrate what can be achieved with custom presets we are going to build up a real example as concepts are introduced throughout this guide To start we are going to create a preset that renders a series of vertical red bands Listing 3 width of the bands in pixels band width 4 space between bands in pixels band spacing 1 modulo operator asb function mod a b return a math floor a b b end the pixel function function pixel frame x y use the modulo operator to split the horizontal axis into bands 22 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual and decide if we are in the band or in the separator between bands if mod x band widthtband spacing lt band width then Sk Dand recur oops else in band separator return Oy 00 end end You will note that we have defined a new function mod to implement the modulo operator This was done to make the script more readable We will discuss user defined functions again later We also defined two variables band width and band spacing These we placed outside of the pixel func tion because they are the same for every pixel of every frame of the effect so it is more efficient to not execute the assignment for every pixel Any code outside of the pixel function is executed once befor
53. monitor kanit 0 ono a 37 100095 o UU UU IU etb i i ane pa E cn gt AAA 20 rai E 131 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Press Ctrl Apple F8 or tear off the Simulate mode tab to open this window Incredibly helpful in speeding up your productivity 132 Upload Upload Once you have confirmed that your programming is as you want you can upload to the Controllers by either press ing the Upload button on the Network window or via File gt Upload Ctrl U pad Yates z Direct upload as opposed to remote see the web interface is not possible without connected Controllers see the network section but this allows you to upload your programming to one or more Controllers for stand alone operation You can either use the Upload All button to upload to all connected Controllers or select specific Controllers from list and press Upload to target them alone IMPORTANT Changes made to a Controller s or Expansion Module s configuration will only take effect after an upload IMPORTANT Changes made to the DALI configuration including DALI groups and scenes must be uploaded separately to the DALI ballasts see DALI Upload to the AVC When uploading to the AVC it may take some time to prepare media for upload and then to transfer the files over the network Once Designer has uploaded the media files it will not need to upload them again unless you change
54. nok sent aaa an en E E N 22 AAA E A AN 221 SO A o e ed e e o EOS 221 A real example AAA POE IO aPe ue PM ou CE RE Mee ar eRe OTST eT ee re 22 BUSTING A A ee tees tea A ean ene eh ae as 22 PVM TANGA on eet hse pg as Pees ete aa cep aaa cea he sarees ey at 228 PENS UNC ee aieeaa Se aca cee hens reine eas hese tenet aaa fale ne tate msn Aa ieee Ae ate OSE 228 EL A eae Sree ROR PRTC OER SER ene Or A ART EE 229 ENS UIC Ox TAIETE AA A AT AE 229 More colours than just red oo 230 E A A aa a a e a E 230 WORKING VIET COORG oeaiei a a A Eo be dle ahah 231 HUNG AAA A A AA E asda 231 Ae A A O A A O NT 232 EC TM aes sh neces eect O aca gee een E N 232 o ACN CMM 3 Saat he ate rc ea A A ik hh a te ed a ee 233 E PA AA A A aneaae 233 MA A SN A A ack enc nace NE 233 _17 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Woking WMA STNG Shs acts ert dee EDO 233 HVS CEC A hacia inne te aa eas tustite neetaed sae ae asa sel 234 LSS PEIN AA A BEE Aa lars lah ella II aia ett 234 ENS CIC Oeste mse tases AA A ere eee 234 Working with properties e ies 235 Boolean properties 2 2 22 ieee c cece cece cece cece nes 236 iso A 236 Float properties last adi ds ds 236 COLOUR ODS eS eur e a a ce a eee 236 Gradient propertieS occ ns 236 Al AA A A O O ne oR Ser eRe 237 AAA EIA A aise neers aes 237 Colour library SUMMARY 2 2 202 cece eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee cee cence cece oaoaraa 238 POD CCS nociones a E 238 Gradient library summary ot o
55. now has value 3 x firstTable 1 firstTable 7 x now equals 5 3 Note that we are allowed to assign values to entries within the table without doing anything special to change the size of the table We can keep adding elements to the table as needed and Lua will take care of it for us This makes it possible to write scripts using tables that will work regardless of how many entries there are in the table e g a list of 4 timeline numbers or of 40 Tables are particularly powerful when used together with the loops we looked at in the previous section For example if have a table of numbers and wanted to find the smallest then could use the following script numbers E TL 77 do doo jad Y smallest 10000 initialise with large number 1 L gt Sse to count Loops while numbers i do 1f numbers i lt smallest then smallest numbers 1i end i itl end This is our first really functional piece of script and there are a couple of things worth noting e The first entry in a table is accessed using the number one i e myTable 1 This may seem obvious but some other programming languages start counting from zero e As we increment the variable i each time around the loop this means we will be looking at a different entry in the table each time around The test at the start of my while loop is written to work regardless of how many entries there are in the table When you use a table entry in a test like this th
56. on the Browser that isn t a fixture clears the selection The Browser also provides the interface to view and change the ordering of fixtures pixels within groups This order is used by the application to determine cue timing and effects skews simply drag fixtures about within the Browser to change this order Plan Only fixtures and pixels can be selected using the plan to select groups you must use the Browser Fixtures and pixels are shown in red when selected Shift and Ctrl Apple work with clicking as described above to select deselect and you can also lasso fixtures by clicking and dragging around them fixtures must be wholly enclosed to be selected Hold down Alt to select individual pixels within compound fixtures Hold down Alt and Ctrl Apple to select deselect multiple pixels Pressing Esc or clicking in space anywhere on the Plan that isn t a fixture clears the selection Select next previous fixture With a single fixture selected the Tab key will select the next fixture next higher fixture number and Shift Tab will select the previous fixture next lower fixture number Select all fixtures Ctrl A will select all fixtures Groups Groups are an important concept to grasp as they serve three purposes Firstly as you will see later it is the rows of the Browser that make up the rows of the Program timeline interface thus it is convenient to gather fixtures pixels that are to be programmed together i
57. or Cancel to abort Add more power supplies if required Once you have added your KiNet power supplies use the power supply pull down and the fields below to con figure each in turn Address The power supply s IP address Number A unique user number for the power supply Name A name for the power supply Comment An optional field for additional information location purpose etc Use the Remove button to delete the selected power supply all patch data will be lost DVI MSC X only To output data using the DVI port you must first create a pixel matrix that matches the LED controller s pixel map Once this has been done use the Pixel Matrix pull down on the protocol tab to select which matrix will be output via the DVI port Any programming for the fixtures in the pixel matrix will now output on the DVI port not just pro gramming applied directly to the pixel matrix The MSC X s DVI port is set to a fixed 1024x768 60Hz resolution which is compatible with most LED con trollers The LED controller or monitor MUST be connected when the MSC X boots or resets for the port to become active 152 Network Controller protocols The X and Y offset of the pixel matrix within the 1024x768 DVI output can be set as required The size of the pixel matrix can be scaled up using the multiplier setting each pixel in the matrix will occupy an area equal to the square of the multiplier on the DVI output IMPORTANT Changes made
58. project The rows of the browser provide the seeds for Designer s timeline programming interface Some modes Simulate Network amp Reports have no browser since fixture selection is not relevant Scroll bars will appear as required and the browser can be made wider by dragging the right hand border vee User Interface Browser toolbar The Browser toolbar provides controls for expanding and collapsing groups and compound fixtures as well as for creating groups and Pixel Matrices Plan A graphical representation of the installation that provides an interface for selecting fixtures and simulating the res ults of your programming This plan simulation is one of Designer s most powerful features as it allows you to pro gram and visually test your programming when off site Indeed this feature can be useful in presenting your ideas when bidding for a contract Configuration area Depending on the mode and items selected context sensitive configuration or control pane s will appear here for fast and convenient editing Status bar Context sensitive status and progress is displayed in this area 59 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Keyboard shortcuts For ease and speed of use various keyboard keys map to application commands particularly with regards win dow navigation e Function keys e Ctrl F8 e Delete Backspace e Esc e Cursor keys e Shift cursor key e Page Up Down e Tab e Shi
59. range of input characters and these wildcards can even be captured as variables to determine the trigger s action Ethernet Input Use the Controller setting to specify which Controller should process the Ethernet input Select the Ethernet Source see Controller interfaces and press Edit to define the string of input characters to be matched as the trig ger in much the same way as RS232 see above fd MIDI Input MIDI is another very popular protocol for interfacing equipment and the MIDI input trigger allows you to define via a convenient MIDI Message Builder the type Short message MIDI Show Control or Extended and command string that is to be matched as the trigger Variables can be captured to determine the trigger s action Use the Controller setting to specify which MSC s MIDI port should be considered the input source To use the MIDI port ona RIO A set the Device to RIO A and specify the RIO A number or leave this as Any In this case the RIO number will be captured as a variable Press Edit to open the Message Builder a MH Message Builder 2 MIDI Hertsge Bubiai FO 7F 00 070001 35 4 00 31 OF Irek Hew Apgar Mew Fosa ars Leal Sht happs i Peace ID 0 Fosi Command Ge ph MEC Lit Hum 7 Cue Humi H Eabar a Cancel Press Insert New select one of the three message types and then the specific command and variables Press Append New to add and define another command string to be matched the R
60. select the number of frames that will be generated by the RIO A s software flywheel in the event of a drop in timecode signal e Ignore jumps for select the maximum size of jump in incoming frames that will be ignored MIDI The RIO A has a MIDI input and output interface This can either be used in Remote Device MIDI triggers or it can receive MIDI timecode The configuration options here are for MIDI timecode e Route To select the Timecode Bus to route the MIDI timecode to e Regenerate for select the number of frames that will be generated by the RIO A s software flywheel in the event of a drop in MIDI timecode signal e Ignore jumps for select the maximum size of jump in incoming frames that will be ignored DALI The RIO D has a DALI bus interface This can be used to control DALI ballasts via timeline programming or to receive DALI commands for use in DALI Input triggers Button Panel Station BPS device properties Properties The global properties for each BPS are set here e Minimum LED Intensity set a percentage value as required useful for ensuring that the buttons are always visible e Held Timeout set the amount of time in milliseconds that a button must be pressed to be considered as being held e Repeat Interval set the interval in milliseconds that a held button will transmit a repeat signal Button Configuration Each BPS has eight buttons with an integral white LED and the default setting for each butt
61. starts the dummy timeline This will ensure that the script is only allowed to run once every minute 223 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual This is probably the better solution because it avoids having a script running every second for no reason There is some overhead involved in running scripts and it is best to keep the number of scripts that run to the minimum necessary particularly if the Controller is heavily loaded doing lighting effects at the same time Using a table of times for high and low tide A Controller is controlling the lighting on a bay bridge The client wants a lighting effect to run at high tide and another effect at low tide The client has provided tide tables for the entire year and plans to update the tables each year A lot of the fun in this situation is in converting the data from the format in which it is provided into a Lua table This is usually an exercise in Excel and search and replace tools which won t cover here So let s assume we have generated a Lua file of the form Mion tLdSs OT fie Depto Aoi SH LS LO O November 2007 OT LL O94 003 O 00536 9 November 2007 OT Ls OO ELL Se Lee O November 2007 etC It s best to put large tables like this in their own separate files and run them as separate scripts on startup Load ing a large table like this into memory will take a noticeable amount of time so you certainly don t want to do that more than once Also if the tide tables ar
62. table When we detect that the current time is later than the current entry in the table then we move on to looking at the next entry Implementing an interactive game for a Science Museum In an exhibit children are posed questions and have to select answers from an array of numbered buttons The but tons are large with RGB backlights that are controlled by a Controller to highlight choices and indicate right and wrong answers Questions are displayed by a slide projector which is under RS232 control from the Controller The buttons are wired to contact closures on the Controller and on RIOs so that the Controller can check answers and determine the progress of the game accordingly The lighting in the rest of the room is designed to mimic a popular TV quiz show to retain the children s interest with different timelines for each stage of the game am not going to work through this example but the key point is that it should now be clear to you that a Con troller could be used to implement this sort of advanced interactive exhibit with the use of script Try breaking down the problem into discrete parts and you will find that no individual part of this is difficult although getting it all to function together reliably would no doubt require a lot of work The Controller is a viable alternative to cus tom software running on a PC and has clear advantages in terms of durability and cost More information In this document we have only covered
63. tests Also view the uptime of the DALI bus Emergency Ballast Errors Lists all reported errors reported by emergency fixtures on the current DALI interface Errors will show ballast address tests failed and reported errors Once a ballast has been repaired it can be marked as fixed here or by using triggers Once a ballast has been marked as fixed it will remain in the Ballast Errors section until a subsequent test has confirmed that the fixture is indeed operational again Ballast Status Lists all ballasts and reported status on the current interface Standard ballasts show the ballast Address Name Status and Level emergency ballasts also show Battery Charge Emergency Lamp Hours and Total Lamp Hours Recent Power Failures Lists any reports of bus power failures for the current interface 171 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Control Password protected if set Enter admin for the User Name and then the password B teres MCT Foyer LPE gt Comiral gt Mozilla Firetos ok He DM ps FPE irate fi ba Triggers Type Camemenent Or o A E E A 4 7 E y J a i 35 5 A f FO D D G O M oe s y 7 m la m J a P E i u in P 1 A Controller can be controlled remotely in two ways Command line An advanced feature that allows direct control of a specific Controller s fixtures timelines and even DMX chan nels via the script engine see command line reference Triggers All the trigger
64. the Controller uses lunar clock algorithms to calculate the lunar phases based on the location of the Controller See project properties The lunar events are new moon first quarter full moon and third quarter Use the configuration pane on the right to select the phase NOTE Lunar triggers are only tested by the Time Server and then shared over the network so any conditions are tested on the Time Server only Digital Input The MSC and TPC with TPC RIO has 8 digital inputs which can be used as triggers either to detect a voltage or a contact closure Use the configuration pane to select which Controller None Any or a particular MSC or TPC with TPC RIO which Input 1 thru 8 and the polarity of the logic select Low for contact closure or when driving with an active low signal select High for driving with an active high signal Toreceive a digital input from a Unison Mosaic Remote Device change the Device to RIO 80 or RIO 44 and set the RIO number or leave as Any The RIO 80 has 8 inputs and the RIO 44 has 4 inputs The inputs on the revised MSC and TPC with TPC RIO hardware and the RIOs can also be configured as analog inputs see Advanced Triggers L Soft Trigger This trigger type is provided for triggering from the web interface there are no configuration options Basic action types Start Timeline Starts a timeline use the configuration pane to select which timeline M Release Timeline Releases a timelin
65. the higher the period the slower the effect e Style choose None all parameters are modulated together or Spread the effect is spread over space as well as time Position The Position kind is a special case in that a a graphical position picker is provided and b the pan and tilt effects are linked and displayed adjusted graphically Hold Shift while dragging for fine resolution or use the Pan and Tilt fields provided underneath for accurate numerical positioning Note that you can also lock an axis by clicking on the Pan or Tilt button which allows positioning of one axis without interfering with the other Creating a mover preset Click Create New to make a new preset and type a name Select the fixtures which will automatically come on to 100 so that you can see what you re doing set their parameters and add effects to these parameters as required The fixture icons on the plan will provide graphical feedback of what they re doing You will not be able to select any fixtures unsuitable for making mover presets Use the Transition section to give the preset a default fade time and skew type the preset is now ready for use Mover Presets can be created to contain programming for all kinds complete look or just a single kind for example Colour presets or Position presets akin to palettes on a moving light console This latter method allows for more flexibility when programming the timelines as you can mix and match these kind prese
66. the trigger in the management area and use right click gt Delete or press the button on the Trigger con figuration pane the entire trigger its conditions and actions will be deleted 99 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Triggers Basic These basic triggers allow you to use the Controller s realtime and astronomical clock digital inputs and web inter face to control timeline playback and set intensity levels Basic trigger types bi Startup The startup trigger determines what the Controller should do after power up or reset There are no configuration options Timeline Started A timeline starting generally as a result of a trigger or the timeline looping can be used as a trigger use the con figuration pane to select which timeline M Timeline Ended A timeline reaching the end of its programming can be used as a trigger use the configuration pane to select which timeline For a looping timeline this trigger will fire every time the timeline loops E Timeline Released A timeline releasing can be used as a trigger use the configuration pane to select which timeline 2 Timeline Flag Any timeline can have one or more flags placed on the ruler see working with timelines to act as triggers use the configuration pane to select which timeline and the flag within that timeline 2 Real Time The Controller has an internal battery backed real time clock In a project with multiple Controllers only one Co
67. their relative layout is preserved Note that pressing Ctrl after starting to drag will cause the selection to jump back to its original position and cre ate a copy of the selection under the pointer To delete a fixture or fixture selection 1 Select the fixture s 2 Press Delete or right click gt Delete 3 Press Delete to confirm or Cancel to abort Note that the fixture s will be completely removed from the project and all programming discarded To see where a fixture is patched 1 Check Show patched on on the toolbar 2 Move the cursor over a fixture the fixture s patch will be shown next to the cursor 3 Pick a Controller from the drop down list on the toolbar to see all fixtures patched to it fixtures patched to the Controller will be shown in blue To highlight a fixture 1 Select one or more fixtures using the Browser or the plan 2 Press the Highlight button the fixture s will come on to their highlight defaults typically open white 3 Press Highlight again to turn off or select other fixtures to highlight NOTE The appropriate Controller must be on the network and correctly associated to highlight fixtures Fixtures can also be highlighted from the universe tab in Patch DALI fixtures DALI fixtures ballasts are dragged onto the plan in the same way as all other fixtures but they do not populate the Browser and no groups are automatically made since DALI fixtures are programmed and controlled via dedica
68. them or upload a different project IMPORTANT Currently you must connect to the AVC via Ethernet to upload content You may connect to the AVC via USB to modify the Controller Config e g network settings or to upload minor changes to the show 133 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Issues id tan E FEFEFE f FELALA A Phi Jefa aie ee ee cir e La pri E bars quad ii 1 ba When you open the Upload dialog there is a tab which lists potential errors with your project Designer will check things like triggers and hardware configuration to make sure that there are no inconsistencies If any issues are found the Issues tab will be opened automatically and a description of each issue will be listed so that you can take corrective action see Issues You can proceed with the Upload ignoring the errors should you wish Restore after upload Check the Restore after upload box if you want the Controllers to continue playback where they left off useful for soft openings when programming is still being tweaked while the installation is open to the public Note how ever that changes to the fixture schedule or patch will force the Controllers to reset playback and so cause a momentary black out What s actually uploaded Only the data relevant to the Controller to generate control data for the patched fixtures and utilised trigger inter faces The uploaded data is optimised for minimal Controller memory usage and maximum pla
69. two IP addresses one for management data and the other for output protocol data The default set ting is for this dual IP mode to be disabled so that the same IP settings are used for management and output protocol data Dual IP mode is particularly useful for working with KiNet power supplies which must use 10 xx xx xx addresses MSC X The MSC X has a dedicated Ethernet Protocol port The default setting is to obtain IP settings via DHCP but static IP settings can alternatively be set as required 151 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual DMX Proxy MSC 1 only If a Designer project has a TPC and an MSC 1 the TPC can output local DMX via the MSC s second DMX port With the MSC 1 selected choose the TPC from the drop down list ETCNet2 Configure as required e Source number ETCNet2 multicast address references from 1 to 26 default is 1 e Source priority ETCNet2 output arbitration references from 1 to 20 typically 10 KiNet power supplies These configuration settings are used to manage the KiNet power supplies if required Press the Add button to add a KiNet power supply using the Select a power supply dialog a Add KiNETpower supply Type EA A A E AE POS m 24 E theret sPDS_480cea 14 POS 480ca 4 Data Enabler Ethernet Data Enabler 0 t Humber to add 1 i Cancel Select the appropriate power supply from the list and press Ok
70. unlike Mover presets DALI presets will persist even if the timeline is released Indeed since they are just commands to tell the DALI ballasts what to do even power cycling the Controller will make no difference the settings will persist until anew command is issued or the ballasts themselves power cycled Set level Used to set a DALI fixture or user created group to a level 0 gt 254 255 and select a fade time from the pull down list of DALI fade times See DALI regards creating DALI groups 80 Program Preset types amp properties Scene user named Used to recall a DALI scene that you created and uploaded and select a fade time from the pull down list of DALI fade times See DALI regards creating DALI scenes NOTE If there are no DALI fixtures in the project the DALI Presets folder will not be displayed AVC Presets see Working with the Audio Visual Controller NOTE f there are no AV fixtures in the project the AVC Presets folder will not be displayed Custom Presets i Preset user named Renders a custom preset that you have optionally created using the Media window e Period the number of seconds that the effect takes to complete one cycle e Count the number of times that the effect should cycle over the length of the preset In addition custom presets may define a number of properties that can be set for each instance of that preset on the timeline NOTE If no Custom presets have been c
71. updated ready to be into the ballasts If groups have already been programmed onto the DALI fixtures you can press the Discover Groups button to automatically populate group information from the fixtures on the interface DALI scenes In Designer s implementation DALI scenes are common across DALI interfaces use the pull down on the DALI toolbar and select Scene Setup for programming E SELECT SCENE SETUP SELECT BALLASTS CREATE SCENES The Browser and project plan are displayed so that you can select the DALI fixtures and groups On the right are the DALI scenes folder and the Intensity controls There can be up to 16 DALI scenes which can contain programming for some or all of your DALI fixtures even if spanning different DALI interfaces In general you should include programming for all your DALI fixtures in each scene since you can determine when creating timelines which fixtures or groups should run the scene by drop ping the DALI scene on the appropriate timeline row the choice is yours though _57 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual To create a DALI scene Press the Create New button Name the new scene Select the DALI fixtures or groups Set the required level 0 gt 254 the fixtures on the plan will simulate these levels PwWN gt The DALI scene is added to the folder and scene configuration data is ready to be uploaded into the ballasts To delete a DALI scene 1 Select the scene in the folder 2
72. via USB can be con figured 46 Preferences Advanced Prefe rences General Patch Timelines Triggers Network Advanced Enable Winamp timecode source Enable or disable using Winamp as a timecode source in Simulate This feature is available on Windows only _47 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Patch Once you have created your plan and added your fixtures you need to patch them that is to say connect them to real fixtures via the appropriate Controller MSC 1 2 4 or X interface port protocol and address Patching is optional for programming and simulation but fixtures must be patched eventually for the MSCs to control them including using Output Live in the Simulator NOTE The AVC does not require patching Before we cover patching in detail let s look at some of the terms used Patch terminology Term DMX RDM eDMX KiNet Art Net II Pathport sACN RIO DVI DALI Universe Port DMX Address _ For more Description information A digital serial control protocol for entertainment lighting Officially called USITT DMX512 A it was developed by the USITT and has become the standard pro DMX512 tocol for entertainment lighting control using the RS485 physical layer Remote Device Management an extension of the USITT DMX512 protocol RDM that supports bi directional communication with dimmers amp fixtures A shorthand term for DMX over
73. vision mixer with live input all under seamless show control AVCs can operate stand alone or in conjunction with one or more MSCs to provide a truly integ rated lighting and audio visual control solution see Controller properties Expansion Modules The original MSC 1 2 hardware supports up to two Expansion Modules which provide additional functionality in effect expanding the Controller s interface capabilities Expansion Modules are thus tightly coupled to a 135 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Controller and can not be used stand alone nor remotely Expansion Modules have varying configuration options see Expansion Modules NOTE The Expansion Modules are being discontinued Their functionality is being replaced by the enhanced con nectivity of the revised Mosaic Show Controller MSC and new Remote Devices RIO For further information please contact support Remote Devices The Unison Mosaic range includes various Remote Devices that augment one or more Controllers with additional remote inputs outputs and user interfaces Remote Devices can only be powered by the PoE network use multicast UDP for communication and have vary ing configuration options see Remote Devices 136 Network Controller connection Network Controller connection Before you can configure and upload to the Controllers they must be connected to the PC running the Designer software Depending on the Controller this connectio
74. with input you can specify a length if you want to output the variable as a longer decimal or hexadecimal num ber So a variable value of 175 output with lt 4d gt would add ASCII 0175 to the serial output Note that it is pad ded with leading zeros to fill the specified length If the value was too large to express in the specified length it would be truncated from the left so lt 2d gt would output the number 123 as ASCII 23 Output strings are allowed to begin with a wildcard By default each wildcard takes the next variable in the order they were captured If you want to output the variables in a different order then you can add a variable index to the wildcard in the form lt 3 2d gt where 3 is the variable index If you specify an output wildcard where there is no cor responding capture variable then it will have value of zero and output accordingly Jd MIDI Output Short messages can output a captured value for data 1 and data 2 Pick a variable using the Variable Index con trols If data 1 is outputting a captured value you can optionally send it as a 14 bit value with the lower 7 bits in data 1 and the upper 7 bits in data 2 by checking 14 bit variable Outputting a MSC message allows you to set the cue number and or list number by choosing a variable with the Variable Index controls Extended messages allow you to output captured variables using the same syntax as serial actions 127 Unison Mosaic Designer Us
75. z are the fixture number selects a range and combines discrete selections or ranges Setting intensity x y tz where x is the fixture number y is the level either as a DMX value or as a percentage and z is an optional time in seconds If a time is not specified then it is treated as a snap change Examples 1 127 Set intensity of fixture 1 to 127 immediately 2 50 Set intensity of fixture 2 to 50 127 immediately 3 100 t5 5 Set intensity of fixture 3 to 100 fading over 5 5 seconds Setting RGB Setting red green and blue uses the same syntax as intensity but replacing the with r for red g for green and b for blue Examples 11255 Set red of fixture 1 to 255 immediately 390 Set green of fixture 3 to O immediately 7b100 t2 Set blue of fixture 7 to 100 fading over 2 seconds Note that the default values for red green and blue are 100 255 to give white So to make a fixture output the colour red then you will need to set green and blue to zero You can also apply multiple settings to the same selection of fixtures in a single command For example 174 Web interface Command line Set fixtures 1 thru 25 to 100 intensity red to 255 blue to 255 and green to O E 0 1 25 100 r255b25590 immediately Clearing fixture settings xc ty where x is the fixture number and y is an optional time in seconds Examples 1c Clear settings for fixture 1 immediately 5ct6 5 Clear settings for fixt
76. 0 New Preset Properties Length 10 00 Fade 2 00 Release 2 00 Path Default Video ln 0 00 Video Out 0 00 Video Transition Dissolve Background Colour E a New timeline properties Specify the default name and length for subsequently created timelines see timeline properties New preset properties Specify the default properties for subsequently added presets see preset types and properties Background Colour The background colour of the timeline area of the Program window can be chosen here press the button and select a colour This is useful to make certain types of programming stand out better for example a project using mainly intensity presets may be clearer with a dark grey background Triggers Select the Triggers tab to change the default settings for triggers 44 Preferences Preferences eo II General Patch Timelnes Triggers Network Advanced Short MIDI data format Hexadecimal Short MIDI data format Select the default Short MIDI message data format to be either Decimal or Hexadecimal _ 45 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Network Preferences General Patch Timelines Triggers Network Advanced Designer must be restarted before these changes will take elfect USB HTTP port 20050 USB FTP port 20021 a Ear habi Par Cancel The web interface HTTP and file transfer FTP ports used when an MSC is connected
77. 0 What if they are at 45 135 225 and 315 get the value in degrees dir variable 1 which face is getting the wind Gi ie was Or Oe 2 Chen Start etrmelane L ekseit diras Lao then stare time lane 2 lseir Cur lt 225 then Start tinel ime o else start timeline 4 end As the wind direction sensor is sending us data every second when the wind direction is very near a corner then the lights are changing back and forth a lot The client doesn t like this and wants it limited so that it will only change at most every minute How should we do that Lots of ways to solve this but one option using script would be get the current minutes now realtime minute if now lastMinute then return this will exit the script early end store in lastMinute then continue as before lastMinute now gt get the value in degrees dir variable 1 which face is getting the wind Ie die lt AD dr di Bol then Start timelane 1 elselt die x lt do then stare timeline 2 elseif dir lt 2259 then start timeline 3 else start timeline 4 end But actually a better solution in this case would probably use a dummy timeline that runs for 1 minute place a flag at 1 minute to force its length Add a timeline is running condition to the RS232 input trigger that only allows the trigger to fire if the dummy timeline is not running And add a second action to the trigger that
78. 1 comment 2 where fixture number x position y position rotation angle width and height are mandatory numbers and name comment 1 and comment 2 are strings which may be left blank rotation angle is specified in degrees clockwise from vertical e Fixture position lines must be specified after a fixture type line e Fixture numbers must be unique in the file and must not already exist in the project e The plan will be resized to accommodate the fixture positions after getting confirmation that it is alright to do so Example LEDs 005 1 0 0 0 50 50 2 30 0 0 50 50 3 60 0 0 50 50 4 90 0 0 50 50 Dimmers 0 0 100 100 100 0 25 25 243 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual 101 125 100 0 25 25 102 100 125 0 25 25 103 125 125 0 25 25 Pixel matrix file format csv The pixel matrix file format is versioned to ensure that CSV files generated for Designer 1 9 x and later will be imported into any version of Designer from 1 9 0 onwards Version information must be added to the first line of the CSV file as follows version 1 The current version is 1 Lines starting with are comments and are ignored except the version line Blank lines are ignored Fixture position syntax fixture number fixture element index x position y position rotation angle where fixture number fixture element index x position and y position are numbers rotat
79. 1 and spe cifies where in the gradient the colour is and red green and blue is the colour at that position and are in the range 0 255 You can specify multiple points For example Propercy Gradient GRADLENT 0504 255 Oy Up Lady Oy Oy 2009 creates a red 255 0 0 point at the start 0 0 and a blue 0 0 255 point at the end 1 0 To demonstrate a real example of using properties in scripts Listing 16 property o GRADIENT O50 2397 Oy De Lee Oy Ue 200 function pixel frame x y return g lookup x width 1 end This by default creates a horizontal gradient from red to blue as we saw in Listing 13 However when this pre set is placed on a timeline there will be a gradient editor available and you will be able to alter the gradient to be any colour you wish without having to recompile the script or having to duplicate the custom preset with some small alterations We will now modify our vertical band example to expose some properties to make a very versatile effect Listing 17 width of the bands in pixels property band width INTEGER 4 1 space between bands in pixels Property band spacing y INTEGER ly 0 a the wavelength of the ripple in terms of current width property wavelength FLOAT 1 0 16 2 the direction of the ripple property reverse BOOLEAN false the colour of the band property band gradiente GRADIENT Oy 230 Us Uy ly 209 2030 0
80. 10 v2 6 yo difti vl V2 Note that the script containing the function definition must have been run before we try to call the function It is often useful to have a script that is run by the Controller startup trigger which defines your functions and creates any tables other scripts that are run by triggers can make use of those functions and tables Practical Examples In this section we will go through a number of practical examples of how script can be used with a Controller These examples are all based on real projects that are installed and working They do get progressively more involved so do not worry if you don t follow the later ones you will still be able to use script successfully to solve many problems If you are working through this document on your own then look out for where I ask a question and rather than reading straight on recommend stopping and trying to answer it yourself You will only get truly comfortable with writing scripts by doing it Cycling through different timelines We are installing a wall of RGB LED fixtures in a children s play area There is a single large button that the kids are Supposed to press Each time they press it they should get a different colour or effect on the wall Each colour or effect would be programmed as a different timeline in Designer The button will connect to a con tact closure and so we will have a single Digital Input trigger Rather than starting a timeline directly
81. 3 lt polnt gt lt firmwareVersion gt lt networkinterface gt lt ipAddress gt 172 20 1 9 lt ipAddress gt lt subnetMask gt 255 255 0 0 lt subnetMask gt lt gateway gt 172 20 0 250 lt gateway gt lt networkInterface gt lt cfCardsizeKb gt 1024 lt cfCardsizeKb gt lt date gt 2010 04 23 lt date gt lt time gt 08 59 14 lt time gt 245 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual lt sunrise gt 06 55 00 lt sunrise gt lt sunset gt 19 02 00 lt sunset gt lt projectName gt My First Show lt projectName gt lt projectAuthor gt Joe Bloggs lt projectAuthor gt lt projectUuid gt 00000000 0000 0000 0000 000000000000 lt projectUuid gt lt projectUploadDate gt 2010 04 21T13 36 18 lt projectUploadDate gt lt controllerNumber gt 1 lt controllerNumber gt lt response gt Notes lt date gt lt time gt lt sunrise gt and lt sunset gt are in local time MSC X will have a lt networkInterface2 gt tag with the network details of the second interface AVC will not have a lt projectUploadDate gt tag Get Current Time Get a time and date from the Controller s system clock in local time e Command currentTime e Args none Sample Response lt response gt lt currentTime gt lt date gt 2002 05 30 lt date gt lt time gt 09 00 00 lt time gt lt currentTime gt lt response gt Get Timelines Get a list of timelines in the project id is the timeline number e Command timeline Args i
82. 5 OvervieW IN 26 DCU Eis carro sa lara teeing cnt irde EE EN 26 ie lA AA AN A E AS ANN 26 BE A A A eee eee ee 26 Mover PD ns 26 1 D EEEE ETE E ES ation ain cutee EEE E E seg cutlass ena TEETE 26 PRO OMAN Oe AAA A aes ee II ke ta kat eae A EA 26 paee E A senda ead dais amed bal ute E AEE E 26 Simulate F8 A A 21 o oc ceca etie dene EE EEE EE sche Le ceded ed EAE E EEE EAEE 2 PRONE A E E O TS EN 21 QUICK Slane ice cuota citan arde ecc E EE e le shlss ia do desir alcoi AD 28 Creating a project l na it a e e tee alt a o da 28 Getting started Adding Conventionals LEDs and Moving Lights to the plan and patching them 28 Creating Media 8 Mover presets 2 22 2 ccc eee eee e cece ec eee cece cece e cece eee ceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 28 Programming TiMElINES tesina cidcid ed dido bars lic ad 29 Creating Triggers ns 29 Setup Project properties occ locas cl li daa geebulde des 30 ProjecUlG NntniCatiOn sisarensa E gerd coded a edt none A it 30 NUN ns ws EREE hore arse E ps eo A E aes ess 30 74 O A SRNR neh ee UN a EMT ROA 30 SA 30 Background Mage cerca a eeae de and naceeiek a haen eda eee enka 31 SCC ascent de EETA bee be ud See ence ee Neen Sota chante neki bad Sawa TE EAEE E 31 Colour scheme ns 31 HOC AON rs cactat tate disses a alertea ceee ecient heed oleidsens baauesdetaadedes neces e a a e nate feels 31 City or Latitude Longitude 22 22 l lcci c ccc cece cece ccc cee cece cee ececceccececeseescere
83. 59 sunset second The second of sunset 0 59 NOTE The location of the Controller must be set correctly in project properties for these to return the correct val ues Accessing the calculated twilight times local to this Controller civil_ dawn hour The hour of civil dawn 0 23 civil dawn minute The minute of civil dawn 0 59 civil_ dawn second The second of civil dawn 0 59 civil_dusk hour The hour of civil dusk 0 23 208 Lua scripts civil_ dusk minute The minute of civil dusk 0 59 civil_ dusk second The second of civil dusk 0 59 nautical_ dawn hour The hour of nautical dawn 0 23 nautical_dawn minute The minute of nautical dawn 0 59 nautical_dawn second The second of nautical dawn 0 59 nautical_dusk hour The hour of nautical dusk 0 23 nautical_dusk minute The minute of nautical dusk 0 59 nautical_dusk second The second of nautical dusk 0 59 NOTE The location of the Controller must be set correctly in project properties for these to return the correct val ues TPC user interface control These are only executed on the local Controller which must be a TPC Sets the value of the TPC control Control key is a string set_control_ value controlKey valuelndex value e g slider002 Value index 1 for sliders or 1 2 or 3 for col our pickers Shorthand form with value index equal to 1 useful for sliders Control key is a string e g sliderO02 Provide feedback by changing the appearance of a contr
84. 8 ABDSODONn MAC A A ere ae ones acide II A ae eaS 98 CONAIONS ts tr e els ia de a ste dl Ue ca leas 98 COnTOQUMNG A CONCH ON eorcocssi s ri ir 98 REMOVING a CONGIMON i ste ee cacao atte aha teil Oa ch tata id as teh e cat ed Soh 99 Changing the condition order 0 2 22 c cece e cece ee cee ocn 99 A A A E NO 99 COnMQUANG AN ACO scan srta it ida 99 FREMIOVINIG GING UI ON 2 9 5 to oe hace e a Sele ana el eh ct at Stn eas Seth Sait 99 Changing the action order 0 00 02 c cece cece eee e eee eee cece eee cece cece ceeeeeeeeeees 99 COPA o MU a eae 99 Deleting agge state na iso a a il e da e o O ee 99 TOS Basi uste ee Pe 100 Basic trigger types AAA A ARA A A 100 A A A A A A A LT NA 100 Timeline Started o es 100 UA AE A A a A ein oe 100 Timeline Released 2 20 02 coc ccc cece cece es 100 Timeline AG sce aie ay mers antec sans cicero aoa anne ak 100 Contents A A en POONER net en aT ES O eee Pee Re tea eee ee eT RTT Oe 100 ASTON A iia e 101 E AR AS A A E 102 BEA A eat EA die aha 102 SON AA A IN 102 Basic ACHOM LV AAA ea 102 SN AA 102 Release Timeline A wie awe Laaa LaaLa AAAA LAADAL nd Rude Ulaeeb owes 102 e AAA O A a 102 SAA 102 E AAA NS A A IN A 103 Resume Timeline o 103 Resume All A A ca aie Beige danse 103 Release 103 A A A ee Tete 103 Increase amp Decrease Intensity o ooooocccccccccccccccccccccccnccncconcnnc non 103 SEAS E a le ooo e cd o e Te 104 Triggers Advanced on td rea 105 Advanced tri
85. C 2 2 2 02 22 e eee ee eee eee eee 199 Ps Ne TOO AA A EA 200 Reinsert the Compact Flash card into the MSC X amp reboot 2 2 22 2 cece eee eee eee cece 201 AVC Recovery Tool a 558 Siete o race water 202 MS sy Baca a aa ae ta ae sal ela a Denard ia asl cae eet eae Oakey 202 To update the firmware for both processors inthe AVC 2 2 2 ce eee eee eee cece e cece ee eeeee 202 To recover corrupt firmware _ 02 22 e cece cece nn 202 FLOW TOWISC asa eat tiie ete s Ee tise IPR 203 Connect the AVC via USB on to ee os eda bu dead wie da 203 Run the tool ose teens akan AAA A 203 Software release notes ns 204 Release Notes AA 204 SON COW ASC CC CS cao ay Nhe e ea 204 E A sna lag AA AE IA RA 204 System limits amp capacities _ 0 0 o oocccccccccccccccccccccc ccoo 205 BESPRTACUCOS oi etic Seite seen acido fensa ela o sate ae aan ae eee Sats ao eine a eerie eect aties 205 Triggering and playback expectations 00 22022 c eee eee nono 206 Looping and holding attend occ 206 Mes AA A pea th ey ph ee aden aah Ase 206 AVC Timeline Restrictions _ 2 2 2 ieee eee eee eee ee eee eee neces cee eeeeeeeeee 206 LIA SCID ae Ne eee Net ARN TSR SSD o a ari els bs lb Pee ene STE 207 Lua script editor MA A 207 BLEU 0 aye LUI SCID orrei A A N 207 Unison Mosaic language extensions for triggers 22 2 2 22 eee eee eee cee cece cece eee eee cee eeeeee 208 Accessing the realtime cloc
86. Closure Digital or Analog with the latter two modes allow ing for the threshold or range to be selected Outputs can be individually configured with a Startup state whether the relay is on or off at startup See basic triggers for usage Audio The stereo balanced line level audio input of a RIO A can be used for Audio triggers Select the Audio button to enable this mode and to see the following configuration options e Route To select the Audio Bus to route the incoming audio to e Freq Bands select the number of frequency bands with which to analyse the incoming audio max 30 per channel the frequency bands sit along a logarithmic scale and have been chosen for an optimum response to music e Gain turn Auto gain on or off and set the manual gain level e Peak Decay Rate set the rate at which peaks in each frequency band will decay the peak level can be used in triggers e Initially Enabled the audio feed from a RIO A can be turned on or off by triggers and here you can set the initial state See advanced triggers for usage Timecode The stereo balanced line level audio input of a RIO A can be used for timecode input Select the Timecode button to enable this mode and to see the following configuration options e Channel the audio input of the RIO A that the timecode input will be connected to e Route To select the Timecode Bus to route the timecode to 162 Network Remote Devices e Regenerate for
87. Colow dor thi paame range Gobos Element Ho Hare Fooiperi E ee pee amp a P G zf ro crt Sd bo 34 bo dodoa allobet oof atomic 2 bamboo Channel 6 Back a 0 2 C G O 5 I Citan Vik Funcion Coa te Crosada bar besne block bije wi AAR A amp Patched Court 1 ume 1 Charel 1 ALl i E baeri a Dalai DI Vaka i Colours ee E man m iy E E J L 7 TY i a a 10 CTE i C3 j Ta Cl TE Lal cT 3 11 a CTC ENDE oy Hea ye oa O O O Y 0 ETC 7000 1000 UY Hire be a LEILA a CILA CIS CICS CEA EMS ros a Da a a ad dd Fano paa Flatow Flange Customised or newly created fixtures will appear in the custom manufacturer folder However while we build up our database of fixture data we would actually prefer you to contact us to have your fixture added to the standard distributed library Please email your fixture request s to support IMPORTANT When edits are made to the library definition of a fixture already in the project the plan will not update until the fixture has been explicitly reset to its library defaults see fixture configuration Electronic Theatre Controls Inc subscribes to the Carallon Automated Lighting Data Service 40 Preferences Preferences Select Options gt Preferences on the main toolbar to open the Preferences dialog General Select the General tab to change the default behaviour of Designer Preferences A de Gene
88. EUA mE PE nes babbi nis kiz El E kic Eeit ta E ER FEFENEREEERES Fl doo LEE ana a aaa aa E ae Lt fs le a a do o E LEE LES LEE E LEO Es Es a ll A E e o a ld LELE A AS A A AS PA AS AAA A DEURES Eit DEU RLU AD ODA ASA AD AB6 145 AGUJA MLLER ii Proa LEN 1511002 403 101 405 400 487 400 409 050 491 492 493 154 005 1090 497 LEDER SEKENE 508 E EAL EI ELE fororsperorotororerorelotoreterorotororetetotoror POToTe Tes EJE Ebo Ex ab ELE 350 Fei 387 Es E Pe Use the Controller Protocol and Universe pull downs to select the Controller and DMX universe that you wish to view What you will see depends on the status of your patch and the simulator Unpatched universe If the universe is not patched then all values will be zero 0 regardless of the simulator s status Patched simulator not running reset If the universe is patched and the simulator is not running then you will see the default values for the fixtures These are the values that the Controller will output after a reset or power cycle and prior to a timeline running see Precedent Patched simulator running playing or paused If the universe is patched and the simulator is running then you will see the values that the Controller will generate when it runs this timeline Designer uses exactly the same playback algorithms as the Controller so what you see with the DMX viewer is what you ll get with the Controller 193 Unison Mosaic Designer User M
89. Ethernet protocols see KiNet Art Net II Path port and sACN below A proprietary Ethernet control protocol developed by Color Kinetics now Philips Solid State Lighting used to control only their Ethernet PSUs A DMX over Ethernet protocol developed by Artistic Licence and widely used in the entertainment industry to distribute multiple universes of DMX data A DMX over Ethernet protocol developed by Pathway Communications and widely used in the entertainment industry to distribute multiple universes of DMX data Streaming ACN Advanced Control Network a DMX over Ethernet protocol ESTA developed by ESTA to distribute multiple universes of DMX data The ETC Remote Input Output 80 44 08 can output up to 96 channels of DMX per unit See here for more information on patching to a RIO Digital Video Interface a standard for the delivery of digital video data to com puter monitors Used by certain LED manufacturers for example Barco and Martin Professional to drive their LED controller products Digital Addressable Lighting Interface a digital serial control protocol for archi DALI tectural lighting Developed by Philips Lighting it has become a standard IEC 60929 DALI fixtures are not patched using this window see DALI A common term given to a single DMX data link or port A DMX universe car ries 512 channels of control data each with 8 bit resolution A single dimmer will use one channel while more complex fixtures will use mu
90. HCP enabled will also synchronise with a suitably configured DHCP server The AVC does not cur rently support NTP Network Ports The ports opened by the Controller for access to the web server using HTTP and for access to the FTP server for file transfer can be manually configured This can be useful if there are several Controllers in an installation and remote access is required via a router setup for port forwarding to each Controller By default the Controller uses port 80 for the web server and port 21 for the FTP server Admin Password Enter a password to protect the Controller from unauthorised access Once a password has been set it will be required to Upload Reload Firmware change the Controller Configuration these settings or open the Control and Configuration sections of the web interface To change the Controller configuration settings 1 Make the required changes to any of the fields as described above 2 Press Commit the settings are then stored on the Controller itself they are not stored in the project 146 Network Controller configuration 3 The Controller will reset Date and Time All Controllers have an internal realtime clock which is battery backed and so will operate even when the Con troller is not powered Whilst the internal realtime clock is accurate the use of a Network Time server of some sort NTP DHCP is recommended where possible See above The Date and Time fields display the curr
91. MIDI In MSC 1 28 4 only 22220 c ec cece cece cca ccceccerccencccccscccceccenecs 155 AS Me cht eee eae adele ete ae et he a a ea NA 155 DMX In MSC X and TPC only 0 220 2022 cece ccc nooo 155 DAD ad e oO 155 MSC 1 8 2 Expansion Modules 022 2222 cece ccc cece cece cece cece ec eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 156 Parad 6 9 Weed nae me mre Eta a RRC ore ee N E EE ia aT Bee RE 156 DNA Noa sacan eta ee an ts ae ee Soe adela A ae en See Pa 156 FO i gs II A A A ue era 156 AA ne ea aed ae a ee eins eee ac one ane 156 AUD tool lao lo coe e tetany 157 DAN E EEEE ai mada 157 A A A E A E 158 Network Remote Devices occ 159 CONNEC Ni a ca ct tata ct o cita Dad Dl 159 TORA nee ee a aa eek ee eee he anh san a ek a Al een ee ee 159 A A e A E aah AT 159 Project vs real Remote Devices oococcccccccccccccccc cnc 160 Managing project Remote Devices 222 2 ieee eee eee ee ee ee eee ee ee eens 160 To add and set the type of a project Remote Device 0 22 2 cece cece eee eee eee 160 To delete a project Remote Device _ 0 00 2 o cece cece eee eee ee eee eee 161 Remote Device firmware o 161 To update a Remote Device s firmware _ 2 2 22 c cece cece eee cece ccc cee ceeeeeeeeeeeees 161 Associating Remote Devices 0 0 0 02 elec cece eee ee ee eee ee ee eee cence eee eee ee 161 To associate a project Remote Device with a real device automatic addresses 1 gt 15
92. Mas 14 4 0 AL PICA Ha ere Lia lf ae H i rH Era eg Po er eee 17 do 142 19 Prop ard Bed Mac dos Pee 2050 Thy dl z oN I7 ha Md 1 Fg ide Desa He RESI k 17 Ma i dS A Cray ora A E had HAID dia bi 9 p pgs fay 7 17h dS ee Cer A taa AO che bd pen eee ap bar ha To ae ah Ad ata AL ET 1 Ban 144019 Siira i i paci Bm 14420 Pes ore HEJ E HH Eiir oe IE re T bie 1d EN Hier a altos Propel le tad Ads F AS Ma id E 5J A Tb heal aria TD DE Pisa iu i ial LEY tare me pe Tha dl A aarp a ae AAA ade IT h 1d O Pol dd ra Tha ee AL TIA pipi Tini T ios ds i l ILE FeaT eT 1 at 1d 0 eas n PPG gt bad AO dia biri pane p b r 7 12 Ha 1d SS Cog ALD gt ba OU das bd pipra des bir bis 14 al rs m idee pau oe NS fire do ink al a Watchdog Check this to enable the internal watchdog that will reset the Controller automatically in case of a software crash as a result of either a coding error bug or a random electromagnetic event such as a power brown out or spike nearby lightning strike or static discharge A startup trigger will be required to determine what the Controller should do after such a reset see triggers Remote Logging via Syslog Check this to enable logging to the specified IP address Note that there is a performance penalty to pay for using Syslog so this should only be enabled for debugging NTP Server Check this and enter the IP address of the appropriate Network Time Protocol NTP server Note that Con trollers with D
93. OVE A a A 92 Patching fixtures toa RIO 0 ooccccccccccccccccccccco coco 92 Patching DVI fixtures MSC X oc cece ccc cee ce eee eee cee cee cece cece eeeeeeeeees 53 SEG channels AA E E EE 53 AND AAA A A 53 Art Net output customisation _ 2 0 22 2c eee cece ccc cece cece e cece cece eee eceeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 53 DART A a O 54 NI A 54 BA AAA A E A A EA 54 DALI addressing amp grouping occ cece eee eee ee cee ee cece eee ee cee cece eee eee eeeceeeeees 94 Device commands sii A A A Sa 55 Find addressed ballasts 22 2 cccccvnceb acne rara atlas 99 ACUTE SS DAMAS ES a ad a a bd a 55 Readdress all ballasts a ete ae 55 Resolve clasi erriren nan he te a a ee un 56 Identify emergency ballasts 0 00 2202 occ cece cee cee eee ee eee cece cece ceeeeeeees 56 To manually readdress a DALI ballast 000000 000002 eee eee eee 56 To highlight a ballast sta ces etario emake cane oe and anaemic inure ot anon oaoa dens ose 56 Patching DALI fixtures spice occ oot seb os ias 56 BAY AM A ee eee ee ee 56 Toadda DA io a el cat bed 56 To delete a DALI group 1 e ns dada ads pas 57 DALI CES a od Se tens 57 To create a DALI scene cundo ad 58 To delete a DALI scene 2 3 soi e ney eon O emcee Sods 58 To edit a DALI scene l a 2 2 llc cece ccc cece cece cece ence cece 0222an a222 ranno 58 To remove a DALI fixture from a scene o oooooccoccccccccccnccnccncnncnncnncnr nr 58 Emergency Ballasts un ii citar 58 Upload CONTI GURANOM lt 6 225i 8 cic
94. Once the Controllers have been connected they are then uniquely associated with Controllers in the Designer pro ject see Controller association Tessera Panel Controller TPC The TPC is an advanced lighting controller with an integrated customisable capacitive touch screen It outputs up to 512 channels of eDMX and is able to output multiple protocols simultaneously See Controller properties TPC with TPC RIO When using a TPC that is connected to a TPC RIO the TPC functions in largely the same way The extra output and triggering options provided by the TPC RIO will be seamlessly applied to the TPC when the Controller Type in the Network tab reads TPC TPC RIO Mosaic Show Controllers MSC Three models are available for DMX amp eDMX lighting control the MSC 1 512 control channels the MSC 2 1024 control channels and the MSC 4 2048 control channels The MSC 4 can output up to 1024 channels as local DMX the remaining channels must be output as eDMX All 2048 channels may be output as eDMX The MSC X is available for eDMX and DVI control with capacities ranging from 20 universes MSC 20 10 240 control channels to 200 universes MSC 200 102 400 control channels Unlike common DMX frame store devices they are extremely powerful and flexible and can be configured in numerous ways to suit the application see Controller properties Audio Visual Controller AVC The AVC is the solid state equivalent of two DVD players and a
95. Press Delete 3 Press Yes to confirm The DALI scene is removed and scene configuration data updated ready to be uploaded into the ballasts To edit a DALI scene 1 Select the scene in the folder 2 Select the DALI fixtures or groups 3 Adjust the levels The DALI scene is edited and scene configuration data updated ready to be uploaded into the ballasts To remove a DALI fixture from a scene 1 Select the scene in the folder 2 Select the fixture to remove 3 Press the Knockout button to the right of the Intensity controls The DALI scene is edited and scene configuration data updated ready to be uploaded into the ballasts Emergency Ballasts Emergency DALI ballasts are set up in the same way as standard DALI ballasts and support Highlight and Re Addressing Emergency tests may be scheduled for all emergency ballasts in a project via the Emergency Ballast Tests tab on the right of the DALI window You can override project settings on a per interface basis by using the emer gency settings in the Interface Properties tab Function and Duration tests can be scheduled independently of each other on a daily weekly monthly or yearly basis The time of day that the tests run can also be specified Choosing to test alternate ballasts will test every other patched ballast the remaining ballasts will then be tested once the initial test is complete 58 DALI interface Properties Enable emergency ballast tests cl Test al
96. Server One Controller in your project must be allocated as the Time Server the first project Controller added is chosen by default The Time Server is responsible for network playback synchronisation and for issuing realtime and astronomical clock triggers To set the correct date and time set see Controller Configuration To change the Time Server 1 Select the project Controller which is to become the Time Server 2 Press the Set as Time Server button in the Controller properties pane Web interface tools To view a Controller s web interface 1 Select the Controller 2 Press the Web Interface button on the Controller toolbar 3 Your PC s default browser will open the Controller s home page or custom page if one has been created To create files for uploading via the web interface 1 Use File gt Save Snapshots 2 Use the file dialogue to chose a location to store the generated files 3 A file for each project Controller is created projectname controllerserial wrn MSCs and pro jectname controllerserial avc AVCs IMPORTANT Controllers must be running the same version of firmware as the Designer software Uploading a project file to a Controller running different firmware may result in the project failing to load and run Check the Controller s home page to determine compatibility before attempting a remote upload File transfer This feature allows you to use the Controller s memory card as a remote memory device fo
97. Set AVC Master The video brightness and audio volume level can be passed in by a variable Select the Variable option and then choose the variable index Set Fixture RGB The Red Green and Blue values for a group of fixtures can be passed in as variables Select the Variable option for the colour you want to adjust and then choose the variable index The fade time for the action can also be passed in as a variable Select the Variable option and then choose the variable index d Set DALI Level The DALI group or ballast number on a specific interface can be passed in by variable Select the relevant Vari able option and then choose the variable index The level of a DALI ballast group or all DALI ballasts can be passed in by a variable Select the Variable option and then choose the variable index A Recall DALI Scene The DALI group or ballast number on a specific interface can be passed in by variable Select the relevant Vari able option and then choose the variable index Recall a DALI scene on a specific interfaces single ballast group or all of the ballasts Select the Variable option and then choose the variable index A DALI Command The DALI group or ballast number on a specific interface can be passed in by variable Select the relevant Vari able option and then choose the variable index d Mark DALI Ballast Fixed The DALI ballast address on a specific interface can be passed in by variable Sel
98. TPC only The MSC X has an integrated DMX Input port but it also supports DMX Input via Art Net Il or sACN Select either DMX for the integrated port or Art Net Il orsACN and a Universe number for eDMX reception Note that the Con troller only listens for Art Net on its Protocol port The TPC also supports DMX Input via Art Net Il and sACN Select either Art Net Il or sACN and a Universe num ber for eDMX reception DALI The TPC RIO has a DALI bus interface This can be used to control DALI ballasts via timeline programming and to receive DALI commands for use in DALI Input triggers 155 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual MSC 1 amp 2 Expansion Modules A variety of Expansion Modules are available to augment the original MSC 1 amp 2 hardware though these are being discontinued Their functionality is being replaced by the enhanced connectivity of the revised MSC and new Remote Devices For further information please contact support Up to two Expansion Modules may be connected to each MSC in a project Please refer to the documentation supplied with the modules for hardware details and installation instructions IMPORTANT Changes made to an Expansion Module s configuration will only take effect after an upload Options vary according to the module type Designer v1 11 supports the following Paradigm To enable a controller to talk to a Unison Paradigm Processor specify the IP address here See advanced trig ger
99. The Help is split into four major sections Quick Start Reference Troubleshooting and Appendices Those of you experimenting with the software for the first time should work through the Quick Start guide to famil larise yourself with the basics of the software The Reference section then gives detailed descriptions of every aspect of the software as well as the configuration of the Unison Mosaic Controllers and their accessories The Troubleshooting section provides help to resolve any problems while the Appendices provide additional useful resources If you have a Controller that you wish to connect to and program now then please read the Network section for instructions although this is not required when working through the Quick Start guide Help Help This is the PDF version of the on line Help and it is available in various formats for printing The on line version which has the advantage of being fully searchable and includes animated tutorials can be opened from within Designer using Help gt Contents on the main toolbar Support As with all successful control products support is crucial and the team at ETC will do everything possible to ensure that your project is a Success Please do not hesitate to contact us with your questions bug reports and suggestions at T 800 688 4116 E service etcconnect com Please also visit our website to keep up to date with the latest product news and software releases www etccon nect com
100. Triggers and different Actions Note Change button for Real Time parameters and Edit for the MIDI message builder Question marks 2 on the worksheet will indicate where parameters or values need to be set To create a conditional trigger create a Digital Input trigger Set it to input 1 drag a Start Timeline Action and select a timeline to play Copy and paste the trigger right click Mac Ctrl click On the earlier trigger drag an Astronomical condition which will default to After Sunset Set Action to play a different timeline This achieves a condition option and a catch all option if the condition does not apply Return to Simulate Select Project above the control area All the triggers you have created appear below Clicking Play will activate the Startup trigger Run your project utilizing the triggers to mimic contact clos ures real time triggers serial messages etc 29 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Setup Project properties With no fixtures selected the Project Properties pane is displayed CONFIGURE PROJECT amp PLAN Project Identification The project filename mdp and path is displayed for reference Underneath are two fields for optionally entering a project title and the project s author these fields are displayed on the Controller s home page and are useful for reference once the installation completed If the title field is left blank the web interface will instead display the pro
101. a ls a L ATA 59 MOVO A A aN ee en a A A ee ee ee as 60 Parameter A E een Oa ae 60 NCCLS esas fleet eae eee oie ccs ee Nie ek at eee ees oe a ae ete aos eee 61 POSTON ea A as A ag Ns a 61 Creating a mover presets 61 Using Output LIVE dae 61 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Editing a mover preset a ee Peal cee ea 61 Deleting and copying a mover presets 62 Medlar oe NR EF A A ee SE eT Oe 63 Pixel Matrices cs in ang ens ce cay hide cal sk cence ae ae owas ALALLA nina ens LLLA Aaaa LL22 LaaLa aaa 63 To create Pixel Matrices automatically from the plan recommended 2 2 63 To create a Pixel Matrix manually 00 00 0 0 02 e cece cece cee cee conocernos 63 Crop render WINKOW Lo acacia ci tinue de Oud oo Macy as 64 Import pixel matrix 22 284 8 del ae aes 64 Media PESOS a ts pa aaah ae a tae a e te 64 ME SIO Steet iea502 oss dona cli hee ees tt do one o a aida oA oe an asia se ati oo 65 AVG eS els bse db la o eS aa a ed aS 65 Custom Presets ica cette ada 65 Program Timeline Properties _ 0 0 000 02 o cece cece eee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee eens 67 A Te et ee ee 67 SLUT AA AA E ee Ree ee ee ETE ee 67 ET A et ata ee ce tents een ap nee ee ae eek ee aon eae eames Sena ens oe acne 67 A E E S 67 o AAA E a E 68 Working with timecode 000 isa 68 Time Offset evict on ctivnre wn cusecacudeea a odia 68 Fe OTA IN as sree ware ate A O eee ee eed ct dcp niente nese ean ad 68 Auto release at end icesec
102. a project but the following restrictions apply A TPC oran MSC 1 can support up to 16 RIO Ds An MSC 2 can support up to 32 RIO Ds An MSC 4 can support up to 64 RIO Ds An MSC X can support up to 100 RIO Ds An AVC cannot support any RIO Ds The original MSC 1 2 hardware each support up to two DALI M Expansion Modules DALI addressing amp grouping Each DALI interface is configured separately use the pull down on the DALI toolbar to select an interface for con figuration 54 DALI a iii A DISCOVER MANAGE BALLASTS CREATE GROUPS The top pane of the DALI interface window displays the 64 real ballast address cells the bottom pane the group membership matrix The device commands are available to manage the ballasts on each DALI interface Device commands IMPORTANT Designer must be connected to the Controllers with RIO Ds or DALI M Expansion Modules and the DALI ballasts must be active to perform these operations A DALI ballast internally stores its address this is a number between 1 and 64 It is also possible that the ballast has never been addressed so it does not have an address These commands are used to discover and address DALI ballasts A Find addressed ballasts This queries the ballasts attached to the device and reports all addressed ballasts found an icon is added to each address cell when the corresponding ballast has been found A Address ballasts This finds all ballasts without an
103. ack allow ing overlaid text to remain onscreen regardless of which video clip is chosen to play underneath Timeline row programming will remain onstage for the duration of the timeline unless overridden by another timeline with programming on the same row s or explicitly released Players amp limitations While the AVC s major advantage is that is has two separate players it is important to appreciate that it only has two players The flexibility of both the programming interface and the Unison Mosaic system s multi timeline environment can catch the unwary particularly when using dissolves or wipes which require both players for the duration of such a transition Both players are routed to both the Main Mixer and the Effects unit see schematic above along with the Live input The Play Clip preset requires exclusive use of a player and so only two Play Clip presets can run con currently either while transitioning from one to the other or with one main and the other as an effect eg picture in picture Note however that a O second duration snap transition only requires a single player and the Live input feed none at all Which player does what is determined automatically at playback to ensure that multiple timelines interact cor rectly Your programming does not specify a particular player just the request to use one When the programming on a single timeline or the interaction of multiple timelines at playback calls for more than th
104. ackward compatibility with files saved with earlier versions progress requires that we sometimes make architectural changes going for wards Reinstall the later version get loads of warnings about custom fixtures when opening a project file You are trying to open a project that contains custom fixtures with the same identification number as custom fix tures already on your PC Either delete the custom fixtures on your PC or give them different identification num bers This has been fixed in v1 2 3 so please contact support if you still see these warnings have forgotten the Controller s password You will need to go on site and gain access to the Controller then contact support for further instructions have checked the FAQ and troubleshooting but I m still stuck Contact support please be prepared to send in your project file When using DMX In on a MSC or AVC is my DMX line terminated No To terminate the DMX line you should add a 120 Ohm resistor across the positive and negative terminals 192 Output viewer Output viewer Select View gt Output viewer on the main toolbar to open this window Dmx Output axi 1 Fope LPC ILLERA Unrese CAESA CI CLA AAA re 771 AEAEE says w e PE a NES E SE JME F LEW LED LEE OO Fd Ea E ba Teal LEO HEERE I CE LEE ES ES TEI ARO AEAEABAL AE EIRE EE AAA MAME Ea Ea MN Ea E MN E E HD E E O E E EEE cead Esta Ged Ex Ea E Dies bis mabe BEU EE be tio
105. address and randomly assigns them a free address It will not change the address of any already addressed ballasts A Readdress all ballasts This will clear the addresses of all ballasts and then assign every ballast a random address 55 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual A Resolve clash It is possible that two ballasts can have the same short address If that happens the ballasts clashing are shown with a red icon The resolve clash button will move the clashing ballasts to a random address that is unused by any other ballast A Identify emergency ballasts Send all emergency ballasts a command to indicate their address on the multicoloured LEDs on the fixture Whilst this is enabled the command will be sent every 10 seconds A To manually readdress a DALI ballast 1 Select the ballast icon in the current address cell 2 Drag it to the target preferably empty address cell The ballast is readdressed to the target cell If the target cell was occupied then the ballasts should swap addresses although this has not been found to be terribly reliable dh To highlight a ballast Select an address cell containing a ballast icon and press Highlight to bring this ballast to full level select another cell to highlight instead or press Highlight again to turn off Patching DALI fixtures When you add DALI fixtures to your project plan in setup these abstract ballasts are assigned to the Unpatched DALI group in the Browser an
106. ailable from the View menu to monitor each Timecode Bus 156 Network Controller Interfaces Timecode Viewer lua Timecode Source 1 w Format Unknown nn a e aa N n gt 50 10 See timeline properties for usage AUDIO The Audio Expansion Module allows realtime manipulation of intensity and timeline playback to create sound to light or light organ effects The configuration options are e Route To select one of the four Audio Buses to which the audio should be routed e Gain adjust the module s input gain to suit the audio signal level e Initially Enabled uncheck to disable this port The Audio Feedback window is available from the View menu to monitor each Audio Bus Audio Feedback Max The Audio Expansion Module provides five frequency bands at 63Hz 250Hz 1KHz 3 5KHz and 12KHz The RIO A has superseded the Audio Expansion Module and offers vastly superior functionality See remote devices for more details See timeline properties and advanced triggers for usage and please contact support for tips and tricks as a sur prising variety of effects are available DALI M The DALI Master Expansion Module allows control of up to 64 DALI ballasts with each module being mapped to a DALI Interface see DALI Since patch ballast configuration group and scene data is stored in the DALI bal lasts themselves it is beneficial to be connected to the ballasts when programming Use the Interface p
107. aise and Lower buttons can be used to define the matching order 106 Triggers Advanced Press Remove to delete a command string and Clear to delete them all The resulting hexadecimal string will be constructed automatically and displayed in the window for reference with question marks indicating undefined characters in MIDI Show Control since we do not know in advance how many characters will be captured or lt c gt lt d gt and lt x gt as appropriate for Short and Extended messages Press Ok to finish Use Options gt Preferences gt Triggers to select the default Short MIDI message data format A comprehensive guide to MIDI is beyond the scope of this document see the MID Manufacturers Association for more details and the manual for the equipment to be interfaced will also certainly be an invaluable reference DMX Input DMxX IN Expansion Module required for original MSC hardware Revised MSC hardware AVC and MSC X can receive DMX directly TPC and MSC X can receive DMX In via Art Net and sACN Use the Controller setting to specify which controller should receive the DMX If using two DMX IN Expansion Modules with an MSC use the Port setting to specify which module should be considered the input source mod ules are numbered in the order they are connected to the MSC Now you should specify which DMX channel to look at and the range of values to trigger on You can choose whether to trigger every time
108. al and Ethernet strings A message such as GOxx is valid where the xx is replaced with a two digit decimal number which will start the timeline with the corresponding number rather than having to assign distinct strings to every timeline In Designer the string would be GO lt 2d gt which indicates the system will expect a 2 digit variable The action would still be Start Timeline but rather than select ing a specific timeline set the Variable Index to 1 A useful tip for programming the Controller is to be connected and utilize the Controller s log Any messages on the line will appear here be it in nice friendly ASCII or other formats The string can be copied straight out of the log and pasted into the parameters string box eliminating the possibility for typos etc The trigger types can be mapped out in advance with comments and actions then whatever the other device sends can be grabbed accur ately at the time The log is a great troubleshooting tool for checking what triggers have been received and what actions are fired as a result Fixtures What happens if need a fixture that isn t in the library If you re keen you can make your own fixture by grappling with the fixture editor Preferably please contact sup port with your requirements I have a fixture with lots of DMX modes which mode should use The flat mode that addresses each cell element pixel individually with no additional intensity master nor effect s mac
109. al band width get the fraction through the effect local t frame frames get the height of the band in which this pixel falls local band height math sin beand bands t math pri 2 1 7 4 232 Custom Preset Programming Guide s adjust y to be relative to the center of the effect Y Sy Heme Z iO decide if this pixel is inside the band if mathsabs y height lt band height then ro curn band cOLour else Febara DackG round Colour end end We have added two variables band _ colour red and background colour blue and are now returning those values rather than the r g b values that we were using previously You should now see red bands rippling over a blue background A simple gradient The colour library also includes an interpolate function which takes two colours and a fraction and returns a new colour that is linearly interpolated between the two colours For example Listing 11 local ed Colour new 255 704 09 Local blue colour newt 0 0 2509 function pixel frame x y interpolate between red and blue using the horizontal dis placement of x note that we use width 1 so the rightmost pixel is completely blue return colour interpolate red blue x widten 1 end This creates a horizontal red to blue gradient We could have created the same gradient without the colour library as follows Listing 12 function pixel frame x y local f x width 1 tTerturn
110. already patched select Continue or Unpatch Existing as required This prompt can be turned off if it proves aggravating However you can not patch more than one fixture to the same address a DMX channel can only be controlled by one parameter so fixtures can t overlap at all If you drag one fixture onto another the incoming fixture will highlight in red to alert you that this address is already occupied If you go ahead and drop it there anyway the software will prompt you whether to continue and unpatch the existing fixture s for you select Ok to proceed or Cancel to abort Again this prompt can be turned off Some fixtures for example the Vari lite VL5 need to be patched twice since they have two distinct patch points one for the intensity control patched to the dimmer rack and another for the fixture s automation controls To patch a multiple patch point fixture Locate the fixture in the Browser and expand it by pressing the plus sign to reveal its patch points Use Controller and Universe to select the desired universe for the first patch point Drag and drop the first patch point onto the desired start address Repeat for the other patch point s PwWNnN gt Or 1 Patch the entire fixture as one 2 Drag the patch points apart to their desired addresses To unpatch a fixture or multiple fixtures 1 Select one or more fixtures using the Browser or the universe layout 2 Right click and select Unpatch To clear all patching
111. ame slot name gt slot value lt textslot gt lt response gt Notes Multiple text slots can be requested by adding multiple query arguments for example GET NEEDS Kx XXX Xxx quer y textolkot slotlsslotzss lot If a slot name is not recognised it will be ignored Get Global Lua Variables Get the value of a global Lua variable e Command variable e Args variable name required Sample Response lt response gt lt variable name variable name gt variable value lt variable gt lt response gt Notes Multiple variables can be requested by adding multiple query arguments for example GET Ives xxx XKX XXX X x qu ery vari able variablel amp variable2 amp variable3 If a variable name is not recognised or if the variable s value cannot be represented as text the lt variable gt tag will contain no value Example An example file can be found here 248 Glossary Glossary B bootloader Bootstrap loader a small software program stored in internal flash memory that is responsible for load ing the firmware or operating system C compound fixture A lighting fixture containing more than one controllable element for example an LED batten consisting of a number of identical elements or pixels D DALI Digital Addressable Lighting Interface an industry standard digital lighting control protocol DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol a method of automatically ass
112. and Controller must be on the same network Patching DVI fixtures MSC X To output data using the DVI port you must first create a pixel matrix that matches the LED controller s pixel map Once this has been done use the Pixel Matrix pull down on the protocol tab to select which matrix will be output via the DVI port and select an X amp Y offset as required Any programming for the fixtures in the pixel matrix will now output on the DVI port not just programming applied directly to the pixel matrix The MSC X s DVI port is set to a fixed 1024x768 60Hz resolution which is compatible with most LED con trollers The LED controller or monitor MUST be connected when the MSC X boots or resets for the port to become active Used channels At the top of the Protocols pane is an indicator of the number of used and available channels for the selected Con troller When the Controller is an MSC X and if you have not associated the controller with a physical device then you are allowed to patch fixtures up to the capacity you have chosen see Controller Association However when you associate an MSC X with a physical device you will only be able to associate to devices which have a capacity equal or greater than the patched fixtures After associating with a device you will be unable to exceed the capacity of that device eDMX Pass Thru When using an MSC in a project it is possible to allow eDMX from another eDMX source to be passed thro
113. and front panel of the MSC X socket screw top and bottom and press the card release button to access the Compact Flash card Plug the Compact Flash card into a CF card reader on a PC Insert the card into a suitable card reader on your PC 199 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Run the tool On Windows this tool can be launched from the Start menu under Programs gt Mosaic gt Designer Note that the tool has to be run as administrator and the Start Menu shortcut is thus configured accordingly However if you wish to run the application directly you will need to right click on it and choose run as administrator On Mac OS X the tool can be launched from wherever the Designer software was installed typically in Applic ations or Desktop Press Continue to select the correct Compact Flash card Me MSCX Recovery Tool CBM Flash Disk 1 GE Bam hs Santak SOCFH 000G 2 GB Select the card and press Continue to confirm the correct Compact Flash card BE MSCA Recovery Tool ES IMPORTANT All existing data will be lost ensure that you have selected the correct card before proceeding 200 MSC X Recovery Tool Press Format amp Install once you have confirmed that the correct card has been selected to proceed and com plete E MSEX Recovery Tool SII Pie E MSCH Recovery Tool Press Exit and eject the card from the PC Windows right click and select Eject or use Safely Remove Hard ware fr
114. anual Output Live If you have connected Controllers then you will be able to select Output Live in the simulator to have Designer generate the DMX values directly the Controllers acting purely as a DMX driver In this case what you see in the DMX viewer is exactly what is being output to the fixtures in realtime 194 Log viewer Log viewer Select View gt Controller Log Window on the main toolbar to open this window Caniroller Lag Winds Set Coda ARE Ono 17 da 14 40 19 Marco nes a prop lea ici Fl 14 He 14 eS Aba Dock Rest eee ST Pisos 1 Piar 1 2 ACTOR Sa Teal Dieta 1 ae H dz eH prt eg Ss Ser eee E a E 17d dd 1 Sta ee eee 17d Md 13 Pio hide ies Hd MARE used TORS i ara TELA 219 Fep creel Eo Mac do EA Dea 17 hg 1d 13 Corpa ra AS ad REO ds 18 parto dol 7 paty fm Le Cel l ber fz hE 1T h 1d ee re ee A ba AO dea bl 17 He H Local ee a ce 1 a PT af 1700 14d rr b ad pop Ma Ud 4 Rara oo bem He HE F re oa ee NCAA 14 Bn 14 oe mae ias ies pete ll hotel OVAL used EA 17 hia 1d 5550 Ab Dock Heat para 16 06 00 Rea ur TE 12 IF bia DS Sl re ore Tha i AP read a AAA ads IT h 1d O Por kdd ira Tha H EACT TEA Gi Tirei Tha Sets eee er 1 S ogg peor POG Bad MATO ciate bate payor nop bits UA 1 as 1d 3550 Corera HO bal AD ds bate 14 Mas 143650 Loca es a a 14 2 l 17 ee 1 5550 Sirs do lead peopel f pai roma dos bir as Use the Controller pull down to select the Cont
115. architectural lighting Developed by Philips Lighting it has become a standard IEC 60929 DALI differs from DMX in a number of import ant ways Only 64 ballasts per DALI bus interface Only 16 groups per interface Only 16 scenes per interface Ballast configuration including address groups and scenes is uploaded to and stored in the ballasts them selves e Topology free DALI bus operates at very low data rates e Command based protocol ballasts perform fades and maintain levels e Only certain discrete fade values are permitted As aresult the DALI protocol is not suitable for rendering effects and media programming is restricted purely to recalling lighting levels via the Set Level and DALI Scene presets see DALI presets DALI interfaces Each RIO D TPC with TPC RIO or DALI M Expansion Module added to the system supports one DALI bus up to 64 ballasts and is assigned to a DALI interface within Designer Due to the nature of the DALI protocol these DALI interfaces are insular affairs with each having its own unique set of ballasts and groups Each interface must be configured and uploaded to individually When you add a RIO D TPC with TPC RIO or DALI M Expansion Module you select which DALI interface it should be assigned to Only one device can be assigned to each interface Use the Add Interface button on the DALI toolbar to add another Use Remove Interface to remove an unwanted one Up to 100 DALI interfaces can be added to
116. are set to Any then they will be captured as variables The variable index order will follow the order that the parameters are displayed in the trigger Conditions that capture variables Digital Word This condition will capture a variable from the inputs set to match either value This variable will be added on the end of any variables captured by the trigger Conditions that use variables A DALI Ballast Error The DALI ballast address on a specific interface can be passed in by variable Select the relevant Variable option and then choose the variable index Actions that use variables Captured variables can then be used in actions by specifying the variable index corresponding to the order in which the variables were captured If you have multiple actions associated with a trigger then each action can use the variables independently gt Start M Release Toggle ll Resume and II Pause Timeline Rather than selecting a timeline as a property of the action you can specify the timeline number in a variable This is a very powerful feature when you want an external system to be able to call up any one of a large number of timelines because you do not need to define separate triggers for each timeline 125 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual a Set Increase and Decrease Intensity The intensity level or increment can be passed in by a variable Select the Variable option and then choose the variable index
117. as Pixeline 1044 Moving lights 200 Automated or moving lights and conventional fixtures with scrollers Pixel matrices 206 Instances of media perlin noise starfield text and custom presets PAANS ee deployed on timelines Timelines 500 AVC presets 256 Custom presets 256 Media presets 256 Imported media clips Media slots 1024 Text slots 1024 Fonts 16 Mover presets 256 Triggers 1024 Conditions per trigger 32 Actions per trigger 32 cols 40 So if all MSC 2s then the maximum number of DMX universes in the project is 80 80 x 512 49960 DMX 512 channels Remote Devices exclud Per Remote Device type per Designer project If you are planning 100 to use more that 16 of one or more remote devices please contact ing RIO D l l i support to discuss your requirements in advance DALI and RIO Ds Please see DALI Interfaces for DALI and RIO D limitations KiNet power supplies 1024 Per Controller in a Designer project Timecode Buses 6 MIDI or linear SMPTE EBU timecode sources Network Buses 5 Ethernet trigger sources eg UDP Audio Buses 4 Audio trigger sources Plan size pixels 8192x8192 Plan and fixture library scale is 1cm 1pixel 0 394 1pixel As you can see from the above limits the Unison Mosaic control system can scale to an impressive size that rivals even state of the art lighting consoles However while the Controllers themselves provide a scalable solution each Controller only stores and pro cesses the data relevant to it the PC
118. as a variable that can be used to alter the behaviour of actions such as using a number received via RS232 to select a particular timeline The standard capabilities offered in the Triggers screen are extensive but a good show control system has the ability to cope with situations that are anything but standard Within the Unison Mosaic system when things get non standard then we can use scripting Script is a Simple programming language that allows users to extend the functionality of the Unison Mosaic sys tem themselves We use a freely available programming language called Lua Anyone who has ever worked with a programming language will find all the typical tools are available and it should be straightforward to pick up for those who have not On top of the core Lua syntax we have added some dedicated Unison Mosaic functions that allow scripts to work directly with the capabilities of a Controller Not every problem requires script but there are few show control problems that can t be solved using script where necessary A few examples of situations where you might want to use script include Making a single contact closure start a different timeline each time Make a timeline loop a set number of times and then release Track motion sensor activity over a period of time Inverting a DMX input before it is used with a Set Intensity action Interpreting data from a wind direction sensor Using a table of times for high and low tide to control br
119. at each important programming milestone What are the Unison Mosaic Designer file extensions mdp Unison Mosaic Designer Project file mde Unison Mosaic Designer Exported project file contains referenced media amp background plan image so can grow quite large use this to transfer and archive projects T MSC project data file uploaded to the MSC s memory card or saved to disc for remote web l interface upload phv Custom video format used by the AVC pha Custom audio format used by the AVC Pave AVC project data file uploaded to the AVC s memory card or saved to disc for remote FTP upload with the media files dat AVC font file mdx Generating when exporting media slots for media manager mtc User interface file for the Tessera Panel Controller Can the project file be retrieved from the Controller s No not unless you explicitly store it as an exported project mde file on the Controller s memory card To do this you must remove the card from the Controller and plug it into the PC or use the File Transfer feature How best to archive a project Export the project File gt Export or Ctrl E and save the mde file on one or more of the Controllers and keep a version for yourself safe together with the relevant Designer installer If you lose the project file you will have to start from scratch 184 Frequently asked questions How do programme RS232 RS485 or Ethernet triggers Unison Mosaic Co
120. athport universe number gt Controller s ETCNet2 Universe NET2 lt ETCNet2 universe number gt Controller s sACN Universe SACN lt sACN universe number gt Universe is obtained using the get_kinet_universe powerSupplyNum Controller s KiNet portNum function For example park ARTNET 2 1 255 Parks channel 1 of Art Net II universe 2 at full park ARTNET 2 128 Parks channel 2 of Art Net II universe 0 at 50 park SACN 1 1 255 Parks channel 1 of SACN universe 1 at full en Ho Parks channel 1 of port 15 of KiNet power supply 2 at full Accessing the current state of the digital inputs on a RIO Returns as an object the RIO by type RIO_80 RIO_44 or RIO_08 and get_rio type number ber rio input Boolean value on input 1 to 8 of the returned RIO object For example Ny ROWS Gel TrO RIO 80 2 ELO LTAputLl myn oO 211 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Accessing the current state of BPS buttons and setting BPS LEDs get_bps number Returns as an object the BPS by number State of the button 1 to 8 of the returned BPS object values are RELEASED PRESSED HELD or REPEAT Sets the button 1 to 8 of the returned BPS object effect can be OFF STATIC SLOW_FLASH FAST FLASH DOUBLE FLASH BLINK bps set_LED button effect intensity PULSE SINGLE RAMP_ON or RAMP_OFF Intensity is optional and fade should be between 0 and 255 if not specified the LED intensity is left unchanged from its current value
121. ation Scale The Unison Mosaic Designer fixture library uses a scale of 1cm 1pixel 0 394 1pixel for the fixture icons so for best results the plan bitmap should be sized to this scale If your installation is too large to be accommodated at this scale i e bigger than 81 92m in either axis then change the scale and use the Fixture Position settings to adjust the scale of your fixture icons accordingly Colour scheme It may be desirable to change the colour of programmed and selected fixtures to aid clarity depending on the plan background colour or image use the browse buttons to select appropriate colours A darker background makes visualization clearer Location City or Latitude Longitude At the bottom are the fields to set the location of the installation to ensure correct operation of the Controller s internal astronomical clocks A city picker is provided to facilitate the coordinate entry but values can be entered directly into the Latitude and Longitude boxes a web map service such as www multimap com is a useful resource for collecting this information Time zone The local time zone can be entered as an offset to GMT for example New York would be 05 00 being 5 hours behind GMT If the city picker is used to select the location then the time zone will automatically be set NOTE f such an offset is set then the Controller s date and time must be set to GMT not local time or this offset will be doubled Daylight S
122. ation and brightness throughout the preset e End Colour defines the hue at the end of the preset saturation and brightness will be the same as the start colour e Reverse Direction reverses the direction of the hue fade The start and end colours will share the same saturation and brightness editing the saturation or brightness for one colour will edit the other as well The fade time between the colours is determined by the length of the preset on the timeline Matrix Presets A range of presets from gradient colour fills to rainbow and text effects These presets have spatial awareness and can be applied to Pixel Matrices using the inherent 2D information to determine how they are rendered and in what order the fixtures will transition They are considerably more powerful than the standard presets and allow you to paint onto your fixture arrays EV Ye Text Renders a scrolling text message on a matrix Text Colour the text colour Base colour the background colour Period the number of seconds that the message takes to scroll over the matrix Count the number of times that the message should scroll over the length of the preset Text the text to render Offset the percentage of the height of the matrix to offset the baseline of the text positive is down neg ative is up Text Height the height of the text in percentage of the matrix height Direction the direction to scroll in Flip flips the text upside do
123. aving Time Check the Daylight Saving Time box to enable automatic DST adjustment The rules for Daylight Saving differ by region but if the city picker is used to select the location the correct settings for that region should appear in the 31 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Starts and Ends fields although it is recommended that you check that they are indeed valid Alternatively spe cific dates can be entered the year is ignored Setup Adding amp organising fixtures Once you have the plan setup as desired you can start populating it with the fixtures as required for the install ation FIXTURE LIBRARY CONFIGURE SELECTED FIXTURES Fixture Library Unison Mosaic Designer incorporates a comprehensive fixture library grouped by manufacturer A generic man ufacturer is provided for standard fixtures such as dimmers basic RGB LEDs and non dim items that need to be switched such as fans or smoke machines A custom manufacturer is created when you make your own fixtures either by right clicking on a fixture within the library picker not once placed on the plan and selecting Customise Fixture to use this fixture as a starting point or by pressing the Fixture Editor button at the top to create a fixture from scratch Both operations will open the Note however that common settings such as colour amp gobo slots size shape and dimmer curve etc can all be set on an individual fixture basis using the Fixture Confi
124. back speed and position can be overridden using triggers e Timecode Bus the timeline will follow one of six Timecode Buses see below e Audio Bus the timeline will follow one of four Audio Buses see below Working with timecode By selecting one of the six Timecode Buses the timeline s ruler will display timecode values and the properties pane will give further options Timeline Properties Mame Red Number 1 A Length 5 00 00 Pronty Normal pe Tine Source Timecode Souce 1 Tiree Offset 0 00 Format SMPTEZO Auto release at end Time Offset Timelines by default start at 00 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds frames but the timecode source may not do so the tape may have been striped with an offset of an hour 01 00 00 00 for example Enter the source s start ing value in this box to synchronise Format Timecode comes in four formats that depend on the source media used select the appropriate format here Film24 EBU25 SMPTE30 amp NTSC30 to prevent missed frames and stuttering playback Auto release at end Check this box if you want the timeline to release and hence ignore timecode at the end the end of the last placed preset or flag Typically leave it unchecked so that the timeline always follows the timecode regardless of the timecode value which may exceed the end time Timecode Buses The six Timecode Buses are internal buses to which one patches the external timecode sources available to the syst
125. ber leave the Device as Local and choose a port number For the revised MSC hardware and TPC with TPC RIO this should 111 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual be set to 1 For the original MSC hardware this should be set to 1 if using the onboard RS232 port or 2 or 3 if using an RS485 expansion module For the MSC X this should be set to 1 or 2 depending which RS232 port is being used Alternatively set the Device to a RIO and select the RIO number Now define the string of output characters There are three formats in which serial strings can be entered Hex A series of hexadecimal characters 0 9 a f A F where pairs of values are interpreted as a byte Decimal A series of decimal characters 0 255 separated by characters ASCII A series of ASCII characters The special characters n for new line r for carriage return and t for tab are supported Ethernet Output Use the Controller setting to specify which Controller should generate the Ethernet output Define the recipient s IP address and Port select the messaging protocol UDP TCP and define the string of output characters to be transmitted The recipients IP address and port number can be passed with variables A MIDI Output MIDI is another very popular protocol for interfacing equipment and the MIDI input trigger allows you to define via a convenient MIDI Message Builder the type Short message MIDI Show Control or Extended and command strin
126. can be achieved using the conditions any of which can be added to a trigger and then the action will only be performed if the condition is true or false if the NOT checkbox is ticked You may have multiple identical triggers with different conditions allowing the same trigger to be used to do dif ferent actions for instance start a timeline if it is not running but stop the timeline if it is already running You can also apply multiple conditions to a trigger and each condition must be true or false if the NOT checkbox is ticked before the action is performed Note that conditions do not specify a Controller they are always tested on the same Controller as the trigger is detected So if your trigger is a serial input on Controller 2 your digital input condition will look at the digital inputs on Controller 2 In situations where you really need to test conditions on a different Controller there are various tricks that could be used to achieve this please contact support NOTE Conditions are not tested by the simulator Condition types gt Timeline running Use this condition to determine if a timeline is currently running Running is defined as being between the start and the end of the timeline so a timeline holding at end is not running This condition can be useful if you want to only start a timeline if it is not already running Sometimes timelines are used as timers and this condition is used to determine if the timer has
127. ce eset Ae cet aves dues scuuecendunneti ddan ueootueeonwcuuedddddnutenecuueeds 68 PU MIEN OG OCS BUSES a at gk o tye ae as Siig te pl hs e lake dD 68 VVONKING WAT o AAA AE es She eh i hina ee hh tes Sen ee oo 69 A O E TORY oN Te E 69 Audio BUSES 5 Cia ace ondas oc cia es tada al cba Pe eats toe ei a et eee ee 69 Changing the timeline amp preset defaults o ooooooocccccccccccccccccccccccccccnccncconcnnc cnc cnn cnc 70 Program Preset types amp properties 00 022 2 ooo cece ce cece cee cee cece cece ee eeeeeeees 71 COUN A SS CS carta aay E ee AO ae leer 71 FICC COI ns tad inicia ic 11 Cobu O A oa e eee 12 lalo oo AAA a a eae cet elke oode dda sted ipe sk goad 12 FR OOS ME e eN ee 12 1110 8 PEII uds don a cb Ns Soiree a eve e ocacion 12 SPAMS nt et a ito a idol a e ca e 73 COMUNAS 200 a e a bebe aa doce 73 Ho do ps A A A A eat Gees 73 PEST A AA 14 FICKO ae a a A IR 74 PIS ACS o sa it rbdda costeo ea dee eee al aa de 74 A e o a 19 AA nee a A een ere 15 74 Bg 9 8 0 seme eam A A SAARI RA PIO eR PONY a NR Pe Se I 15 gt PIAL AID OW on la da ie nik 76 E A E A nea 76 Salta te ra dt do al ao el Ml esa ide 7 FIDE OIOUI Ol COLOUR crea asia det di e dt cr tal added 7 EN AAA ee a eee se ets Suse heat de aoe oe 78 POITO O o ta dee EE 78 No AA A RVR eterna 78 CGN E AAA A NA A AC 80 Preset user named 0 22 2 o cece ec eee cee cee eee e eee eee cece cece cee cee c eee eeeeeeeeeseeees 80 Media Slot Pres
128. ceceeeees 44 New preset properties 2 22 2 c eee nens 44 Background Colour 2 002 2 eee cece cee cee cece cee ee eee eee eee eee eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeees 44 AS A A A PSOE tre rene 44 Contents Short MIDI data format sede ico cercrs sine ace area et e cies Sleek 45 NGWO AAA t Me gee ee has ene a one Oe eame a ala eaeess ote ae sae 46 Advanced cae ahah eh rcs ees ian he eae A A ee oc ce cai a NO 47 10 A neta ade cn A AAA A A es 48 REE a e AA A A A E 48 PatCh WIKOOW eedan Sobra ltd cdo es ts denle errata deals 49 Patch toolbar amp protocol tabs o oococcccccccccccccccccccccccncnccnc cnc 49 Patching DMX amp eDMX fixtures oococcccccccccccccnccn os 49 Topatcna au Paneer eee ees et nO A me Facer Poe CeO Re needa es eee 49 To patch multiple fixtures _ 22 22 22 cece cece cece e eee cece e cee ee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 50 To change afixture S address 2 0 22 2 c cece cc ccc eee cee cee eee cee ee cee cece eee ceeeeeeees 50 To patch a multiple patch point fixture 2 222 2 cece cece cee e cece e cece eeeeeeeees 50 To unpatch a fixture or multiple fixtures 2 2 22 22 e cece e cece ee ceeeeeeeees 50 To clear all patching from a universe _ 2 2 22 2 e cece eee eee cee eee nro 50 To clone a universe copy the patch 0 0 0 22 2 eee ec cece cee cee cnc cnc nena 51 ToNignionta fixture seese cant O Aa 51 To hide unused universes e SS 51 RDM device discovery id 51 KiNet device TS C
129. cence eee ee 212 Writing messages to the Controller s status log 00 2 00 22 e cece eee eee cee eee 212 Storing data on the memory Card 2 22 22 2 ce eee cece eee cee ee ee eee cece cence eeeeeee 212 Trigger Programming Guide oc 214 FUNG OCG COUN A A A 214 A Os Por WE MOR wen COR A RES TES eT 214 COMMENTS AAA 215 IN IN A Sateen 215 o AA 215 OVO Ol Mt Ol ms ura ras ts ici a e tt ie de 215 NAICS a A a ht a ae 216 o AA anatsett ee Boe onsen nO ey rete enn EY tn OUST a eT eRe eT ee ary nee 217 Practical Examples ance tale eto En cla pl a porron pla cidcid aaa 218 Cycling through different timelines oooooocccccccccccccccc cece ccc ee eee eee eee eee eee eee 218 Make a timeline loop N times _ 2 2 22 l eee cee cece cece eee eee c cece cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 Track motion sensor activity over a period of time 00 0 22 c eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 221 Inverting a DMX input before it is used with a Set Intensity action 2 2 0 2 22 22 222 Interpreting data from a wind direction Sensor 0 22 22 cece eee eee ee cee cee cece eee eee 222 Using a table of times for high and low tide 2 00022 c eee cee eee eee eee cece 224 Implementing an interactive game for a Science Museum 2 22 222 eee cece eee ee eee 225 More IMIONMOAUOR 2 4 bt tbe ce e Ea iach hile catas a aT eA 225 Custom Preset Programming Guide occ coco 227 A a na Be Smee iain aie oones
130. ch RIO A can analyse incoming audio as up to 30 frequency bands see Remote Devices The Peak checkbox tells the trigger to match on the decaying level of the last peak in the audio frequency band Finally specify the range of values to trigger on You can choose whether to trigger every time the value changes within the specified range Changes in range or to only trigger when the value enters the specified range Enters range Enters range is generally more useful when you are using audio to trigger timelines but Changes in range would be required if you were using an audio band as a variable passed to a Set Intensity action to control the intensity for a group 107 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual A DALI Ballast Error RIO D TPC with TPC RIO or DALI S Expansion Module required Use this to trigger from a DALI ballast reporting an error Specify the interface then use All to match if any ballast on that interface reports an error Alternatively select a single address to match to Next select the error type to match to A DALI Input RIO D TPC with TPC RIO or DALI S Expansion Module required Touse an MSC with a DALI S expansion module as the input source use the Controller setting to specify which Controller has the expansion module and leave the Device as Local If two DALI S modules are connected set the port number to match which module should be the input source Tousea TPC with TPC RIO as the input sou
131. che sien A O 168 A A II pea gy A el 169 NAW OUI 2 ooh ona eat basto ra dee aie orcos ctra boscrsasisa e 169 PaK and UNDAK AAA ae ada ena vee ae apo diene ach ene ee 169 NO pate EE A IN seta eee es a ee 170 A E WT cE et eT A OA 170 Bi oS craton cece ate ase ne sar aaae ain E Wate e aan aoe eae ena 170 SA asp hae lett A A O a 170 CSE Oi eta A sey ene aaa ee ea a ee nine oetes aa as sea 170 Emergency Test Schedule 0 00 0 o occ e eee ccoo ocn 171 Emergency Ballast Errors a EA ronn 171 Balast StatUS otto a td ies Bo e AU 171 Recent Power Failures o oooooocococococococcccccocccn o 171 A A A ANO 172 Command ING N a e E e E 172 MANS Soe ets e a a e ae RE 172 Dynamic text SIONS ss ta macon aceon snemaeiencncne Uae eeeuuanuaneeseneeedalaeas ewe aaa 172 OAT MAN OMEN dln eae Maes lL ee acc aa LL NOI ala 172 Remote UDIO socorro eg tante ce a a aa a aaa 173 CUSTOM AA a e e o TO eee tt eR ed 173 Web interface Command line 000000000 aaao aoaaa anaana aa aaa 222222 a aa eee eee ahaaa anaana a222 174 DCCC AAA E ST 174 SENING INTENSI A E e E a a 174 E ae a a E E E ee Sahota 174 Clearing fixture settingS 00 0 00 o eee cece ccc cece cece cee eee neones 175 Clearing all fixtures settingS 0 0 0 02 l cece cece cece cee eee crono 175 Multiple Commands 22 scc0 sie dl discs is ubia 175 Interaction with timeline playback oococccccccccccccccccccc cnc ccccccno eee ee ee ee eee ees 175 Web interface Custom page s
132. ckage Downloads and updates can be found at our web site Does the Designer software support the Apple Macintosh Yes from v1 2 we have full Mac OS X support and from v1 2 4 universal binary support for both PowerPC and Intel Macs Project files will be compatible regardless of the operating system on which they are created What are the PC minimum requirements for Designer software Windows XP 32bit Service pack 2 or later Windows Vista 32bit and 64bit Windows 7 32bit and 64bit Apple Quicktime 6 5 or later Intel Pentium or PowerPC processor at 1 GHz or above 256MB RAM 100MB free hard disk space 1024x768 minimum screen resolution higher is better OpenGL graphics acceleration Ethernet or USB connection Are project files compatible across versions and platforms Any project file saved in an earlier version of Designer can be loaded by a later version Project files are com patible between the PC and Mac versions of the software However a project file saved in a later version of Designer may not be backward compatible as we reserve the right to make structural changes to improve the product Can have multiple versions of Designer on my computer No instead keep the installers for each version readily available A reinstall takes just seconds and updates the desktop shortcut What documentation is available For setup and configuration of the hardware we provide an Installation Guide This is available as a PDF anda
133. ct the condition to be removed and press the button on the Condition con figuration pane Changing the condition order To change the order in which conditions are tested use the A and Y buttons on the Condition configuration pane Actions Every trigger needs an action the thing to do which you can drag from the directory onto the Action field of the trigger or press the F button on the Action configuration pane and use the pull down menu to select the required type see basic advanced and Remote Device actions Up to 32 actions can be applied to each trigger in this way and you can use the E and gt buttons to select each one for configuration Configuring an action e Type the action type e Controller the controller that will process the action e Parameters the data required for each action type varies by type so refer to the appropriate action descriptions Removing an action Use the En and gt buttons to select the action to be removed and press the button on the Action configuration pane Changing the action order To change the order in which actions are executed use the A and Y buttons on the Action configuration pane Copying a trigger Select the trigger to be copied in the management area and use right click gt Copy to create a copy in the row immediately below very useful for defining similar triggers since all the defined conditions and actions are also copied Deleting a trigger Select
134. cted the Controller select the Network tab to view your connected Controllers amp Remote Devices 138 Network Controller connection q lt MANAGE CONTROLLERS CONTROLLERS IN THE PROJECT amp ON THE WETIWORK A lA Pa h lt MANAGE REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICES INTHE PROJECT amp ON THE NETWORK If a controller is on a different network and is not discovered on USB it will appear as grey in the network spread sheet If a controller is on a different network regardless of discovery on USB a warning message is shown in the Controller Config tab Controller firmware IMPORTANT Controllers must be running the same version of firmware as the Designer software Controllers with incompatible firmware will be highlighted in red To update a Controller s firmware 1 Select the incompatible Controller by pressing the left hand button the row will be highlighted 2 Press Reload Firmware on the network toolbar 3 The firmware update will proceed you must not disturb this process Alternatively a utility application is provided that also allows you to update the MSC X s bootloader and firmware see There is a for the TPC and MSC 1 2 4 The TPC RIO s firmware is updated directly from the TPC If the TPC detects that a connected TPC RIO has the wrong firmware version then it will automatically update it you must not disturb this process The TPC RIO s TPC Active LED will illuminate continu
135. cting between dawn amp dusk sunrise amp sunset sunset amp sunrise etc You can also specify offsets negative or pos itive in minutes as required There is also the option to select real time instead of sunset sunrise or twilight and enter a time to create a hybrid condition such as Between dawn and before 01 00 Two versions of dawn and dusk are offered using the two definitions of twilight civil and nautical Please see Wikipedia for an explanation of these terms Note that unlike the timeline running condition its result may vary between different Controllers in a network sys tem because it depends on whether fixtures in the timeline are locally patched Y Lunar As well as astronomical triggers the Controller uses lunar clock algorithms to calculate the lunar phases based on the location of the Controller See project properties Lunar conditions can be used to limit the operation of a trigger to specified lunar phases by selecting between new moon amp full moon first quarter amp third quarter etc Digital input You can specify a condition based on the current state of an MSC s TPC with TPC RIO s or Remote Device s digital input Leave the Device as Local to check an MSC s or TPC with TPC RIO s input or choose a RIO Select the input number and whether it is active high or low select low for contact closure Note that if you have more than one RIO of the same type with the same address then the cond
136. ction and this relationship is modified over time to cre ate a ripple More colours than just red So far we have just been creating red effects but there are more colours than red so why should we stick with that We will modify the vertical band example to show how different colours can be created For this example we introduce the built in function hsi_to_rgb which converts an HSI hue saturation intensity colour into an RGB red green blue colour Listing 7 width of the bands in pixels band width 4 space between bands in pixels band spacing 1 get the combined width of band and separator local total band width band widthtband spacing get the number of visible bands local bands width total band width modulo operator ab function mod a b return a math floor a b b end rainbow lookup function rainbow hue return asa Go rgo hiertmathspPpi 2 151 end the pixel function function pixel frame x y if mod x total band width gt band width then A band Separator recur 0 00 end 230 Custom Preset Programming Guide get the band in which this pixel falls local band math floor x total band width get the fraction through the effect local t frame frames get the height of the band in which this pixel falls local band height math sin band bands t math p1 2 41 72 adjust y to be relative to the center of the effect y ve Neon 2
137. ctions that use variables _ 1 2 22 2 2 o cece ec cee ce cee ne 125 Start Release Toggle Resume and Pause Timeline 0 02 02 022 22 e cece eee eee cece ee 125 Set Increase and Decrease Intensity 0 02 02 o eee ce eee cee cee cece eee eee eeeeeee 126 Set AVC Master ee ee ee ee ee PRC dao eT 126 SEFUE ROB hla eh ie cate eee tpn ie ec a patency a a o tien that a a tat 126 ON AA A tee ease 126 Recall DALI Scene sc e na lade dd e aa aa eo ed O A aaa 126 DALLC OMMAN A A are Aaa A E A 126 Mark DALI Ballast Fixed 000 022 eee cnn 126 DALI Start Emergency Test s 22sa205 scscse bso ice Lavan acd cade cunceus uooiieaen ede dia ee dee once 126 DALI Stop Emergency Test 00 02 ccoo 127 Set Timeline Rate aa 127 Serial and Ethernet Output 22 2222 e eee cece eee ee eee seeeeeeeeees 127 MIDO peace nee ese ote ee Nant On Ae er ee ee a fs te ONTO ee eC RON On er eRe 127 PRU OCR acc set tot II IN ee Be hes ates 128 Se BPSBUHRONLE aac es eaten a e e e ai ica 128 FIC AC OM A SA 128 NOS Sa ee ae a es ye Oe eee a 128 CA A 129 Simulator modes nacos 129 MANITOU AS Mode oo tencia tias et 129 POCO OCS tata a ati fle ee ata e led de is 129 SIMULATOR GON ONS 3 senso ols ate a aa ah a as hans Nala es ie Yh Na 129 U SIA E ne Se el ere een ee ere ed erecta ee 129 Skip backwards amp forwards 22 22 cece c cece cece cece nn 130 A A a hehe tt ee acts ie i Pe gd ee eee ee 130 Rate fader sta ss
138. d 1 id 1 3 5 id 1 5 id 1 3 5 8 10 Sample Response lt response gt lt timeline id 1 gt lt name gt My First Timeline lt name gt lt length gt P00H30M00 00S lt length gt lt timeSource gt lt type gt Timecode lt type gt lt bus gt 2 lt bus gt 246 Optional defaults to ALL lt timeSource gt lt timeOffset gt POOHOOMO00 00S lt timeOffset gt lt timeFormat gt SMPTE30 lt timeFormat gt lt timeline gt lt Cimeline 1d 3 gt lt timeline gt lt response gt Get Timeline Statuses Gets the current status of timelines in the project id is the timeline number e Command timelineStatus e Args id 1 id 1 3 5 id 1 5 id 1 3 5 8 10 optional Sample Response lt response gt lt timelineStatus id 1 gt lt playState gt Running lt playState gt lt position gt P00H1L4M03 50S lt position gt lt onStage gt true lt onStage gt lt timelineStatus gt lt timelineStatus id 3 gt lt playState gt Released lt playState gt lt timelineStatus gt lt response gt Notes Valid values for lt playState gt are Running Halted Held at end Released Idle Get Text Slots Get a list of text slots in the project along with their current values e Command textSlot e Args slot name optional defaults to ALL Sample Response lt response gt Web server query interface defaults to ALL 247 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual lt textslot n
139. d Ctrl while clicking to select multiple fixtures Setup DALI amp Mover or presets Program Hold Shift while clicking to select ranges of fixtures Setup DALI amp Mover Hold Ctrl while dragging a preset on a timeline to snap to the start end of other placed presets Program or while dragging a fixture selection to copy the selection using the same relative layout Setup Hold Shift while dragging a preset on a timeline for finer resolution Program or while dragging a fixture selection to invert the Snap To Grid behaviour Setup Select all fixtures Setup DALI amp Mover or presets Program New project 24 Keyboard shortcuts e Cti O Open project e Ctrl S Save project Export project exports the project including media amp plan background image for trans ee fer or backup purposes e Ctrl U Upload to the Controller s e Ctrl shift U Save Snapshots e Ctrl Q Quit the Designer application e Spacebar Start or pause the simulator o F Drops a flag in learn timing mode Notes for Mac OS X users Unison Mosaic Designer makes a good deal of use of the two button mouse with right click being used to invoke context sensitive dialogs As the majority of Mac users have only a single button mouse they must hold Ctrl while clicking to get this functionality In most cases Macs use the Apple key instead of the Ctrl key except for moving between timelines in the Program tab where Ctrl is used due
140. d must be mapped to real DALI interfaces and ballasts using this window Once you have discovered and addressed all the real DALI ballasts for each interface if more than one you can then patch your DALI fixtures to them simply by dragging them from the Unpatched DALI group onto the required interface and address cell As each DALI interface is assigned DALI fixtures the Browser refreshes to reflect these changes The Unpatched DALI group will become empty once all the DALI fixtures in the project have been patched It is of course possible to patch your DALI fixtures blind in advance of being connected to the real ballasts The patch is stored with the project data and not on the DALI ballasts DALI groups Unlike other groups in Designer DALI groups are a property of the real DALI interface not an abstract collection of fixtures and there can only be 16 DALI groups per interface The matrix on the lower pane of the window allows you to add and define groups for each interface To add a DALI group 1 Press the Add button 2 Type a name by double clicking the name cell 56 DALI 3 Select which ballasts are to be a member by double clicking the ballast s cell The DALI group is added to the Browser and group configuration data ready to be into the ballasts To delete a DALI group 1 Right click on the group in the Browser 2 Select Delete 3 Press Ok to confirm The DALI group is removed and the group configuration data
141. determined by each fixture s library definition that will set parameters to sensible home positions for example pan and tilt to midway irises and gobo colour flags to open white 2 The output will respond to the latest preset activated regardless of the preset data so a preset pro grammed to black will override a colour 3 When a preset expires or is explicitly released the output will revert to the prior state which may be an over ridden preset if any or the default state 4 Fixture parameters are grouped by kind Intensity Colour Beam Image Beam Shape Position amp Control and so preset programming and thus precedent operates at this level multiple presets can thus be responsible for the output of a fixture with multiple parameter kinds e g a moving light or conventional fix ture with a scroller Since the Controllers can run multiple timelines simultaneously then some consideration should be given as to how best structure the project This is particularly important if the project calls for random triggering of timelines for example from a Button Panel Station BPS since there is no way of Knowing in advance what state the out put will be in i e which timelines have already been triggered when a new timeline triggered This interaction of timelines can yield unexpected results unless care is taken when programming 96 Trigger Overview Trigger Overview The Trigger window is used to connect your time
142. e Fixture Parameters pane and it is here that parameters other than intensity and colour mixing are set Parameter kinds Parameters are grouped by kind Intensity Parameters excluding intensity which is programmed directly on the timeline such as strobe Position Pan and tilt Colour Parameters excluding colour mixing which is programmed directly on the timeline such as fixed colour wheels and scrollers colour correction Beam Image Gobo and effects wheels Beam Shape Iris zoom and focus etc Control Lamp and fixture controls such as dowse strike reset and macros Setting one parameter within a kind sets or touches all the rest the kind heading will turn blue and the Knockout button will be enabled to indicate that programming for this kind is included in the preset 2 To remove programming press the Knockout button to the right of the kind heading to untouch these para meters 60 Mover Effects A realtime effect can also be applied to any parameter by pressing the associated FX button which opens the effect controls for adjustment pressing FX again turns off that effect Effects work by modulating the programmed base value with a low frequency oscillator LFO e Effect the shape of the LFO s waveform Square Triangle Sawtooth Sine or Cosine e Size the amplitude of the modulation adjust in conjunction with the base value e Period the number of seconds over which the waveform will repeat
143. e use the configuration pane to select which timeline Toggle Timeline Starts a timeline if it s not running or releases the timeline if it is Il Pause Timeline Pauses a timeline at its current position effects and media will also freeze use the configuration pane to select which timeline 102 Triggers Basic Il Pause All Pauses all timelines at their current position effects and media will also freeze Il Resume Timeline Resumes playback of a paused timeline from its current position use the configuration pane to select which timeline Il Resume All Resumes playback of all paused timelines from their current positions a Release All Timelines Releases all output use the configuration pane to set a release fade time Set Intensity Sets the intensity of a group of fixtures use the configuration pane to select the group intensity level fade and delay times Because the MSCs are genuine lighting controllers as opposed to DMX framestore devices realtime control of intensity is available at all times as it would be on a sophisticated lighting console You can control the intensity of one or more groups of fixtures regardless of what timeline s they may be running You can think of each group as having its own intensity fader which this action allows you to move between 100 default and 0 You can specify which group to affect and the new position for the fader It is sometimes useful to s
144. e available e Repeat the repeat style None Sawtooth Triangle e Count the number of repeats e Angle the angle in degrees of the gradient Linear Conical amp Bilinear only If the type is Noise e Seed the seed of the pseudo random noise copying this value to another preset will create the same noise e Randomise picks a new seed If the type is Perlin Noise 76 Program Preset types amp properties e Seed the seed of the pseudo random noise copying this value to another preset will create the same noise Randomise picks a new seed X the horizontal scale higher numbers will produce more variation horizontally Y the vertical scale higher numbers will produce more variation vertically Depth the coarseness of the noise gt Starfield Renders a radiating star field e Space Colour the colour of the background e Star Colour the colour of the stars e Speed the speed of the stars e Star Count the number of stars to show LC 2D colour on colour Renders a dynamic pulse of colour over another colour on a matrix e Base Colour the base colour e Top colour the colour of the pulse e Transparency select Opaque for none Base or Top Transparent to superimpose the effect onto other pro gramming Period the number of seconds that the sequence takes to complete Count the number of times that the sequence should complete over the length of the preset Type the type of pulse L
145. e bootloader and firmware versions are also given For the MSC X only particular attention should be paid to the temperature readings insufficient ventilation may cause the ambient temperature to rise and thus system amp CPU temperatures to reach excessive levels degrad ing performance 166 Web interface Default pages Project Status TE presos SCT Foyer LPC Status gt Mngilla Pretax aaka pe DE Mes Pai at u g AL ie i gt pe PL DO det i tee ag IN A Timelines Hare Time Statue a Groups Mame Level The status page provides feedback on the current state of playback Timelines All timelines are listed with their current state and running time Inactive the timeline has not run since the last reset Running The timeline is running and contributing to the output items on stage The timeline is running in the background and not contributing to the output generally Running Inactive because it has been overridden Halted The timeline is halted and contributing to the output Halted Inactive The timeline is halted in the background and not contributing to the output Holding at End The timeline is holding at end and contributing to the output Holding at End Inactive The timeline is holding at end in the background and not contributing to the output Released Inactive the timeline has run but has been explicitly released In systems with more than one Controller it is important to understand tha
146. e going to be changed each year then keeping them in a separate file min imises what has to be changed We would then also have a realtime trigger that fires every minute and runs the script heck if Our Index Variable 25 1nittialised tf not A then h 0 end make sure we don t run off the end of the table while Kigh tidesL A gt cdo compare the current time against table year realtime year be Nge tides throl 2 year then not yet reached this entry return elseif bigh tides 1 5 year then month realtime month if MALA Eres AS A month ten not yet reached this entry return elser high tades nolL gt Mont then day realtime monthday E niga tides Tota 2 day then not yet reached this entry return elseif high tides h 5 2 day then 224 Trigger Programming Guide hour realtime hour if high tides i s 3 gt hour tien not yet reached this entry return elsezlL high tiudes 1 3 3 hour then minute realtime minute if high tides h s 74 gt minute then not yet reached this entry return elseir Migh tides M 5 41 gt min te then TOUNG a match start timeline 1 h h 1 retura end end end end end not yet reached this entryController h h 1 end This may look rather dense and scary but on closer inspection you ll see that it is just a lot of if tests nested inside each other to check each part of the date and time against the data
147. e over the length of the preset Offset Style choose None all elements are the same colour or Spread the sequence is spread over space as well as time Fade the fade time in seconds between each colour in the sequence Hold the time that each colour in the sequence is not fading Steps the number of steps in the sequence Seed the seed of the pseudo random sequence copying this value to another preset will create the same random sequence Randomise picks a new seed Ln Rainbow effect Renders a dynamic rainbow effect cycling through hue Colour specifies the start colour of the rainbow the saturation and intensity are maintained throughout the cycle Period the number of seconds that the rainbow takes to complete one cycle Count the number of times that the rainbow should cycle over the length of the preset Reverse Colour reverses the direction around the hue circle default unchecked is clockwise Offset Style Choose None all elements are the same colour Spread the rainbow is spread over space as well as time or One Shot as None but will stop after one cycle of the hue circle Reverse Direction if Offset Style is Spread reverse the direction of the spread in space Repeat the number of elements between the start and end of the hue circle Buddy the number of elements that will be set to the same colour in the rainbow if Buddy is greater than 1 the number of elements that are repeated over is Repeat
148. e the pixel func tion is called for the first time Animation Filling every frame of an animation with a single colour is not very exciting so we can use the frame argument to change the colour of a given pixel x y based on the current frame Here is an example Listing 4 function pixel frame x y 1f x lt frame then TSTUEN 255 040 else Ft ULA 000 end end This creates a red horizontal wipe advancing 1 pixel towards the right for each frame You may have noted that once the wipe reaches the right side of the frame the whole frame stays red for a period of time before the anim ation loops back to the beginning This is because the number of frames exceeded the number of pixels across the frame Ideally we want our effects to loop seamlessly To do this we introduce three global variables that have been already been defined for you e frames the total number of frames in the animation e width the width of the animation in pixels e height the height of the animation in pixels We can rewrite Listing 4 as follows 228 Custom Preset Programming Guide Listing 5 function pixel frame x y calculate the progress through the animation local t frame frames compare the fraction across the effect with the animation pro gress if x width lt t then reuulrin Zoo 00 else Perum OO 70 end end Now once the red wipe reaches the right side of the frame it immediately jumps back to the start Re
149. e this if you want to play a brief clip over the top of that running on the main row and you do not want to stop and restart the main clip e Luma Key will selectively superimpose parts of the effects clip based on the intensity or luma of the images You can control the intensity threshold by setting the min and max values between 0 and 255 Over the range from min to max the two clips will be blended to make for a more seamless effect You can then choose whether to superimpose the image from the effects clip directly or to superimpose a fixed col our of your choice e PIP allows you to play the effects clip as a picture in picture The picture in picture image will always be scaled down by half but you can choose exactly where on screen to place the window using the X Pos ition amp Y Position settings You can then choose whether to reduce the size of the window perhaps to remove an unsightly border and locate the image within the window using the X Offset amp Y Offset set tings The Correct aspect ratio option is an advanced setting that can be used when the content being shown within the PIP does not match the aspect ratio of the screen when enabled it will scale the content so that it looks visually correct H Ove rlay Used for dynamic text E Audio Mixer Used to override the audio levels The default audio behaviour is to use the audio from the current clip playing on the main row with the audio crossfading with the video
150. e to examine the status of the Controller s digital inputs DALI CSV Export This information can be viewed in a comma separated values file by clicking the Save button Copy paste and save the information you require in a separate document 170 Web interface Default pages Home Project Status Log Output Input DALI Contral Configuration Logout DALI Monitoring Interface 1 sme Emergency Test Schedule Has Funedan Tel Spl er 202015 120000 Maxi Durason Tes Sun Jan 26 2049 09 0200 Prowious Funcion Tesi Precis Duradon Tagi DALI Bus Pesar pame 0 00h 165 Emergency Ballast Errors Mo ballast emoa Ballast Status Addresa Nama Sirius Level Batiery Lamp emnngency Lamp boi 1 Emergency Lobby OF 0 Crirged Shaun 572 our 2 Emargencr Lounge OK OM Crarged hours 56d Puri 3 Emarngency Tode OK 0 Charged 6 hour Shh hours 4 Dak Ballast 1 Ave Peras Oi 100 A Dak Balas 2 ER 0 5 Dal Balas 3 der Por Ce 100 Dal Haligi al AE Ports Ln 63 5 Dal Balasi 5 Ave Peewee On der Parier Outside Limi A 3 Dal Balas t Aft P t On Ac Paneb Cua Limia 8 10 Dal Balls 7 Ave Pera CA 100 Dab Ballast 8 Arc Pree On 100 13 Dal Balas OH os 13 Dak Ballast 10 Communicaton Error Wasi Recent Power Failures Mo renani pones Fallos Emergency Test Schedule Only populated if the current interface has emergency ballasts present View information about when Emergency Ballast tests are due to take place as well as the time and date of previous
151. e two players avail able the AVC will automatically replace any timed transitions with snap transitions so that it does not exceed the player limit Data storage The AVC uses its memory card much more aggressively than the other Controllers and best performance requires the memory card be formatted in a particular way It is therefore recommended that you format the memory card either from within Designer Controller config or the AVC s web interface when starting a fresh pro ject or inserting a new card 93 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Timing transitions amp precedent It is often said that good lighting as much about timing as anything else so it is important to understand the con cepts of timing and transitions used throughout Designer Timing Start 0 00 End 1 00 00 Length 1 00 00 Trarnisiion Fade 2 00 Release 200 Skew Type Hone Skew Direction F Repeat Al 2 Buddy 1 Path Defsull a Timing Timing values pertain to presets placed on timelines and determine the Start End and Length times and may be numerically set as an alternative to dragging Transition timing Transition values pertain to Mover preset defaults and presets placed on timelines and determine what sort of cross fade is rendered The use of interesting transitions can transform your project so it is well worth spending some time experimenting to see what can be achieved using these properties Fade Sets the overall length of the transition d
152. ealtime or astronomical triggers then when the Controller starts up you may well want to assert the correct show state for the current time You can set each Controller to do this automatically by check ing the Execute realtime triggers on startup option When this option is selected the Controller will execute all the realtime and astronomical triggers that would have fired between the user specified time and the current time You should select a time of day when your project is inactive or at its least active Running all triggers from that point ensures that your project is in the correct state Any startup trigger in your project will run first and then any pending realtime or astronomical triggers The Con troller will attempt to preserve the timing so that timelines will be in the correct place as if it had been running nor mally IMPORTANT Changes made to a Controller s properties will only take effect after an upload 150 Network Controller protocols Network Controller protocols With a Controller selected choose the Protocols tab which is also available from the window CONFIGURE SELECTED CONTROLLER Depending on the Controller type selected the Protocols tab allows you to configure the available eDMX and other output protocols Network 2 Protocol TPC revised MSC 1 2 amp 4 Though the TPC and MSC 1 2 amp 4 revised hardware only have a single Ethernet port this port may be con figured with
153. ecedent system determines what should be rendered and output as presets come and go over time it is the order of the rows that determines what should be rendered and output should two or more presets with fixtures in common start simultaneously with rows higher up the list taking precedent For example a fixture may be a member of two groups with a preset applied to both starting at the same time In this case the fixture will render the preset for the group higher up the list Groups can be reordered in the browser simply by dragging them to new positions Accordingly simultaneous presets placed on groups and fixtures have a higher priority than presets placed on matrices Browser controls and feedback The Browser toolbar provides controls for expanding and collapsing groups and compound fixtures as well as high lighting rows with programming The Browser provides useful feedback as to which rows contain programming elements fixtures and groups will be displayed in blue compound fixture or group headings will indicate the pres ence of any programming on members even when collapsed fs Expand all Expands all compound fixtures and groups so that all element pixel rows are displayed Items with programming will be shown in blue 83 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual E Expand all groups Expands only groups so that all fixture rows are displayed Items with any programming even on a concealed member will be shown in blue
154. ect the relevant Variable option and then choose the variable index AA DALI Start Emergency Test The DALI ballast address on a specific interface can be passed in by variable Select the relevant Variable option and then choose the variable index 126 Triggers Variables A DALI Stop Emergency Test The DALI ballast address on a specific interface can be passed in by variable Select the relevant Variable option and then choose the variable index Y Set Timeline Rate You can select the timeline to modify with a variable as for Start Timeline You can also choose to pass in the rate percentage using a variable ig Serial and MEthernet Output In the same way that you can use wildcards to match data in a serial or Ethernet trigger you can insert the value of captured variables into your serial output messages The same wildcard types are supported to define how to output a variable lt c gt Will output the value of a variable as a raw byte 0 255 lt d gt Will output the value of a variable as a decimal number ASCII 0 9 ES Will output the value of a variable as a hexadecimal number ASCII 0 f Any letters will be lowercase lt X gt Will output the value of a variable as a hexadecimal number ASCII 0 f Any letters will be uppercase PrE Will output a captured string lt s gt will output the entire captured string lt 4s gt would output the first 4 characters of the captured string As
155. ed from its library definition losing local changes and thus restoring it to its defaults This is useful for updating fixtures on the plan with any library definition edits forcing a redraw Local changes to a fixture s geometry Shape size will be overwritten Highlight Patched Status On the toolbar use the Show patched on pull down to select a Controller and then press Highlight to highlight the fixtures that are patched to that Controller Select None instead of a Controller to highlight unpatched fixtures Press Highlight again to turn it off 37 s Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Selecting fixtures There are various ways of selecting fixtures which are common to all windows so it is worth covering them now Browser The Browser is the most powerful and flexible method of selecting fixtures Click on a group heading to select all fixtures within the group expand a group by clicking on the plus sign and click on fixtures within to select indi vidual fixtures and with compound fixtures expand them to select the individual pixels within Fixtures and pixels are shown in red when selected Hold down Shift while clicking to select all contiguous groups fixtures pixels between clicks and hold down Ctrl Apple on Mac while clicking to select multiple non contiguous individual groups fixtures pixels Hold down Ctrl Apple while clicking to deselect a selected group fixture pixel Pressing Esc or clicking in space anywhere
156. ed from the control key string will be stored in subsequent variables The default settings for the Set Fixture RGB action use variables 1 2 and 3to 114 Triggers TPC triggers set red green and blue so coupling the TPC Colour Change trigger with the Set Fixture RGB action requires very little configuration dh TPC Keypad Code When the Enter key on a keypad is pressed triggers of this type will be checked for a match Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Keypad drop down list from the Touch Editor project see Con troller Properties The Keypad field should be set to the Control Key of the keypad you re interested in this is a property of keypads that is set in Touch Editor Either pick a control key from the list or type it in You can use one trigger to respond to multiple keypads by using variables the syntax is the same as for Serial and Ethernet Input triggers e g keypad lt 3d gt will match a keypad with the control key keypad001 or keypad002 etc and capture the number as a variable See actions that use variables for how to make use of the captured variables The code entered into the keypad will be captured as a variable The keypad code will always be the first variable any variables captured from the control key string will be stored in subsequent variables E TPC Page Change Whenever the current page of a TPC user interface is changed triggers of this type will be checked
157. een video and audio If the audio and video can run independently e g audio is a music track of a dif ferent length to the video then make sure audio synced is not selected and they will loop independently Custom Presets Select the Custom tab Custom presets can only be played on MSC Pixel Matrices Custom Presets use a Lua script to define an effect that can be played back on a Matrix You can use this to cre ate effects that are not available as standard in Designer 65 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual To create a new Custom Preset press Create New in the Custom tab on the right This will open a script editor dialog Tai Tarr a aki e E mil haj E E The source editor initially shows the framework of a custom preset You can either enter the source yourself or you can load the source from a file using File gt Import Designer provides sample scripts which are located in Pro gram Files at ETC Mosaic Designer resources scripts custom_presets After editing or importing a script you compile it by pressing F7 If there are any errors in the script they will be reported in the Output tab If there are no errors reported it is advisable to run the script to preview the preset To run the script use Debug gt Run F5 If the script takes a long time to run or appears to have got stuck in a loop use Debug gt Stop Ctrl F5 to stop execution IMPORTANT When working in the script editor if your script does
158. efault value is 2 seconds Release Sets the time used for a preset to release its fixtures when it completes default value is 2 seconds Path Specifies the cross fade path default is Default meaning that each pixel or parameter will use the library default path or Dimmer Curve if specified typically Linear for intensity position and Start for colour gobo wheels Some interesting additional paths are provided for your delectation Transition skews Group amp Mover presets 1D Skew Type Various different skews can be selected to alter how individual fixtures and pixels within fixtures in the case of compound fixtures such as battens and tiles behave within the fade default is None which means that all fix tures pixels fade together Use skews to create multi part fades so that fixtures pixels fly in one by one for example set to Individually you may have to increase the fade time to clearly perceive the skew especially with lots of fixtures pixels 94 Timing transitions amp precedent Direction The ordering of a skewed transition depends on the fixture pixel ordering within the group The Skew Direction drop down provides further ordering options such as Forwards and Backwards for additional flexibility Additional groups can be created with different fixture pixel ordering to achieve other skewed effects Repeat Specifies the number of adjacent fixtures pixels over which a skewed transition is appl
159. em These may be MIDI timecode MTC sources input via one or more MSCs or RIO As MIDI Inputs or lin ear timecode LTC sources input via one or more RIO As or LTC Expansion Modules You can use the Timecode Viewer available from the View menu to monitor each Timecode Bus 68 Program Timeline Properties Timecode Viewer ex Timecode Source w Format Unknown nn a hh Mi Ce CIE 114912 Working with audio By selecting one of the four Audio Buses the properties pane will give further options Timeline Properties Name Red Humbe 1 Length 500 00 Proy Normal a Time Source Audo Source 1 ae Band Lowest Band The Audio Expansion Module generates five frequency bands 63Hz 250Hz 1KHz 3 5KHz and 12KHz and the RIO A can generate up to 30 frequency bands configured in Remote Device properties Use this pull down to select which band will drive the timeline Audio Buses The four Audio Buses are internal buses to which one patches the external audio sources available to the system via one or more RIO As or Audio Expansion Modules You can use the Audio Feedback window available from the View menu to monitor each Audio Bus Audio Feedback Max 69 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Changing the timeline amp preset defaults Use Options gt Preferences on the main toolbar and select the Timelines tab to change these defaults Here you can change the default timeline name and length as well as the le
160. em wide then inject an appropriate trigger start_timeline num Start timeline with the specified user number rl Stop timeline with the specified user number with optional fade time in stop_timeline num time seconds halt_timeline num Halt timeline with the specified user number resume_timeline num Resume timeline with the specified user number stop_all Stop all timelines Timecode control local to this Controller Enable or disable a timecode source source is one of TCODE 1 TCODE 2 TECODE 3 CODE 4 TCODE 5 TCODE 6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 enabled assumed true if not specified Set the current timecode source for a timeline source is one set_timecode_source timeline_num source off of DEFAULT TCODE 1 TCODE 2 TCODE 3 TCODE 4 set_timecode_source_enabled source enabled set TCODE 5 TCODE 6 offset in msecs assumed 0 if not spe cified Set the current audio source for a timeline source is one of set timecode_source timeline_num source AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 band can be any band channel peak number or VOLUME channel is one of LEFT RIGHT COMBINED peak is optional assumed false if not specified Fixture control local to this Controller A script can directly control fixtures as if it was a high priority timeline It can only control fixtures local to the Con troller on which the script is running It can also only control whole fixtures there is no access to individual ele
161. emote Device firmware IMPORTANT Remote Device firmware may need to be updated if a new version of Designer software has been installed Devices with incompatible firmware will be highlighted in red To update a Remote Device s firmware 1 Select the incompatible device by pressing the left hand button the row will be highlighted 2 Press Reload Firmware on the Remote Device toolbar 3 The firmware update will proceed you must not disturb this process Associating Remote Devices Unlike Controllers which are uniquely associated with a project via their serial number Remote Devices are associated by their address as selected on the unit itself Fifteen automatic addresses 1 gt 15 are provided with a manual option M for selecting more 16 gt 100 Remote devices may share the same address and thus identity useful for repeating a user interface at both ends of a corridor for example To associate a project Remote Device with a real device automatic addresses 1 gt 15 1 Select the project Remote Device by clicking the left hand button the row will highlight Ensure that the device type and address matches a suitable unit addressed at this number found on the network 3 The real device will move from the Unused list and fuse with the project device so completing the row details To associate a project Remote Device with a real device manual addresses 16 gt 100 1 Ensure that the Remote Device is addressed to the M setting yo
162. en it will be true as long as the entry has some value even if the value is zero and false if there is no value there at all Functions Within script there are a whole range of pre defined operations that you can call when writing your own scripts Some of these are provided by the Lua language and are fully described in its documentation Others have been provided by ETC to allow you to interact with the Controller from script and are fully described in the manual They are all called functions and accessed using a similar syntax For example x math random 1 100 This will assign variable x a value that is a random number between 1 and 100 The function math random is a standard function provided by Lua and we can control its behaviour by passing in an argument in this case the values 1 and 100 to tell it the range within which we want our random number to fall t 0 217 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual start timeline start timeline is one of the functions provided by ETC and it will start the timeline with the number passed in as an argument It is also possible to define your own functions as part of script You might do this if there is a block of script that you know you will need to reuse in a lot of different places It will be much easier to write the script in one place and then call it from wherever you need it FUNCTION Gite ta D if a gt b then return a p else return b a end end vl
163. ent settings of the selected Controller s realtime clock Only the des ignated Time Server need be accurate as any other networked controllers will automatically synchronize their real time clocks to the Time Server Note that the project location settings include the correct GMT offset so if using these location settings you should set the time here to GMT not local time or the offset will be doubled To change manually the Time Server s date and time 1 Select the designated Time Server 2 Enter the required settings into the Date and Time fields 3 Press Set To synchronize the Time Server s date and time to Designer 1 Select the designated Time Server 2 Ensure that the PC running Designer is set to the correct date and time 3 Press Sync to Designer Memory Card The capacity of the Controller s memory card is displayed here with the option to format the card if required press Format Memory Card Formatting the card will erase all project data and so an upload will be required to restore normal operation Since the AVC uses the card aggressively best performance requires the memory card be formatted in a par ticular way It is therefore recommended that you format the memory card when starting a fresh AVC project or when inserting a new card Storing configuration settings on the memory card optional After a reset MSCs look for a file called MSC cfg on the memory card before using its current settings TPCs look
164. eographic loc ation of the installation See Setup reference Patch F2 In Patch the fixtures are assigned to the connected Controllers see Network and given DMX universes and addresses This step can be skipped during design and only completed during installation See Patch reference DALI F3 In DALI you patch and define DALI groups amp scenes for any DALI ballasts in the project Unlike DMX fixtures these definitions are stored in the DALI ballasts themselves and so the configuration must be uploaded sep arately from here See DALI reference Mover F4 In Mover you program presets for any automated lights with position or beam manipulation controls These pre sets can then be placed onto timelines along with other programming See Mover reference Media F5 Media allows you to create virtual video screens and map fixtures to pixels of the screen Here you also import and manage the media files either static images or video which can then be played back on these screens and any audio visual fixtures in the project See Media reference Program F6 Program is where you create and edit the timelines that make up your presentation Each fixture or group of fix tures is a row of the timeline and you can drag and drop from an extensive range of built in intensity and colour effects as well as placing mover presets and media clips See Program reference Trigger F7 In Triggers you connect your programming with
165. er Manual t Run Script Variables can be accessed from Lua scripts Set BPS Button LED The button number and intensity level can be passed in by variables E Paradigm Action Variables can be passed into the various parameters available Select the relevant Variable option and then choose the variable index Notes e For hex strings if a wildcard is inserted after an odd number of digits the odd digit is treated as the lower 4 bits of the byte For example ff1 lt d gt will be interpreted as ff01 lt d gt e f you want to match a lt character you must precede it with a backslash In general a backslash fol lowed by any character will match that character ignoring the backslash 128 Simulate Simulate The simulator allows you to preview your programming on the plan SIMULATOR CONTROLS PROGRAMMED TRIGGERS The window comprises 3 sections The main portion of the window is your plan Top right are the simulator con trols with time counter and below them any programmed triggers Note that the time counter shows simulated time not real time Simulator modes Timeline mode Use this mode to simulate a single timeline typically the one you are editing Select the timeline and press Start to simulate press Reset to reset the timeline Project mode Use this mode to simulate the whole presentation and verify your trigger programming and timeline interaction Any triggers created will appear on
166. er allow you to expand and collapse the items Collapse all for now Next we will generate Pixel Matrices for applying 2 dimensional colour effects and media presets Drag a box around the LED array to select all fixtures Click on the New Pixel Matrix button above the browser to create a new matrix Rename it LED Matrix Repeat with the moving lights to create another matrix and name it all ML Matrix Click on the Patch tab on the far left hand side of the screen to change to the Patch window Drag each group on to the blank universe to patch all fixtures This step is not essential to program and simulate Creating Media amp Mover presets 1 On Click on the Mover tab at the left to change to the Mover view In the Mover Preset window click on Create New and select the moving lights by dragging a box around them on the plan or click on their group in the browser In the parameter window click on the Position Colour and Beam tabs and choose values for these attrib utes To create a further presets simply leave your current programming and click Create New Click on the Media tab at the left to change to the Media view Select your LED matrix You can move the pixels in relation to each other and resize the array window if desired To import media click on Create New in the Media Preset window The Designer installer provides sample media which is located in the Designer installation directory resources media_samples
167. er only supports one DMX input port so set the DMX In port to be set to 1 the trigger DMX port to 1 Trigger requires the serial port on controller to be set Reconfigure the serial port of the Controller to use to DMX the correct mode see Controller Interfaces Trigger is set to match with controller but that con Reconfigure the DMX input for the Controller see troller has disabled DMX In Controller Interfaces Trigger uses the MIDI In port but controller doesn t Reconfigure the trigger to use a Controller with a have a MIDI In port MIDI In port Reconfigure the trigger with the correct Module num Trigger requires a valid Audio module number ber Reconfigure the trigger with the correct Module num Trigger requires a valid DALI Slave module number Condition will not be tested on controller because the Reconfigure the trigger with a controller that does controller doesn t support digital inputs support digital inputs Condition requires input on controller to be con The Controller s input has been configured incor figured as a digital input or contact closure rectly see Controller Interfaces Condition will not be tested on controller because the l Choose a Controller that does have analog inputs controller doesn t support analog inputs Condition on trigger requires a valid DMX In port num ber Reconfigure the trigger with the correct port number Action
168. es 31 TMOG ZOMG EE ee iua act E EE E ui ceeeuua be dit ant A E E holed ea eacecews 31 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual PAY VTA Saving TIME e e e ee le 31 FOUS AAA A taeda 32 EXA ICONS amp SC alert st es a ola ees eat lee ahem neta on ates Soa ei 32 Populating the pla ooo cece ec cee cee cee ee ccc eee eee ee cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeee 33 GG GETS a o ah a ee gad hh lea pee een ae ee ee ks 33 To duplicate a fixture create an array 12 02 2200 2 022 c cece cece cece cee cece eee cece eeceeeee 33 To copy a fixture or fixture selection 0 00 2202 cece cece cece ec cee cee cee cece cee cece eeeeee 34 To delete a fixture or fixture selection 2 2 22 2 cco c cece eee cece cece eee eeeeceeeeeeeeees 34 To see where a fixture is patched 2 22 2 elec eee eee eee e cece cece ceeceeeeeceseees 34 TO MIG HNGMEA fixture oi 34 DALDI iia oma el o tte ne Ree arn be ul Ud 34 Audio visual AV fixtures 2 2 02 2 202 cece ccc 000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000r eeeeeeeeeees 35 Import fixture plan cee od eek eterna ew aces 35 Expor AUE DIGI vet econ se eee sciteds om tere dees ated torio ali 35 FIX CUPS ICONIC alon ea a 35 Name amp number nr ti Sales ne de ht ae tas eee ets e aoe ol aot es 35 A A es sg A ee ye et oe 35 COMMEN aie cicat uit th tds nor ias nests a ir bata is abit re anne tan cos la Lacio 35 PRUNE OSI UO asx nt tS eee A acre A A E eae 36 Na AAA ea a ayaa am a ae ge ee eet nae eee 36
169. esigner s Simulator select Winamp from the Timecode drop down menu and start your timeline Designer will start Winamp at the same time Adjusting the play head in Designer will adjust the play head in Winamp automatically This feature is only available on Windows Simulating the AVC Simulation for an AVC is shown as a thumbnail image of the main AVC playback It will not currently show text and all transitions are displayed as a dissolve Output Live Output Live is not possible without associated and patched Controllers but this allows you to view the pro gramming on the installation itself without having to upload repeatedly after every iteration The Output Live but ton can also be found on the Mover window to facilitate the programming of the Mover Presets particularly setting the position parameters IMPORTANT Output Live is not possible for the AVC the project must be uploaded Output Live completely overrides the MSC s playback engine with all calculations instead being performed within Designer On large installations with multiple MSCs it may not be desirable to override all of them so it is possible to exclude MSCs from participating in Output Live see Disabling Output Live If you are using the tear off simulator see below then Output Live will let you maintain control of the installation throughout your programming session Tear off simulator The simulator can be permanently opened for display ideally on a second
170. esirable to position the fixtures on the plan as accurately as possible to improve both the accuracy of the pro gramming in particular pixel matrices created automatically from the plan layout and the general neatness of the project and simulation Grid Use the plan properties to set the spacing of the plan s grid whether it is displayed and whether fixtures should snap to it Holding Shift while dragging a fixture selection will invert the snap to grid behaviour Nudge Use the cursor keys to nudge a fixture selection up down left or right by the amount set as the grid spacing Alternatively use the up and down arrows by each of the fixture s position fields Holding Shift while using the cursor keys performs a super nudge of 10x the grid spacing Alignment Fixtures can be aligned to one another by making the selection and entering the value to be shared into the appro priate position field Fixture Configuration This pane allows you to configure the selected fixture s Intensity The fixture s dimmer curve and maximum intensity can be set use the Dimmer Curve pull down to determine the type of cross fade the intensity channel will perform and set a Maximum Intensity level useful for balancing light output DALI DALI ballasts can be configured as allowed for by the DALI standard Min Level 0 gt 254 Max Level 0 gt 254 Power On Level 1 gt 254 and Bus Failure level No change 0 gt 254 The standard specifies a leve
171. ess the button again to reinstate the release D Loop Press the Loop Timeline button to make a timeline loop indefinitely This is useful if you want to loop a sequence of presets Press the button again to remove the loop It s also worth noting that a Timeline Running condition won t detect timelines that are holding at end A Timeline On Stage condition will detect a looping or held at end timeline as long as the timeline is affecting the output of at least one fixture Timeline Started and Timeline Ended triggers will match whenever a looping timeline loops A Timeline Ended trigger will never match a timeline that is holding at end 84 Program Working with timelines NOTE Projects with lots of timelines set to Hold or Loop can eventually overwhelm the Controller s if these timelines are not explicitly released when no longer required A Flags Flags can be dropped onto timelines for use with triggers to create more complex presentations perhaps incor porating remote sensors and conditional logic or triggering show control or AV equipment To set a flag press the Add Trigger Flag button and drop it onto the timeline ruler at the required position Hold down Ctrl Apple while pressing Add Trigger Flag to drop multiple in a single session press the button again to fin ish To move a placed flag drag it along the timeline ruler To remove a placed flag right click on it and select Delete Flag Use the Triggers window
172. et the fader position as a percentage from a variable this permits direct intensity mastering via an input such as serial MIDI or DMX The fade and delay times can also be set from variables The fader modifies the programmed intensity for all fixtures within the group On startup all groups have their faders at 100 Where multiple groups containing the same fixtures have their intensity reduced then the decrease is cumulative Note that if you decrease intensity for one group you can only increase it again by acting on the same group Applying an increase intensity action to a different group will have no effect even if that group contains the same fixtures you would be trying to move a different fader Increase amp Decrease Intensity Increases or decreases the intensity of a group of fixtures use the configuration pane to select the group step size in percent fade and delay times Because the MSCs are genuine lighting controllers as opposed to DMX framestore devices realtime control of intensity is available at all times as it would be on a sophisticated lighting console You can control the intensity of one or more groups of fixtures regardless of what timeline s they may be running You can think of each group as having its own intensity fader which these actions allow you to move between 100 default and 0 You can specify which group to affect and the increment by which to change the fader position It is sometimes usef
173. ets 00 0 2 lec ccc cece ns 80 Contents IOV OU FCS CES te eden de Peat 80 Preset user named uu It ps 80 DADES Scars a Nt here eae Ss Se le ee te a Get a a ae ol 80 DCMICV EL 2 a ei ada 80 Scene user named 2 22 2 cece cee cee eee cee cee eee eee eee eee eee cence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 81 ANG PIES EIS oa cs en hte oats oe tt ae ie Set tha te ys Cea eet aero eee esl 81 US COM RSS eo a a a a tee a a a os dete ete e e de ns 81 Preset user named suede soc tonite Oise be ans ti sead ced teeiden veenedcd toa 81 Program Working with timelines _ 0 0 0 0000 o coco ccc cece cece cee cee cece eee eee eeeeees 82 Creating a timeline a ia e dol 82 Timeline row categories occ cee cee ce eee ee eee cee cee cece cence eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 82 Groups and fixtures 222 2222 ieee cece ns 82 MU ES aa cy eee A IN te ee ed epee ee an ke 83 NIOVENS vs cagscaloesaleletdlo citen risa et eae aes ue tala aplasta elo ces dera e 83 SA A A A E 83 AE A A A A A AAA 83 Timeline TO WIDROMTES 02 A ee ed es ee eee A dG 83 Browser controls and feedback ooooooccccccccccccccccccccocconc nono 83 FX ClO aa gs a Se le eee ba as ce a et 83 Dan groups A ons ae eh een A A ease 84 Collapse all tcs a Sen ee eee ale sh ede aaa eee a OD te 84 a OMNIS CN etapa eA age ate chee a tee gehen a 84 Selecting timelines 3 22 3 soy a id 84 COPYING TIMECIINGS 2252 sis en don eae ts Os ht Ute ail oe Sons a tat ne hs ES 84 Boi E a rnn 84 Maintain
174. eware that timelines set to loop will repeatedly run any placed DALI presets and thus reissue these commands until the timeline is released TIP It may be simpler to separate DALI programming onto dedicated timelines and use triggers to synchronize them to the other fixture programming Copying presets Presets can be copied right click gt Copy from one row and pasted right click gt Paste onto another or later on the same row this helps speed up the process of applying programming from one set of fixtures onto another preset parameters timing and transitions will all be copied Note that copying presets in this way creates brand new instances of presets that operate independently of each other TIP Hold Shift while selecting Paste to place the copy with finer resolution centisecond Linking presets If however you want to add more fixtures to an existing preset so as to operate on them all as one then drag the top or bottom edge of that preset up or down to include more rows of fixtures this operation creates a linked pre set Note that any skewed timing or effects within the preset will now be rendered over the new larger fixture selection use Repeat to compensate if required A linked preset can be unlinked if desired by using right click gt Unlink to yield separate identical instances Mover presets can not be linked since the fixture selection is a property of the preset itself Deleting presets Presets can be deleted b
175. example easiest with the simulator paused You can also make the simulator jump when running or paused by just clicking on the ruler at the required target time very useful for getting and keeping the simulator in an area of interest particularly with long timelines Testing trigger variables Any triggers which capture variables have a widget that allows values to be tested These variables take the form of a comma separated list and can either be numbers or text strings Text strings should be bounded with double quotes For example entering 100 50 ABC 100 would inject variable indices 1 gt 4 with the values 100 number 50 number ABC text and 100 text Testing trigger conditions Conditions are not tested by the simulator Simulating timecode By default for any timeline that has been set to use a timecode source see timeline properties the simulator will emulate the timecode If however a Controller is connected and receiving real timecode then the simulator can instead be made to track this real timecode by selecting Time Source from the Timecode drop down menu 130 Simulate Simulating with audio If you need to simulate a timeline that will play in sync with an audio track in your final presentation then you can use Winamp to play the audio file and control the playback using Designer To use this feature you must first enable it in Preferences Start Winamp and cue up your audio track In D
176. f a pixel For example if width and height were equal to 5 the center of the frame is the center of the pixel at coordinate 2 2 but calling dist 2 2 width 2 height 2 will return 0 707 which is the distance between the top left of pixel 2 2 and its center Calling dist from center 2 2 where width and height are equal to 5 will return 0 print message Prints message in the debugger s Output window You are advised to remove calls to this function when you have finished debugging because it will allow the script to run faster when used in programming rgb to Asi Led gqreen plus Converts an RGB red green blue colour to an HSI hue saturation intensity colour red green and blue are in the range 0 255 Returns three numbers hue is in 0 2Pl radian saturation and intensity are in the range 0 1 RSi to rob hue satutationy ntensity Converts an HSI hue saturation intensity colour into an RGB red green blue colour hue is in 0 2P I radi ans saturation and intensity are in the range 0 1 Returns three numbers in the range 0 255 239 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual TPC learning infrared receiver The TPC may be taught to recognise up to 16 different infrared IR codes from a standard IR remote control When a key on the remote control is pressed during normal operation the TPC will react as though one of its user interface controls has been touched The TPC does not have to be pa
177. fixtures and groups using the fixture ordering as set in the Browser to determine how they are rendered and in what order the fixtures will transition They are akin to the sort of programming effects and cue timing that is available on moving light consoles Fixed colour The most basic preset renders a static colour fill Use the colour picker user palette or text entry fields RGB or HSI to select the colour E da Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual A Colour fan Renders a static multi colour gradient over a group of fixtures To change a colour press on the coloured button select a colour and press Ok To move a colour click and drag the coloured button To add a new colour click anywhere on the slider where there is no button To remove a colour right click on the coloured button Repeat the number of elements between the start and end of the fan Buddy the number of elements that will be set to the same colour in the fan if Buddy is greater than 1 the number of elements that are repeated over is Repeat multiplied by Buddy iil Random colour Renders a dynamic chase through a random sequence of colours Colour specifies the first colour of the sequence all subsequent colours are relative to the start colour in a pseudo random way saturation and intensity levels are maintained e Period the number of seconds that the sequence takes to complete Count the number of times that the sequence should complet
178. for a file called TPC cfg You can use a text editor e g Notepad to create this file and copy it to the memory card to force the issue useful for transferring the IP settings on the card with the project data The format of the file needs to be ip 192 168 42 56 255 255 255 0 192 168 42 250 ntp 192 168 42 1 syslog 192 168 42 8 loglevel 3 The first line is the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway The other lines are optional and define the NTP and SYSLOG IP addresses and the LOGLEVEL setting 147 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Using the TPC cfg or MSC cfg file to store the Controller s configuration on the memory card allows a Controller to be swapped in case of failure for example by just moving the memory card into another Controller 148 Network Controller properties Network Controller properties With a Controller selected choose the Controller Properties tab CONFIGURE SELECTED CONTROLLER Identification Use these fields to identify a project Controller with a name and type then associate it with a real Controller and set the Time Server see Screen TPC User interfaces for the TPC are created using the companion Touch Editor application which is available to down load from our website Browse to the Touch Editor project file to associate it with the selected TPC Changes to the Touch Editor project file will automatically be detected To remove the current Touch Editor
179. for further details AVC Presets Select the AVC tab AVC presets can only be played on AVCs see Working with the Audio Visual Controller You must prepare the video and audio clips you want to use on the AVC in this pane To add a new clip click Create New and browse to a suitable media file containing video audio or both Should the media file s subsequently be moved renamed or deleted such that the preset path s no longer valid then a warning icon will be displayed over the thumbnail Designer can import a wide variety of video formats and convert them into the video format used on the AVC However the AVC format is based on MPEG2 and for best quality results and fastest conversion we recom mend preparing content as standard definition MPEG2 All video content must have either PAL 25fps or NTSC 29 97fps frame rates Designer will not accept content with other frame rates but it will scale video prepared for different resolutions Designer can also import a wide range of audio formats including AC3 used on DVDs WAV and MP3 To add audio to an existing clip make sure the clip is selected and click on the button next to the Audio Path box You can then browse to the audio file and select it If the video and audio need to be synchronised i e audio is a soundtrack for the video then you should select Audio synced to ensure they are always locked together You can specify an audio offset to correct for any time delay betw
180. for the given file name For example Lile TO Open geu resource pach my lube jig 1 if file nil then local line file read 212 Lua scripts file close end 213 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Trigger Programming Guide Introduction The Unison Mosaic Controllers offer many useful show control capabilities Frequently it is the ability to cope with the particular show control needs of a project that is the critical factor in selecting a control system Show control broadly consists of two tasks First we need to be able to interface with other devices which may either be triggering us or be under our control The Unison Mosaic Controller supports most of the core interfaces typically used for show control either directly on the unit contact closures RS232 MIDI TCP IP time and date or via Expansion Modules RS485 SMPTE or Remote Devices Within the Triggers screen of the Designer soft ware we can configure the Controller to detect particular triggers and how to respond to them Second we need to be able to make decisions These could be simple choices between two alternatives per haps a contact closure needs to trigger a different timeline depending on whether it is during the day or during the night Within the Triggers screen we support a range of conditions that can be used to quickly implement this sort of logical decision making We also provide a facility to treat values received on an input
181. formed via the network interface of the computer running Designer not via the Con trollers If the computer has more than one network interface then you will be prompted to select which network interface to use for KiNet discovery The network interface must have an IP address in the 10 x x x range for dis covery to be completely successful Toggle Show Discovered to show and hide the discovered power supplies Power supplies that have an IP address that is already used by the current Controller will appear in grey To add a power supply to the current Controller press the button in the Select column and press Add To Pro ject A new power supply will be added to the current Controller and that power supply will be automatically selec ted If Designer doesn t recognise the type of the power supply you will be prompted to select it from a list To add all the discovered power supplies to the current Controller press Add All To Project Patching fixtures to a RIO Add Universe Type RIO 80 Number 7 RIO 80 1 is available 52 Patch In the RIO section of the patch tab you ll need to add a universe that will joined to a RIO before you can patch fix tures Click Add Universe and choose the RIO to which you want to output that universe of DMX The RIO is capable of outputting 96 channels of DMX Any channels patched to a RIO will subtract from the max imum channel output capacity of the Controller The RIO
182. frame x y return gt lookup x f width 1 end We used the add_point function to insert a green colour midway between the red and the blue colours This gen erates a horizontal gradient that fades from red to green to blue Back to the vertical band example we will use a gradient to colour the bands Listing 15 width of the bands in pixels band width 4 space between bands in pixels band spacing 1 the colour of the band band Gradient Gradient new colour new 25570 0 4 COLOQUES new LOLI 0 the colour of the space between bands background colour colour new 0 0 0 234 Custom Preset Programming Guide get the combined width of band and separator local total band width band widthtband spacing get the number of visible bands local bands width total band width modulo operator asb function mod a b return a math floor a b b end the pixel function function pixel frame x y if motx total band width band width Then in band separator teturi Daekg round colour end get the band in which this paxel falls local band math floor x total band width get the fraction through the effect local t frame frames get the height of the band in which this pixel falls local band height math sin band ba ds t math p1 2 1 2 adjust y to be relative to the center of the effect y y nelignht 2 0 5 decide if this pixel is inside t
183. from a universe 1 Use Controller and Universe to select the universe to be cleared 2 Right click anywhere on the universe layout and select Clear Universe 50 Patch To clone a universe copy the patch 1 Use Controller and Universe to select the universe to be cloned 2 Press the Clone Universe button to open the Clone Patch dialog Clone Patch a Dlone patch bom Controles 1 DH Uniwerse 1 Ciestirnabon rrera Controller 2 Controle 2 LPC oo Protocol Aiel s Urrea 2 3 Select the target Controller Protocol and Universe using the pull down 4 Press Ok to clone the patch to this universe or Cancel to abort To highlight a fixture 1 Select one or more fixtures using the Browser or the universe layout 2 Press the Highlight button the fixture s will come on to their highlight defaults typically open white 3 Press Highlight again to turn off or select other fixtures to highlight NOTE The appropriate Controller must be on the network and correctly associated to highlight fixtures Fixtures can also be highlighted from the plan in Setup To hide unused universes 1 Select the Controller 2 Press the Hide Unused Universes button only universes with patched fixtures will be displayed 3 Press Hide Unused Universes again to display all or select another Controller RDM device discovery DMS 1 DMs 2 Discover Discovered 9 device s A eras Tron gobo fh Loa 10b7300e Philips Un
184. ft tab e Ctrl tab e Shift Ctrl tab e Ctrl F e Ctrl T e Ctrl click e Shift click e Ctrl drag e Shift drag e Cti A e Ctrl N Press a function key F1 thru F10 to change the application s mode akin to selecting a mode tab on the left hand side Press to open or close the Tear off Simulator Press Delete or Backspace to delete the selected fixtures or groups of fixtures a con firm dialog will appear if this will cause fixtures to be totally removed from the project with subsequent loss of programming Press Delete or Backspace to delete the selec ted presets from a timeline Press Esc to clear the fixture selection Press Esc to abort a fixture move or timeline drag operation preset move resize Use the cursor keys to nudge a fixture selection Setup or scroll a matrix or timeline Media Program Use to super nudge a fixture selection Setup Use Page Up and Page Down to zoom in and out of a plan matrix or timeline Use to select the next fixture with a single fixture selected in Setup DALI amp Mover or next editable cell on a properties tab for example Use to select the previous fixture with a single fixture selected in Setup DALI amp Mover Use to select the next timeline for editing Program Use to select the previous timeline for editing Program Use to fit the plan or timeline to the screen Use to display the plan at actual size 1 1 pixel mapping Hol
185. g that is to be output Use the Controller setting to specify which MSC s MIDI port should be used as the output To use the MIDI port on a RIO A set the Device to RIO A and specify the RIO A number Press Edit to open the Message Builder MM Message Builder 213 MICH Heritage Ene FO 7F 00020001 35 24 00 31 OOF Ira Kew Apper New Faine Chew Sart Herp Deane ID O Foe 0 Lonard Go me Lit Hur 7 Cus Hi pl Ch Esberaded C ncal Press Insert New select one of the three message types and then the specific command and variables 112 Triggers Advanced Press Append New to add and define another command string to be output the Raise and Lower buttons can be used to define the output order Press Remove to delete a command string and Clear to delete them all The resulting hexadecimal string will be constructed automatically and displayed in the window for reference with question marks indicating undefined characters Press Ok to finish Use Options gt Preferences gt Triggers to select the default Short MIDI message data format A comprehensive guide to MIDI is beyond the scope of this document see the MIDI Manufacturers Association for more details and the manual for the equipment to be interfaced will also certainly be an invaluable reference Set BPS Button LED The BPS has eight buttons each with an integral white LED Use the configuration pane to select the BPS button nu
186. g the values of the properties we can now create a variety of different effects without having to alter the script again Colour library summary colour new r g b Returns a new colour that represents the RGB color specified by the components r g andb r g andb will be limited to the range 0 255 colour interpolate cl c2 f Returns the colour that is linearly interpolated between colour c1 and colour c2 at fraction f can fall outside of the range 0 1 and the returned colour will be extrapolated accordingly Properties c red The value of the red component 0 255 of colour c 238 Custom Preset Programming Guide c green The value of the green component 0 255 of colour c o blue The value of the blue component 0 255 of colour c Gradient library summary gradient new cl c2 Returns a new gradient with colour c1 at the start and colour c2 at the end Functions gqilooku up T Returns the colour at fraction through the gradient g will be limited to the range 0 1 aradad Point Adds the colour c to the gradient g at fraction f Built in functions arstirl rl x2 y2 Returns the distance between coordinate x1 y1 and coordinate x2 y2 dist from center x y Returns the distance between coordinate x y and the center of the frame This is not the same as calling dist x y width 2 height 2 It takes into account the fact that the center of the frame may fall in the middle o
187. gger typeS e a de ero DON da OS aia 105 A O A A 105 AE A A N 105 A A needed dneayaeat EREN 106 AAA hah 106 OIG rae te a ths ease a ea i ie Bo tec eta bee a ta hea ots ae ee se 107 AA ora ee ee ek ee Re ees 107 DALI Ballast Error cas na ulin wets mates 108 DARIO Dto anos e e o ah ar o he ob 108 DALI Bus Power a di 108 BFO o A A O E AAA AN 109 Paradigm ao e AAA 109 Remote Device Online 2 022 co cece cece eee eee nes 109 Remote Device Offline 2 0 0 22 ccc ec eee ee eee cece eee 22222 aaa 109 Advanced action types iiss cis A sn ite cee ie a hal ee ms eee dae 109 Set WME Nie Rale tus lorca acciona cry a ee eee ue nena aed eto aia ca io db 109 Set Timeline Position x25 54202 sci bec ue ie ies ae a lo ec tee Sole ee yoo 109 Set Timecode IO 110 SEU FIGURE ROB daa 110 Clear KUE ROB nta e o a de do a el e 110 BN AAA ea ede eal elephant e os ec 110 Recall DALVSCENG so 6 iste e a ade dda o o 110 DALLC OMMAN A aera ance Asean nue eee asin ana a sae 110 Mark DALI Ballast Fixed 2 0 0 0 2 o eect nn 110 DALI Start Emergency Tests 22s4205 peso al a ew eee ales 110 DALI Stop Emergency Test occ ccoo 110 NS A A OT A 111 MSc o o de eo ia ola et e e estes OL 111 A TERNS Seo ORSON NE aE Sonne GI ne Ue Oe ene ERTS ONDINE 111 5 c2 fC 0 8 Seema ne ai CE eee SR koe eT Seem NTE St TRIE SY TNE POG EIS Eee EE eT Ten Tees 111 EIA AA A A A oe nN TINT A A ore ee ae 111 EMemecOMDU usario diosa tc cl da a ns ds ts dere ale ado
188. ggers management window Clicking on this hyperlink will fire the numbered trigger if it exists but will not cause the page to refresh so there is no need to use Java Script tricks to prevent the page from flickering 176 Web interface Custom page s Injecting variables You can capture variables and inject them into the numbered trigger by specifying a var field in the query string The value of this field is expecting a comma separated list of values with each value in the format abc def where abc is the captured value and def is the range of the value optional If the value of abc is not a num ber it is treated as 0 If value of def is not a number it is treated as 255 For example the URL trigger 1 var 14 will fire trigger number 1 and will inject the value 14 If this trigger had a Start Timeline action that expected a variable to select the timeline then it would start timeline 14 In another example the URL trigger 2 var 50 100 will fire trigger number 2 and will inject the value 50 If the variable is used by an action that is expecting a value within a range for example Set intensity expecting a level between off and full then the injected variable will be treated as 50 since 50 100 50 You can also inject multiple variables For example trigger 2 var 50 100 3 4 16 will inject 50 50 3 and 4 25 If you want to inject a string to a variable for example if you want to set t
189. guration pane once the fixture has been deployed and selected so creating a custom fixture library entry a relatively complex process may not be necessary Fixture icons amp scale The following icons are used to differentiate between fixture classes s3 Setup Project properties Moving light wash DALI ballast see DALI Moving light spot Conventional fixture W Non dim switched control channel or con 0 troller DD Moving light mirror Accessory eg scroller Discrete LED fixture to scale Media server 3 Compound LED fixture to scale Fountain jet fixture 4 3 PAL NTSC AV device 16 9 PAL NTSC AV device The LED and compound LED fixture icons are drawn to scale 1cm 1pixel so that coupled with a correctly scaled background image the resulting plan and simulation is as realistic as possible The other icons are drawn to a standard size that in most cases will produce a realistic result All placed fixture icons can however have their size scale and even shape modified using the Fixture Configuration pane When using the Simulator these icons instead render the fixture s output even displaying the selected gobo and iris settings for moving lights Fountain jets simulate differently however extending in length to mimic the jet of water Populating the plan Simply chose a manufacturer select the required fixture by clicking on it and then drag it onto its positio
190. h A A aca eesti 121 JA A to seks cats he sa ee ese ie ae ee ee eet eae ee ek NL 121 Ee paz DION a e eerie o SO ay oe ote ee 121 Remote Device Online 22 2 22 2 cee c ccc ccc ee nn 121 DAR Balas tE a lo ill ea ela ar eee OS 122 DALI Bus Power 2 a lis aida 122 eDMX Pass Thru Detected _ 22 2 22 rs 122 Triggers Variables so 5523 itt einer tials Mini os tea ues td ahaa esau ttle secede a hae 123 Triggers that capture variables 00 0 000 0 o occ occ ccc eee eee eee eee cence eee eee eeee ene 123 Timeline Started Timeline Ended and Timeline Released 222222 22 2 eee eee 123 Bs A A PERN Re ere NE ace eC E NN RR We AA 123 PRIA OCI ON a e sa eet ta re ee Lace cee 123 Serial and Ethernet Input 2 22 2 22 22 o cece cece ccc cee cece eee e cece cece eeceeeeeeeeeenees 123 AUS pa cette a aio e aaa ae Snes 124 IA IN mee 124 AUDI sor nts ee Banos les Site tres ia taa dol aan apro Dee 124 DAETIADUE aus deco os a ds rl a lla loe al 125 DALI Ballast ET dad ini a 125 A meet Recent E UT eee oem ent ee en INOE ae 125 Paradigm NIC Alok s iccco o a ide 125 Conditions that capture variables _ 2 02 22 co cece eee cece cece eee eee eee eee eeeeeeceeeeeeees 125 PE A VV OU AA A 125 Conditions that use variables _ 2 222 2222 cece eee e eee cece eee e cece eee eee ec ee eeececeeceeseeees 125 10 Contents PANU PIS AAS GE VOM sees or ee eno a ee harlot ae oe ec ls ada De crea sith 125 A
191. hange the source for the bus Trigger will not be matched because controller is not Reconfigure the trigger with the correct Controller a TPC number Trigger is set to match on controller but no controller Reconfigure the trigger with the correct Controller has that number number is set to match with module number on any con 1 i troller but no such module is configured Add and configure the Expansion Module is set to match with module number on controller OI z i i 2 but no such module is configured Add and configure the Expansion Module is set to match with but no such device is configured Add and configure the Remote Device Reconfigure the trigger or action with the correct has an incomplete remote device identifier Remote Device identifier There are Astronomical triggers in the project but the pro ject location appears to have not been set Set a location for the project see Location Trigger requires input on controller to be con The Controller s input has been configured incor figured as a digital input or contact closure rectly see Controller Interfaces Trigger requires input on controller to be con The Controller s input has been configured incor figured as an analog input rectly see Controller Interfaces Trigger is set to match with controller which doesn t have digital inputs Choose a Controller that does have digital i
192. hat the message takes to scroll over the matrix Count the number of times that the message should scroll over the length of the preset Text the text to render Font the font to use to render the text see the Fonts dialog below Refresh when to update the text if it is changed Immediately On Loop On Release Scroll select either static or the scroll direction of the text Up Down Left Right Alignment if the text is set to static the alignment of the text Left Center Right Blend if the text is set to scroll specify a soft edge in pixels Seamless Loop if the text is set to scroll setting this will remove the gap between the end and the start Orientation the orientation of the text Horizontal Vertical Mirror flips the text left to right Flip flips the text top to bottom Effect applies a dot matrix effect None Dot Matrix Square Dot Matrix Circle Dot Pitch if a dot matrix effect is selected sets the dot pitch in pixels of the pseudo matrix NOTE While this preset is complex it may not achieve what you want please contact support for assistance To configure the font used by the Dynamic Text preset press the button next to the font picker to open the Fonts dialog Select a font from the Font picker Press New to create a new font Press Delete to delete the selected font note that you cannot delete a font that is in use in the project Set the font s name in the Name property Use Family S
193. have an infinite loop you are able to stop it executing by pressing Debug gt Stop Ctrl F5 However outside of the debugger there is no such way to stop the execution of a badly behaved script This will result in Designer locking up and will have to be shut down manually You must ensure that your scripts do not have such errors in them A preview of the preset will be generated and shown on the right of the script editor You can start and stop the pre view and step forwards and backwards with transport controls below the preview Altering the period below the preview and pressing Debug gt Run F5 again will generate the preview again with the specified period If the preset defines any properties after the script is successfully compiled suitable editors for these properties will be displayed below the preview You can change the values of these properties and rerun the script using Debug gt Run F5 to observe the effect of those properties in the preview Once you are happy with the preview close the script editor The preset can now be placed on Matrices ona timeline You can edit the source of the custom preset script again by selecting it in the Custom tab on the Media pane and pressing Edit If you edit a preset that is already used on a timeline any changes you make will be applied to everywhere where the preset is used Refer to the script editor documentation for more information on editing scripts and the custom presets p
194. he Controller in the network window but it is shown in red Controllers must be running the same version of firmware as the Designer software Controllers with incom patible firmware will be highlighted in red Select the Controller in the network window and press Reload Firm ware 190 Troubleshooting Simulation looks fine but when I upload to the MSC nothing happens e Fixtures not patched Try Output Live or examine the DMX Viewer to debug e Output Live left turned on although a dialog now warns of this when uploading e The MSC or TPC hasn t received a valid trigger to commence playback Use the web interface to check status examine the log and stimulate triggers Trigger conditions do not work in simulation why Trigger conditions are not tested by the simulator Output Live does nothing e Fixtures not patched e Output Live has been disabled for one or more of the TPCs or MSCs Why do see a delay between the simulation and the MSC in Output Live If you are connecting to the Controller via USB there may be a discernable delay Use Ethernet instead or upload the show to the Controller and run the show directly The Controller s playback performance is deteriorating over time why If your project has large numbers of timelines set to Hold or Loop and these timelines are never explicitly released then over time they will build up in the background and cause the Controller to struggle Program your trigger
195. he band local h math abs y height 2 if h lt band height then return band Gradient Lookup A else recura Dackg round colour end end The band gradient variable is initialised as a red to yellow gradient and we use band _ gradient lookup h to determine the colour of the band at height h Working with properties Custom presets can have properties which will be exposed in Designer whenever the preset is placed on a timeline This allows a single custom preset to create a wide variety of effects It also means that you do not have to create near identical copies of custom presets just to change one parameter for example a colour You can just expose a colour property and specify the desired colour when the preset is placed on a timeline To define a property you would call the function Property name type detault valles ses This must be added to your script outside of any function call 235 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual name Is a string and must be unique within a custom preset and must not contain spaces This name will be used as the name of a global variable that is available in your script whose value will depend on what has been set for a given instance of your custom preset type Is the type of the property It can be one of the following values BOOLEAN INTEGER FLOAT COLOUR and GRADIENT This determines what sort of control is presented to the user when placing a custom preset on a timeline
196. he contents of a text slot the characters must be bound by double quotes or 22 if using character escaping To include a in the injected string you must prefix it with a backslash To include a backslash write two backslashes Here are some examples for injecting strings e trigger 1 var hello gt hello e trigger 1 var 22hello 22 gt hello e trigger 1 var hello world gt hello world e trigger 1 var hello world gt hello world Anything after the closing and before the next comma is ignored e trigger 1 var hell o world gt hell world If a closing quote is missing the remaining string is used e trigger 1 var 1 hello 2 gt 1 hello 2 Testing conditions By default when firing a trigger from a custom web interface conditions on that trigger will be tested To disable this specify conditions 0 in the URL query string For example trigger 1 conditions 0 will fire trigger 1 regardless of whether its conditions are satisfied Triggers on the default Control web page will not test conditions Dynamic feedback To provide feedback on a custom web page you can make use of the query interface to access timeline status information text slot contents etc 177 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Issues When you Upload Designer will check things like triggers and hardware configuration to make sure that there are no inconsistencies If any issues are found the Issue
197. he reports just present an accurate account of the project programming The reports can be sorted and reorganised Right click on the column headings to set clear primary secondary sorts Drag column headers to move them drag the header divider lines to resize them These spreadsheet lay out settings are stored with the project Exporting a report Press the Export to file button to save out a tsv file Tab Separated Values which can then be opened and formatted in a spreadsheet program ready for presentation 165 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Web interface Default pages The Controller s internal web interface is a very powerful diagnostic and management tool You can view a Con troller s web interface from within Designer or for remote access browse to the index page at http xxx xxx Xxx xxx default index asp where xxx xxx xxx xxx IS the IP address of the Controller Ethernet is the preferred connection to access the Controller s web interface A USB connection can be used for configuration and troubleshooting provided that Designer is running but the Controller s playback performance may be affected Use the navigation buttons across the top to select these pages Home E Pesos MET Foyer LPC Mozilla Firea m x FEE DE Mea Hielo A Hg WEBSERVER The home page provides general information about the status of the Controller Serial number type IP address loaded project details and memory usage Th
198. id readability Standard clipboards shortcuts and undo redo are supported To import a Lua script from an external file use File gt Import Ctri l To save a Lua script to a file use File gt Export Ctrl E To compile the script and check for syntax errors use Build gt Build F7 If there are errors in the script they will be displayed at the bottom of the window When you have finished editing the script press Ok to close the Script Editor If there are still errors in your script you will be prompted whether the invalid source should be saved or not To discard any changes close the Script Editor and select Discard from the confirmation dialog Debugging Lua scripts If your script contains no errors use Debug gt Run F5 to execute it in a debugger This will run the script and report any runtime errors in the Output tab below the source editor Note that only Custom preset scripts can be executed in the debugger If there are errors you can place breakpoints in the source to force the debugger to halt execution at that point and allow you to examine the state of variables and execute further instructions one at a time 207 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual To add remove a breakpoint on a line of source code click the mouse to the left of the relevant line number or use Debug gt Toggle Breakpoint F9 to set a breakpoint at the text cursor Now when you run the script with Debug gt Run F5 the debugger
199. idge lighting Implementing an interactive game for a science museum We will use some of the situations as examples below The Basics There are a few basic things you need to know straight away If any of them are not immediately clear then don t worry there are lots of examples of how to apply them in the following section Lua scripts are written as simple text files using any text editor It is standard practice to use a lua filename exten sion though this is not required These text files can be loaded directly into the script editor dialog within Designer 214 Trigger Programming Guide Comments It is good practice to include readable comments in your scripts so that you or anyone else will be able to easily tell what you were aiming to achieve In Lua everything after two dashes on a line is treated as a comment This iS a comment This is not a comment but this is The whole point of comments is that they have no effect on the behaviour of the script But am introducing them first so that can use them within the examples that follow Variables If you want to store a piece of data whether it is a number some text or just true or false then you use a vari able You create a variable simply by giving it a name and using it in your script A variable can store any type of data just by assigning it firstVariable 10 assign a number anotherVariable Some text assign a string Whe
200. ied default is All meaning that the skew will span the entire selection Typically you set this value to be equal to the number of pixels ina compound fixture or the number of fixtures in a zone or on a truss experimentation is recommended as inter esting effects can be achieved Buddy Specifies the number of fixtures pixels that will fade together within a skewed transition default is 1 meaning that each fixture pixel will fade independently Set to 2 to make pairs fade together 3 for threesomes etc Again exper imentation recommended REPEAT 3 EC ET Transition skews Matrix amp Media presets 2D Skew Type Since the Pixel Matrices onto which you place Matrix and Media presets have spatial awareness the available skews are more powerful and are akin to video wipes you may have to increase the fade time to clearly perceive the skew Fade Sets the hardness of the skew whether the edge of the wipe is hard 0 or soft 100 Angle Some skews for example Linear or Radial Wipe can optionally accept an angle value that alters the direction or start point of the transition Specifying times Timing fields display times in the format hh mm ss cc hours minutes seconds centiseconds although leading zeros are not displayed 24 hours 24 00 00 00 is the maximum timeline length and thus timing duration 95 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual When setting times you can enter in this format directly omitting
201. ified Interface You can specify whether you want all of the fixtures on that Interface fixtures in a certain group or a single fixture to be affected by the level change You can also specify a fade time or choose to reuse the last fade time stored on the ballasts amp Recall DALI Scene Use this toa DALI scene on DALI fixtures patched to a specified Interface You can specify whether you want all of the fixtures on that Interface fixtures in a certain group or a single fixture to be affected by the scene change You can also specify a fade time or choose to reuse the last fade time stored on the ballasts A DALI Command Use this to send a DALI command to DALI fixtures patched to a specified Interface You can specify whether you want all of the fixtures on that Interface fixtures in a certain group or a single fixture to be affected by the com mand DALI commands include off fade up down step up down step to min max step down and off and step up and on Where fading is involved you can specify a fade rate or choose to reuse the last fade rate stored on the ballasts d Mark DALI Ballast Fixed Use this to mark all or a single emergency ballast as fixed on the specified interface AA DALI Start Emergency Test Use this to start a Duration or Function test on all or a single DALI address es on the specified interface amp DALI Stop Emergency Test Use this to stop a Duration or Function test on all or a single DALI address
202. igital input or contact closure Condition expects all inputs on to be configured as either digital inputs or contact closures Condition requires input on to be configured as an analog input Ethernet Bus uses port This clashes with the internal web server and will prevent correct operation of controller Ethernet Bus uses port This clashes with file trans fer and will prevent correct operation of controller Controller is outputting KiNet so ensure the DHCP server on protocol network interface is serving an IP address on the same network as the patched power sup plies Controller is outputting KINET so ensure that the pro tocol network interface IP address is on the same network as the patched power supplies Multiple KiNet power supplies have the IP address Controller is outputting KiNet so ensure that the con troller IP address is on the same network as the patched power supplies Reconfigure the action to use a Controller that does have an RS285 serial port Reconfigure the trigger with the correct port number Reconfigure the serial port of the Controller to use the correct mode see Controller Interfaces Reconfigure the trigger to use a Controller with a MIDI Out port Check the variables assigned to these fields in the action properties The RIO s input has been configured incorrectly see Remote Devices The RIO has been configured incorrectly see Remo
203. igning IP addresses DMX USITT DMX512 an industry standard digital lighting control protocol E eDMX A shorthand term for DMX over Ethernet protocols for example Art Net II F firmware The embedded operating system stored in internal flash memory or on the Compact Flash card fixture Lighting instrument or luminaire G group A collection of fixtures or elements pixels within a fixture that provide a very useful shortcut for select ing and programming them together as one IP address Internet Protocol address in the form xxx xxx xxx xxx which specifies the unique address for net worked equipment 249 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual M matrix A two dimensional array of fixtures such that each fixture or element within a compound fixture is mapped to a pixel of the array MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface an industry standard communications protocol for musical instru ments mover Any fixture that has control parameters beyond colour mixing RGB CMY etc and intensity typically an automated light N NTP Network Time Protocol a means of transmitting time signals over a computer network used to set realtime clocks automatically to the correct time p preset The basic building block that is placed on a timeline to define what a fixture or group of fixtures is to do Roughly analogous to a cue R RDM Remote Device Management an extension to the USITT DMX512 protocol
204. inear Radial Conical Square Noise Perlin Noise or Bilinear Shape the shape of the pulse Sine Triangle Square Ramp Up or Ramp Down Pulse Width the width of the pulse in percent 1 gt 200 if 100 the pulse fills half of the matrix Reverse Direction reverses the direction of the pulse Invert Pulse changes the starting position of the pulse If the Type is Linear Radial Conical Square or Bilinear the properties Angle Repeat and Count are available e Repeat the repeat style None Sawtooth Triangle e Count the number of repeats e Angle the angle in degrees of the pulse Linear Conical amp Bilinear only If the type is Noise e Seed the seed of the pseudo random noise copying this value to another preset will create the same noise e Randomise picks a new seed If the type is Perlin Noise e Seed the seed of the pseudo random noise copying this value to another preset will create the same noise Randomise picks a new seed X the horizontal scale higher numbers will produce more variation horizontally Y the vertical scale higher numbers will produce more variation vertically Depth the coarseness of the noise Te Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Live video Displays live video on a matrix MSC X only X amp Y offset map to the top left pixel of interest on the incoming DV image ee Perlin noise Renders a smoothly varying noise effect To change a colour press
205. ing indefinite output 00 00 02202 ce eee eee ee eee eee ec onran nnn 84 a AA A nT ID OI O OO Re A EE IE ee tera ee 84 MOOD e sisal tan IA AA NA 84 SA Te YEG TTY A A A 85 ESA i ce tas heat ada lo ess delata id e pe ea 85 Eo Io A A ee al sale Aetna 85 Program Working with presets _ 00 22 o cece ccc cece eee eee eee cence eee cee eeeeeeees 86 PAODIY ES CS e e ail os 86 Colour picker amp user palette 2 22 22 oll cece cece eee ec eee eee eee ec ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 Wal GOLGI ROS dentes castas cat cabe sao cd ea ena no eee 87 Hei AAA 87 Mover presets 1 DE bid 87 DALES OIT ap pte anne eee eee seen crisis Ile eso ade ec os tea le lo isso Ne tb pa 88 COP peseta re a a e a e e e de o 88 Malo AA AAA A A O A ae 88 Deleting ES a eS o ER ke 88 Selecting multiple presets 0 02 2 occ ec ccoo conc 88 Program Working with the Audio Visual Controller 20 002 00 0 222 2 eee eee eee eee 89 OV CIVIC A AA AAA 89 Schematic of AV routing tae 89 MUO HING TK OW Sis 22 94 fe orks te cents aea eee oe aa non A tie 90 AI E IE 90 A A O II A A A A 90 A A A E E NE 90 US O A aie on bare ta E ional 90 PS EI crea A ae a eh as ae al A tt 90 Preset user named 0 2222 e cece cece eee cee eee ee ee ee cence eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 90 BIOK eet ne one a a Se eT SPRY ae moe ON A 91 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual ES a UL GR teeter ce E A es reel NU A A RR EHS eT 91 DYNAMIC te n
206. intensity or a dynamic effect Sine Cosine Square Triangle or Ramp Up Size the amplitude of the effect Period the period of the effect in seconds Count the number of times that the effect should repeat over the length of the preset Offset Style choose None all elements are the same intensity Spread the effect is spread over space as well as time or Once as None but will stop after one period Reverse Direction reverses the direction of the effect e Repeat the number of elements to repeat the effect over e Buddy the number of elements that will be set to the same intensity if Buddy is greater than 1 the num ber of elements that are repeated over is Repeat multiplied by Buddy MPA Flicker Renders dynamic random flickering over a colour gradient To change a colour press on the coloured button select a colour and press Ok To move a colour click and drag the coloured button To add a new colour click anywhere on the slider where there is no button To remove a colour right click on the coloured button Period the period of the effect in seconds Sub the amplitude of the low frequency perturbation First the amplitude of the fundamental flicker frequency Second the amplitude of the second harmonic Third the amplitude of the third harmonic Seed used to offset the effect click the Randomise button to generate a random value Uniform apply the Seed value as the offset for all fixtures in the group
207. ion angle is optional not valid for single element fixtures and is specified in degrees clockwise from vertical The fixture ele ment index is only required if the fixture specified by fixture number is a compound fixture NOTE On a matrix a fixture s position is where the first element of the unrotated fixture lies Fixtures are rotated about their center Therefore a rotated fixture will appear to have a different position to that given in the imported file Example Simple matrix 1 0 0 2 30 0 3 0 30 4 30 30 5 1 0 60 5 2 30 60 244 Web server query interface Web server query interface The query interface of a Controller provides access to timeline status information text slot contents etc for cus tom web pages Syntax If you GET the URL HCL pt Xxx XXX KKK XXx query command args and command and args are recognised the controller will return the result of the query else it will return a 204 No Response HTTP header Data will be returned as XML Recognised commands are system currentTime timeline timelineStatus textSlot variable Commands Get Controller Settings Get a summary of the Controller s settings e Command system e Args none Sample Response lt response gt lt hardwareType gt LPC2 lt hardwareType gt lt serialNumber gt 002056 lt serialNumber gt lt firmwareVersion gt lt major gt 1 lt major gt lt minor gt 7 lt minor gt lt point gt 13
208. irect one to one connection between a computer and the AVC you must use a crossover cable You can however use a normal cat 5 cable for the TPC the revised MSC hardware and the MSC X because their network interfaces are auto sensing e Quit and restart Designer again once you re sure that the is network up use your PC s LAN status tools e By default the Controllers are set to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server is the PC running one Set a static IP address for both parties the Controller via USB e Do you have more than one network connection on the PC Wireless perhaps If so did you choose the right network the one with the Controller when you started Designer e Is the Controller s firmware compatible with Designer Update it with the TPC recovery procedure the MSC recovery procedure or MSC X Recovery Tool Incorrect Ethernet cable CAT5 5E 6 pairing Not all electrical installers are aware of the subtleties of Ethernet cabling in particular the correct pairing scheme While incorrectly paired short cables may work longer cables almost certainly won t or may exhibit intermittent errors Note that simple continuity testers will NOT expose an incorrectly paired cable See this Wikipedia topic for details can see the Controller in the network window but it is shown in grey Controllers must be on the same Ethernet subnet as the PC running Designer Select the controller and change it s IP settings accordingly can see t
209. irmware may result in the project failing to load and run Check the Controller s home page to determine compatibility before attempting a remote upload Note that the Safari browser is unable to request progress information while uploading a project file This feature is not currently supported on Google s Chrome browser As an alternative use the Firefox browser Custom Page If a default custom page is specified a Custom Page button will appear beside Configuration 173 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Web interface Command line The Controller has a command line entry box in the Control page of its web interface Text entered in this com mand line is interpreted by a Lua script specified by the user as part of the project configuration Users may write their own scripts if they wish see Lua scripts but a standard script commandline lua is provided in the resources directory of Unison Mosaic Designer IMPORTANT Note that by default there is no command line script installed Most installations will not require a command line and so it is inactive by default If you wish to use the standard command line script you must use the Custom Command Line Parser option on the File menu to select the script The command line syntax defined in the standard commandline lua script has the following commands where x y and z represent numbers and indicates optional syntax Selections x x y x y xX y Z where x y and
210. is Perlin Noise e Seed the seed of the pseudo random noise copying this value to another preset will create the same noise Randomise picks a new seed X the horizontal scale higher numbers will produce more variation horizontally Y the vertical scale higher numbers will produce more variation vertically Depth the coarseness of the noise ST Spiral rainbow A special version of 2D Rainbow with conical type e Colour specifies the start colour of the rainbow the saturation and intensity are maintained throughout the cycle Period the number of seconds that the rainbow takes to complete one cycle Count the number of times that the rainbow should cycle over the length of the preset Spokes the number of times the rainbow repeats around the matrix Curve an angle in degrees to curve the effect as it radiates from the centre of the matrix Reverse reverses the direction of the spiral E Gradient Renders a static multi colour gradient on a matrix e Tochange a colour press on the coloured button select a colour and press Ok To move a colour click and drag the coloured button To add a new colour click anywhere on the slider where there is no button To remove a colour right click on the coloured button Type the shape of the rainbow effect Linear Radial Conical Square Noise Perlin Noise or Bilinear Ifthe Type is Linear Radial Conical Square or Bilinear the properties Angle Repeat and Count ar
211. ition will check against the most recent event received Digital inputs on Controllers or Remote Devices can also be used to detect contact closures Digital word This condition allows you to test multiple of the digital inputs as a single condition By clicking repeatedly on the numbers representing each input you can specify whether it has to be low high or either the default to match As aside effect the condition will also capture as a variable the state of all inputs set to match as a binary num ber This can be useful if you want to pass a lot of information Such as a timeline number using a set of digital inputs When building the binary number low or contact closed is treated as a one and high or contact open is treated as a zero and input 1 is the least significant bit LSB and input 8 is the most significant bit MSB 120 Triggers Conditions U Analog Input The revised MSC hardware and TPC with TPC RIO have 8 inputs that can be configured as digital or analog inputs in the Interfaces tab of the Network view The RIO 80 and RIO 44 also have configurable inputs see Remote Devices You can specify a condition based on the current state of an analog input Set Device to Local to use a Con troller s input or choose a RIO Then select the input number and the percentage range of input voltage The voltage range of an Controller s or RIO s analog input can be configured in the Network view DMX In Thi
212. ize Bold and Italic to set the appearance of the font Press Ok to close the Fonts dialog NOTE Editing a font will change all Dynamic text presets that use that font not just the currently selected preset s The Dynamic Text preset allows you to change the text after uploading the project to a Controller To do this you need to specify which parts of the text are going to change and which parts will remain the same 91 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual For example to show the opening time of a venue you might set the Text property to Opening Time lt open gt This creates a text slot called open which you can change the value of You can have more than one slot spe cified in the Text property for example Opening Time lt open gt Closing Time lt close gt To set the initial text for a text slot press the button next to the Text property to open the Dynamic Text Con figuration dialog e Click in the Default Value cell of a slot to edit the text stored in that slot e Youcan remove unused text slots by pressing Remove e Press Ok to save changes and Cancel to discard changes There are two built in slots lt time gt and lt date gt which show the current time and date respectively The Set Text Slot trigger action allows you to change the value of a text slot from a trigger ae Fixed colour Renders a full screen fixed colour when placed on the main row When this preset is used on the effects row y
213. ject s filename which may be useful for tracking iterative versions Plan Size The plan size can be set via the Width and Height fields in pixels and a solid background colour selected by clicking the Background browse button The maximum plan size is 8192x8192 pixels Grid The spacing of the working grid can be specified again in pixels and there are options to show this grid and whether fixtures should snap to it This grid is useful in accurately and easily placing fixtures 30 Setup Project properties Background image To use a background image click on the button next to the Image entry to browse for an image either a Windows bmp Portable Network Graphics png or JPEG jpg image can be imported It is envisaged that this image be a graphical representation of the installation perhaps derived from architectural CAD drawings Use the Windows Alt Print Screen command to take a screen shot of your CAD application and then use a bit map editor to crop and resize the image to suit see scale Again the maximum plan size is 8192x8192 pixels so make sure the bitmap is smaller or equal to these values The plan size will automatically adjust to be that of this image When planning a fixture layout give consideration to fixture selection and visualization Particularly with large lay outs an abstracted arrangement of fixtures may be easier to view and work with than a pixel perfect scale accur ate represent
214. k local to this Controller 0 02 00 0 22222 eee eee eee eee eee ee 208 Accessing the calculated sunrise and sunset times local to this Controller 208 Accessing the calculated twilight times local to this Controller 22 2 2 22 22 22 208 16 Contents TPG s rinterface Control A ias 209 Accessing the current state of the digital inputs on this Controller 2 0 2 22 2 209 Accessing the values of DMX inputs on the local Controller _ occ 209 Checking the local Controller number 0 0 2022 22 e eee cee cee cee cece cece cece ceeeeeeee 209 Checking the status of timelines local to this Controller 00 0 00 22 222 e ee eee eee ee eee 209 HN ECTING A migger a e ed dEnas 210 WINS CORTO p a e ae crol cui co 210 Timecode control local to this Controller oocccccccccccccccccccccccccc ccoo 210 Fixture control local to this Controller ooooocccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccnc ccoo cnc 210 Accessing the values of DMX channels local to this Controller occ 211 Park and Unpark DMX channels local to this Controller ooo 211 Accessing the current state of the digital inputs ona RIO 0oocccccccccccccccccccccccccccoo 211 Accessing the current state of BPS buttons and setting BPS LEDs 220 020 0 212 Accessing trigger variables 0 000 0 coc cece ee eee ee ee eee eee ee eee
215. known id Ox0004 7 rosso ios T ft fs fr CA 10 73013 hips Unknown Ga O00 3 A e ninco ats E __ 1ob73011 _ Phitips Unknown id 00004 13 le 1067302 Pilas Unknown id 00004 II 54 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual In the DMX patch tab press Discover to find RDM capable devices attached to the current Controller The Dis cover button is only enabled if the current Controller is associated with a physical Controller and that Controller has been found on the network Toggle Show Discovered to show and hide the discovered RDM devices To identify a device toggle the button in the Identify column of the table To readdress a device enter a new value in the Start Address column KiNet device discovery KENET DMx2 Power Supply Show Discovered Discover Add Selected To Project Add Selected To Project Selected To Project dd All Add All To Project Add All To Project 103243113 00 EE 23 c29a M i Color Kinetic CoO OE Lame 0 32 47 92 D0 Da c5 23 06 85 M Color Kinetics Incorporated D Data rog Enable lo 132 47 26 OU Qacc5 23 6 43 M Color Kinetics Incorporated Data Data Enable 1 F A C 10 0 T 118 00 Da ch 22 77 Ja M Color Kinetics Incorporated D POS FDS lca E36 aa 10 0 9 41 00 0a c5 22 8b 29 M Color Kinetics Incorporated D PDS f POS 60 Pro GB s gt In the KiNet patch tab press Discover to find KiNet power supplies NOTE KiNet discovery is per
216. l 8 Remove the memory card from the MSC and insert it into your computer again 9 Delete the pc app file from the memory card 10 Reinsert the memory card into the MSC and restart the MSC To locate the firmware directory in the app bundle on Mac OS X please follow these steps Navigate to your Applications folder located on the the Hard Drive typically named Macintosh HD Locate the application called Unison Mosaic Designer Right click or control click on it and choose Show Package Contents from the menu that appears Now navigate to Contents Resources firmware to find the file pcr2 fw PON gt Original MSC 1 2 Hardware serial numbers 001xxx 005xxx The Legacy MSC Recovery Tool is a standalone utility for updating the original MSC s bootloader and firmware MSC Recovery Tool Step 3 Confirm Update Connected Device MSC1 Bootloader Version 0 5 Firmware Version 1 6 The USB and power connections to the MSC must not be disconnected during the update procedure Are you sure you wish to update the software Update Firmware Cancel 197 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual When to use it To update the bootloader The Legacy MSC Recovery Tool is the only method by which the bootloader can be updated The latest version is 0 5 and you should upgrade to this version To recover corrupt firmware It is possible although rare for the firmware to become corrupt when updating using the Designer sof
217. l range of 0 gt 254 with 255 being used as a special case meaning no change a mask if you like Unlike DMX fixtures these set tings are stored in the ballasts themselves and so must be uploaded separately see DALI Ballasts can also have their default Fade Time and Fade Rate set in the configuration pane Emergency DALI ballasts will also have the option to the set the Prolong time in the configuration pane More information about emergency ballasts can be in the DALI topic NOTE The default Fade Time and Fade Rate will be overwritten when new values are sent to ballasts during play back from triggers or programming This is due to the way DALI ballasts store this information 36 Setup Project properties Moving lights Moving lights can be customised for the project as one would on any sophisticated moving light console Use Invert Pan Invert Tilt and Swap Pan amp Tilt to normalise the way they respond to the position controls Customise the fixture s gobo amp colour wheels by pressing the Gobos or Colours buttons to open the Configuration dialogs Drag from the library onto the correct slots as required press Ok to save or Cancel to abort Gel colour For those working with gelled lights it is possible to simulate the gel s colour so that the fixtures are rendered cor rectly press the Gel button and select the required colour via the colour picker Reset to Defaults Use this to force the fixture to be redefin
218. leading zeros or you can use h m amp s to spe cify your units and Designer will reformat accordingly Furthermore any number input without separators h m s or is taken literally if it is valid as such or converted if not here a decimal point will always denote centiseconds For example 00 01 30 00 1 minute and 30 seconds 00 01 30 00 1 30 1 minute and 30 seconds 00 01 30 00 90s 1 minute and 30 seconds 00 01 30 00 1h2 5m 1 hour 2 minutes and 30 seconds 01 02 30 00 2h7m45 5s 2 hours 7 minutes 45 seconds and 50 centiseconds half a second 02 07 45 50 99 1 minute 39 seconds 99 not valid so converted 00 01 39 00 100 1 minute O seconds 100 valid so taken literally 00 01 00 00 2020 20 minutes 20 second 00 20 20 00 30 1 30 seconds and 10 centiseconds tenth of a second 00 00 30 10 Precedent The Unison Mosaic Controllers use the Latest Takes Precedent Plus LTP system popularised by Flying Pig Systems in the early 1990s to determine what to output to a fixture or strictly speaking fixture element or para meter at playback runtime LTP was an enhancement of the standard LTP system and was designed to incor porate automated lighting control The rules of the LTP system are as follows 1 After system initialisation and prior to any preset on a timeline running the output will be in a default released state This does not mean that all DMX channels will be zero however as this default state is
219. line programming to the outside world CONFIGURE SELECTED TRIGGER ADD amp CONFIGURE CONDITION S ADD amp CONFIGURE ACTIONS Controllers support a range of interfaces which can be used to trigger the playback engine including an internal realtime amp astronomical clock For example digital input 1 connected to a wall panel could be set to start Funky timeline Advert can be set to run on the hour every hour between sunrise and sunset and at sunset Cleaning would start The window comprises three sections On the left are the Trigger Condition and Action directories In the middle is the trigger management area and the panes to configure the Triggers Conditions and Actions are on the right Creating a trigger To create a trigger select and drag it from the directory and drop it onto the management area or press the 3P but ton on the Trigger configuration pane and use the pull down menu to select the required type see basic and Remote Device triggers Configuring a trigger e Type the trigger type e Number the trigger s unique number as used for face control purposes can typically be left at the default value unless creating custom pages e Controller the controller that will process the trigger note that Realtime Astronomical and Ethernet Input triggers are processed by the so the selection is limited to None or Time e Comment enter a useful name for simulation and web interface control pur
220. lot on the side The additional features of the revised MSC are Faster processor for improved performance 8 multi mode inputs digital contact closure and analog configurable in Designer Multi protocol serial interface RS232 or RS485 including DMX input SD card for project file storage for greater compatibility with today s PCs and Macs Output LED to indicate eDMX or raw DMX output What show control interfaces does the MSC 1 2 amp 4 support By providing RS232 RS485 serial including DMX input MIDI Ethernet amp digital analog inputs the MSC can interface with many generic off the shelf products and devices Via the built in web interface any browser PC Mac PDAs etc can utilise the hyperlinks for triggering and a custom web interface can be designed to provide a user friendly skin Remote Devices provide further interfacing options e g remote RS232 RS485 SMPTE EBU timecode audio input DALI MIDI etc Is Unison Mosaic RDM compatible Yes the hardware and Designer software supports RDM and we will continue to add features in future software versions Will I need more memory on the Controller The MSC 1 2 amp 4 ships with a 256MB memory card the MSC X amp AVC 4GB Project data is very memory effi cient and in multi Controller systems each Controller only stores what it needs and so it is unlikely that you will need more memory However heavy use of imported media may necessitate an upgrade 256MB sto
221. ltiple channels as required The KiNet equivalent to a universe The term used to determine which of the 512 control channels of a DMX uni verse a fixture should look at to take its own control data This start address must be set on the fixture or dimmer rack itself as well as patching the control system 48 Patch Patch window This window comprises three sections to the left is the Browser to the right the Protocol configuration pane with the rest of the window being a graphical representation of a protoco s port or universe The number of address columns displayed per row can be changed using If you are using an MSC X or choosing to output eDMX from an MSC 1 or 2 then you must use the Protocols pane to configure these protocols see High lt SELECT THE CONTROLLER lt SELECT THE PROTOCOL CONFIGURE PROTOCOLS Patch toolbar amp protocol tabs Use the Controller pull down to select the Controller for patching Use the Hide Unused Universe button to sup press unpatched universes and the Highlight button to bring the selected fixture s to its highlight values typically 100 intensity in open white for easy identification Use the tabs across the top of the graphical area to select the required protocol and then the universe or power supply amp port pull downs to select the target for patching which will be graphically displayed Patching DMX amp eDMX fixtures Simply select one or more fixtures
222. m Invert Colour sets either the background or the text to be transparent Offset set a offset amount on the Y axis of the matrix To configure the font used by the Dynamic Text preset press the button next to the font picker to open the Fonts dialog Select a font from the Font picker Press New to create a new font Press Delete to delete the selected font note that you cannot delete a font that is in use in the project Set the font s name in the Name property Use Family Size Bold and Italic to set the appearance of the font Press Ok to close the Fonts dialog 78 Program Preset types amp properties NOTE Editing a font will change all Dynamic text presets that use that font not just the currently selected preset S The Dynamic Text preset allows you to change the text after uploading the project to a Controller To do this you need to specify which parts of the text are going to change and which parts will remain the same For example to show the opening time of a venue you might set the Text property to Opening Time lt open gt This creates a text slot called open which you can change the value of You can have more than one slot spe cified in the Text property for example Opening Time lt open gt Closing Time lt close gt To set the initial text for a text slot press the button next to the Text property to open the Dynamic Text Con figuration dialog e Click in the Default Value
223. matting and printing See Report reference _97 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Quick Start Creating a project Having installed QuickTime and Designer launch the application and select New Project from the Launch Project dialog choose a location for the file to be stored and give it a memorable name A blank project will then be cre ated and the application will enter the Setup window ready for you to configure your plan place your fixtures and start programming To create a simple Unison Mosaic Designer project we will consider these four stages ONS Setting up your plan fixtures and patch Creating Media and Mover presets ready to use when programming Programming your timelines Creating the triggers that will operate your show Getting started Adding Conventionals LEDs and Moving Lights to the plan and patching them 1 From the Fixture Library pane select Conventional from the Generic manufacturer and drag to the plan Right click Ctrl Click for Mac users on the inserted fixture click on Duplicate Fixture edit Width to 6 and click Ok Return to the Generic Library select LED RGB and drag to the plan Duplicate an 8x8 array From the library use the drop down menu to select Robe ColorSpot 1200 drag to plan and duplicate fix ture again this time 6 in a circle Notice the fixture browser on the left has populated each fixture in groups based on fixture type The middle three tree buttons above the brows
224. mber which can be driven by a variable and the desired LED behaviour Enabling Set all other LEDs to default will set these LEDs to their default values as specified in BPS properties E Paradigm Action Use this to trigger a Paradigm system Select the type of command you wish to send then specify the parameters relevant to that action type 4 Disable Audio Input Use this to stop a RIO A or an audio expansion module from processing audio This can aid troubleshooting as audio activity tends to fill the log Leave Device as Local to disable a module or select RIO A and specify the RIO A number Toggle eDMX Pass Thru Use this to enable or disable eDMX Pass Thru on an MSC s DMX ports Choose which port you want to enable or disable by choosing from the port selection box See patch for more information a Hardware Reset Use this to force the Controller s to perform a hard reset which is equivalent to a power cycle Note that unlike PC based solutions there is no particular advantage or maintenance requirement to periodically reset a Controller this action is offered purely as a method of resetting the system to a defined start up state 113 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Triggers TPC triggers These triggers allow you to link the TPC s user interface with Designer s powerful show control engine and provide feedback to the TPC s controls buttons sliders etc TPC triggers ik TPC Button Whenever a bu
225. ments of compound fixtures Set intensity on fixture to value as DMX Optionally give a time in set_intensity fixture value time seconds to fade Set red on fixture to value as DMX Optionally give a time in seconds set_red fixture value time to fade Set green on fixture to value as DMX Optionally give a time in set_green fixture value time seconds to fade set_blue fixture value time Set blue on fixture to value as DMX Optionally give a time in seconds 210 Lua scripts to fade clear_fixture fixture time Clear the direct settings on fixture with optional fade time in seconds clear_all time Clear all direct settings with optional fade time Accessing the values of DMX channels local to this Controller DMXOUT channel The value of the specified channel 1 to 512 get_dmxout universe Returns a DMXOUT object for universe see table below Park and Unpark DMX channels local to this Controller Park the specified channel 1 512 on universe see table below at value 0 255 unpark universe channel Unpark the specified channel 1 512 on universe see table below park universe channel value The value for the universe argument for both of the above functions depends on the protocol type MSC 1 s DMX Universe 1 MSC 2 s DMX Universe 1 or 2 Controller s Art Net ll Universe ARTNET lt Art Net ll universe number gt Controller s Pathport Universe PATHPORT lt P
226. ments that will be set to the same step if Buddy is greater than 1 the number of elements that are repeated over is Repeat multiplied by Buddy Fade the fade time in seconds between each colour in the sequence Hold the time that each colour in the sequence is not fading Colour on colour Renders a dynamic pulse of colour passing over another colour Base Colour the base colour e Top colour the colour of the pulse Transparency select Opaque for none Base or Top Transparent to superimpose the effect onto other pro gramming Period the number of seconds that the sequence takes to complete Count the number of times that the sequence should complete over the length of the preset Repeat the number of elements to repeat the pulse over Buddy the number of elements that will be set to the same colour in the pulse if Buddy is greater than 1 the number of elements that are repeated over is Repeat multiplied by Buddy Shape the shape of the pulse Sine Triangle Square Ramp Up or Ramp Down Pulse Width the width of the pulse in percent 1 gt 200 if 100 the pulse is half of the element width Phase the offset of the pulse in degrees Reverse Direction reverses the direction of the pulse Invert Pulse changes the starting position of the pulse 73 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Intensity Renders static or dynamic intensity control Level intensity level Shape choose None static
227. mon is i f where you can choose which path to take through the script by performing tests 1 myNumber lt 5 then 215 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Se MESE Choice elseif myNumber lt 15 and myNumber gt 10 then second chorce else a Thawed cho uc end The other control structures all involve blocks of script that need to be repeated a certain number of times The most straightforward is the while loop which will repeat the enclosed block of script as long as the test at the start is true myNumber 10 while myNumber gt 0 do some useful script myNumber myNumber 1 myNumber counts down end The repeat until loop is really exactly the same but here the test is done at the end of each loop and it will repeat while the test is false myNumber 1 maxNumber 4096 repeat some useful script myNumber myNumber 2 until myNumber maxNumber Here it is worth noting the use of two equal signs to mean is equal to in a test This is different from a single equal sign which is used for assigning values It is another very common mistake to assign a value when you meant to test if it was equal and it can be hard to spot because it is valid syntax that will not generate an error The opposite of meaning is equal to is meaning is not equal to The other control structure is the for loop which has a number of powerful options beyond the scope of what we need here But it is worth seei
228. multiplied by Buddy i i i Strobe Renders a dynamic colour strobe effect on black Transparency select Opaque for none Base Transparent to superimpose the effect onto other pro gramming a oe Program Preset types amp properties Colour specifies the flash colour Period the interval in seconds between the start of each flash Duration the length in seconds of the flash A Sparkle Renders a dynamic random sparkle effect Base Colour the colour of the background Spark Colour the colour of the spark Transparency select Opaque for none Base or Spark Transparent to superimpose the effect onto other programming Period the rate of the effect larger numbers are slower Density the density of the effect in percent higher numbers more sparks ag Colour chase Renders a dynamic chase through a user specified sequence of colours Colours pressing the colour buttons will prompt for a new colour for that step Steps the number of steps in the sequence Direction choose Forwards Backwards or Bounce the latter uses two periods to complete Period the number of seconds that the sequence takes to complete Count the number of times that the sequence should complete over the length of the preset Offset Style choose None all elements are the same colour or Spread the sequence is spread over Space as well as time Repeat the number of elements to repeat the chase over Buddy the number of ele
229. n ditional statements and perform mathematical operations Designer provides sample scripts which are located in Program Files at ETC Mo saic Designer resources scripts actions WARNING Scripts are an advanced feature intended to solve problems that cannot be addressed in any other way They are not as user friendly as the normal triggers interface and incorrectly written scripts will not work as intended and could cause other problems with the operation of your Controller For help with writing scripts please see the Trigger Script Programming Guide or please contact support to discuss requirements for a par ticular project Digital Output The RIO 08 has eight relay outputs the RIO 44 has four and the RIO 80 none Use the configuration pane to select the RIO output and the state of the relay Hm Serial Output RS232 remains a very popular protocol for interfacing equipment and the RS232 port of a Controller or Remote Device can be configured to support most common data formats RS485 is a more robust alternative to RS232 better noise immunity longer cable lengths and faster data rates and is a widely supported protocol A Controller or Remote Device can be configured to send RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex in the Network view see Controller interfaces and Remote Devices A TPC with TPC RIO can send RS232 full duplex To send serial from a Controller s serial port use the Controller setting to specify the Controller num
230. n troller is set as the Time Server see Controller association use the configuration settings to determine what sort of real time event will be matched for example 5 minutes past every hour or at noon on a specific date The standard dialog allows you to deal with the most common cases including one off events or events that recur hourly daily or weekly Note that the maximum resolution of real time events is 1 second so an Any Time trigger will fire every second during the specified date range 100 Triggers Basic Date and Time Date Tire G Ever day Are Time O Week Days 5 Every How 7200 2 mrizec Once aweek Sunday O Once 00 02 00 hourmircsec C gt Once ox s There is also an advanced dialog that allows you to specify a precise mask of when the trigger should fire using a combination of year month day of the month day of the week hour minute or second Highlighted values are included in the mask and make sure all values are highlighted in any column you don t care about The trigger will fire at all times that match the specified mask in all columns so no column should be blank or the trigger will never match Date and Time Mer Vea Hours Pires a A Al damay 2000 a Februay _ March DTi E E cab hi Further information about the use of the real time clock can be found in the conditions chapter In the Network view a Controller properties option exists
231. n v1 11 press Update Firmware and the process will begin taking a few seconds to complete during which time you must not disturb the USB connection the PC nor the MSC in any way Should this process be interrupted or fail for some reason then try again Press Exit to finish 198 MSC X Recovery Tool MSC X Recovery Tool The MSC X Recovery Tool is a standalone utility for updating the MSC X s firmware MSCX Recovery Tool Step 1 Start The recovery tool requires that you plug in the Compact Flash card from the MSCX into a CF Card reader on your PC Once the card ls inserted you must correctly identify the drive Incorrectly identifying the drive can prevent your computer booting Before confirming the recovery be sure to have identified the Compact Flash card correctly When to use it To recover corrupt firmware It is possible although rare for the firmware to become corrupt when updating using the Designer software An MSC X with corrupt firmware as indicated by the status LEDs see troubleshooting can not be updated using the Designer software and so the MSC X Recovery Tool must be used instead To install a new or larger capacity card Should you wish to use a new or larger capacity Compact Flash card then you must first run this tool to format the card and install the MSC X firmware How to use it Remove the MSC X s Compact Flash card Disconnect the MSC X from the mains supply Remove the right h
232. n can generally be made in one of two ways USB This is the simplest method of connecting a Controller as it avoids Ethernet TCP IP configuration issues However the USB connection does not supply power to the Controller so an external 9 48V DC supply should be used and there are restrictions on USB cable length IMPORTANT The TPC and MSC X can not be connected via USB IMPORTANT Currently you must connect to the AVC via Ethernet in order to upload media reload firmware or view the AVC s web interface The AVC s USB connection may be used to configure the unit s IP settings Connecting the Controller via USB Connect to your computer with a standard USB cable and if necessary follow the operating system s default installation procedure though the drivers will usually be installed as part of the Designer installation Ethernet This is the most flexible method of connecting one or more Controllers and is well suited to a permanent install ation TCP IP Ethernet itself needs configuration and management in particular the setting of IP addresses DHCP default Unison Mosaic Controllers are factory set to receive an IP address from a DHCP server so one must be present on the network Link local DHCP error Should the Controller fail to find a DHCP server it will assign itself a link local IP address which can be used with Designer to establish a temporary connection However a DHCP server should be found or a Static IP addre
233. n on the plan it will automatically be added to the Browser and grouped with all other fixtures of that type Once placed left click to select it a red highlight will indicate the current selection see selecting fixtures Right click to delete group or duplicate fixtures To add a fixture 1 Use the drop down menu at the top of the library browser to select the manufacturer 2 Locate the required fixture 3 Click and drag the fixture onto the plan and release the mouse button to drop it it will automatically be added to the Browser To duplicate a fixture create an array 1 Right click on the fixture on the plan not the Browser to be duplicated 2 Select Duplicate 3 Select either Rectangle or Circle 33 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual 4 Set the duplication parameters see below 5 Press Ok For rectangular arrays positive width and height values will place the copies to the right and below respectively negative to the left and above Select either Rows or Columns to set the direction of the fixture numbering For circular arrays select the radius direction and count number of fixtures complete circles are created in this way so if arcs required just delete those fixtures that are unwanted To copy a fixture or fixture selection 1 Select the fixture s 2 Press and hold Ctrl Apple 3 Drag the copy to a new location on the plan and release the mouse button to drop with multiple fixtures
234. n the timeline Click on the Matrix directory Drag these presets onto your LED Matrix row Experiment with parameters and simulation Click on the Media directory Drag your media clip onto your one of your Matrix rows Experiment with parameters and simulation To experiment with the matrix size e g to modify the resolution or the view able area of the media return to the Media window and adjust the dimensions of the matrix the position of the pixels etc Click on the Mover directory Drag your Mover presets to one of the Mover rows Click on the Group dir ectory and drag intensity to the fixture group row to apply intensity For CMY fixtures apply colour effects Use the intensity preset to program the Conventional fixtures Create additional timelines by clicking on New Timeline Name as appropriate and program Creating Triggers 1 2 Click on the Trigger tab at the left to change to the Trigger view Note that Trigger Condition and Action directories are to the left of the worksheet area to the right are properties panes for editing parameters selecting components etc To create a Startup trigger click Start up in the Trigger directory and drag into the main worksheet area Give it a descriptive comment Drag Start Timeline from the Actions directory to the new Startup trigger row on the worksheet and under Action Data in the Actions pane select a timeline from the dropdown menu Repeat experimenting with different
235. n you next use these names then they will have the values that you assigned to them nextVariable firstVariable 5 value of nextVariable will be 15 Note that names are case sensitive i e capitals matter and once you have named a variable once then any time you use the same name you will be referring to the same variable in programming terms it is global This even applies across different scripts so you can assign a number to a variable called bob in one script and then use the number in another script by referencing bob One of the most common errors when writing scripts is trying to use a named variable before it has been assigned a value this will result in an error when the script is run It is also very easy to use the same name in two different places and not realise that you are actually reusing a single variable There is a way of dealing with this for names you want to reuse that we will touch on later Arithmetic Scripts will often need to do some arithmetic even if it is something very basic like keeping a counter of how many times it is run myCount myCount 1 All of the standard arithmetic operations are available There is also a library of mathematical functions available should it be required which includes things like random number generators Flow of Control In most scripts there will be one or more points where you want to make choices Lua provides four useful struc tures for this The most com
236. ng how it can be used to do basic loops in a slightly neater way TOP Listo do some useful script where i has value 1 to 10 end A final word of caution regarding loops be careful that you do not write a loop that will never exit This is all too easy to do by forgetting to increment a counter value that you are using in the test for the loop If your script has one of these infinite loops then the Controller will get stuck when it runs the script and be reset by the watchdog feature provided this is enabled Script is a tool for the grown ups and it will not protect you from doing silly things so make sure you test your scripts carefully before leaving them to run Tables Often you will need to store a set of values within a script these might be a list of timeline numbers or the current states of all the contact closure inputs Lua allows us to store multiple values within a single named variable and this is called a Table A table has to be created before it can be used 216 Trigger Programming Guide firstTable creates an empty table secondTable 5 3 9 7 a table with 4 entries You can then access entries within the table by indexing into it signified by square brackets The number within the square brackets identified which entry within the table you want to use or modify x secondTable 3 x now equals 9 3rd entry firstTable 1 5 entry 1 now has value 5 firstTable 7 3 entry 7
237. ngth fade amp release time and default crossfade path of newly placed presets See Preferences 70 Program Preset types amp properties Program Preset types amp properties The Program window is where you put your presentation together by dragging and dropping the built in effects and your Mover Media and Custom Presets onto your fixtures groups and Pixel Matrices Bi aa a e A E ACT l lt CREATE SELECT amp PLAY TIMELINES CONFIGURE SELECTED PRESETS PRESET FOLDERS The window comprises 4 sections On the left is the Browser in the middle the Timeline editing area with its asso ciated toolbar across the top Bottom right are the folders of Group Matrix Media Mover DALI AVC and Cus tom Presets although not all folders may be displayed Above this is the Preset Properties pane which is divided into Timing Transition and Properties all of which you use to manipulate how a preset placed on a timeline is rendered It is useful simultaneously to view the output of a timeline to check your programming thus the Simulate window can be opened at the same time as the Program window by selecting View gt Tear off simulate or by holding Ctrl Apple and pressing F8 see Simulate for details Before creating a timeline it is worth covering the seven preset types Group Presets A range of presets from simple colour fills to rainbow sparkle and chase effects These presets have no spatial awareness and are applied to
238. not work as intended and could cause other problems with the operation of your Controller For help with writing scripts please see the Trigger Script Programming Guide or please contact support to discuss requirements for a par ticular project BPS Button You can specify a condition based on the current state of a button Select the BPS and button number and whether it is pressed Down or not Up Remote Device Online Use this condition to determine if a Remote Device is online or offline with NOT checked select the type RIO or BPS and its number 121 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual A DALI Ballast Error Use this condition to determine if any or a single ballast s have reported a fixture error DALI Bus Power Use this condition to determine the electrical state of a specific DALI bus eDMX Pass Thru Detected Use this to test if a valid eDMX source is detected on the specified port See patch for more information 122 Triggers Variables Triggers Variables Variables are a way of collecting numbers from inputs and using them in actions Some examples would be e Receiving a MIDI note on message and using the note value as a timeline number to start e Using a DMX input channel to master the intensity of a group of fixtures e Receiving a serial command on one Controller and outputting a related serial command on another Triggers that capture variables gt Timeline Started
239. nputs Trigger is set to match with controller which doesn t Choose a Controller that does have analog inputs have analog inputs Trigger requires a serial port but controller doesn t l Choose a Controller that does have a serial port have a serial port Trigger is set to match with controller which requires Controller only supports one serial port so set the the serial port to be set to 1 trigger serial port to 1 Trigger requires the serial port on controller to be set Reconfigure the serial port of the Controller to use to RS232 the correct mode see Controller Interfaces Trigger uses the RS485 serial port but controller Reconfigure the trigger to use a Controller that does doesn t have an RS485 serial port have an RS285 serial port 179 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Reconfigure the trigger with the correct port number Trigger requires a valid RS485 port number 1 unless using two RS485 modules on one Con troller in which case 2 may be valid Trigger requires the serial port on controller to be set Reconfigure the serial port of the Controller to use to RS485 the correct mode see Controller Interfaces Reconfigure the trigger with the correct port number Trigger requires a valid DMX In port number 1 unless using two DMX In modules on one Con troller in which case 2 may be valid Trigger is set to match with controller which requires Controll
240. nto a group to simplify this pro cedure Secondly as the order of fixtures pixels within a group determines how programming and timing is rendered it is sometimes useful to make multiple groups of the same fixtures with different ordering 38 Selecting fixtures Finally Groups can be used to set up intensity control zones in the Triggers window I To create a group 1 Select the fixtures you want to group using the Browser the Plan or both the order you do this in determ ines the order within the group 2 Right click a member and choose Create Group From Selection or press the New Group button at the top of the Browser 3 Name the group which has been created in the Browser containing those fixtures Alternatively 1 Press New Group with no fixtures selected 2 Name this empty group 3 Drag fixture pixel selections into the group from within the Browser the order you do this in determines the order within the group 39 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Setup Fixture editor While we endeavour to provide a comprehensive library of DMX compatible fixtures a Fixture Editor is provided either to customise existing fixtures or create new ones f Finen Editor Du Custom Types HoboScan GOOD SLX m D 1 h geen o re z T AUT HO EJ Omen Do g oa o Element Da N Mame Riobo5can_6000_5L04 Clas Spot w Total Foopant 6 ee 5000 Sux A Palthpeoni anny Tae ae ae Select the Gobo or
241. ntrollers can send and receive triggers from 3rd party devices over RS232 Serial RS485 Serial and Ethernet protocols Programming these all involve entering a string of characters in the trigger parameter pane These can be entered in three formats ASCII Hex amp Decimal Essentially the format and string entered depends entirely on the other device In the Designer trigger action fields enter exactly the same string as the other device sends or is expecting to receive Simply match the string Some devices will have a fixed string For example the Dynalite button panel sends 1c0164000000ff lt c gt if but ton 1 is pressed Therefore in an RS485 trigger the same hex characters are entered in the String box Other devices may accept customisable messages allowing meaningful names descriptions or comments to be entered in an ASCII format ASCII being standard letters amp numbers In this instance you may create a string in the other device such as play timeline 6 Then in Designer the ASCII string entered for the trigger will also be play timeline 6 The action will be to start timeline 6 For a useful user interface it may be that the user choice and string may be descriptive such as red walls blue ceiling The trigger string in Designer will be red walls blue ceiling and start the appropriate timeline without the user needing to Know what the timeline number is for the desired look Variables can also be used within these Seri
242. o AA A A eS eR TY NO Nee 36 A dd plane rod 36 IX CUPS ConiguratoN Sine De ada ltd O 36 Men SI a ey te st een ae a ec hens eee 36 BY A Uh renee A R atop ee ore eee Re ee te atl 36 VOUS scroll sees 3 Sel A ee lee ae ae eee an ae hee as fata 3 Reset to Defaults 0 00 2 cee ce eee eee ee cence cece eee eeeeeeees 3 FIONIA AGC TSC Status ueser oe a dd caste 37 e AAA 38 A A TR eT Oe UE SRT eae ae 38 PAIN ess a tags ee ee ee ee ee se reeks A tae te eee eek ol 38 Select next previous fixture 0 2 2 cece eee c eee cnn nenas 38 SECC alll TITIES ch i ott o ia hates aca h hte 38 EA ac ses ea A A ee eth Nee eh ee ee 38 To create a group 2 2 2 2 cee ee eee eee cee cee cece eee eee cee eeeeeeeeceseenees 39 Setup Fixture editor ooo nro 40 PC LOY CICS Sierra Satie tte cs a ete ote ence tao e to a ted ete sues 41 EN A E 41 o IA NI Aca earn ae ae pg eee aon Saeed 41 E o AA eects hese eee IN reas E 41 NUMbDerol DACKUDS srusio annan irrita 41 AUTOS AVE MV O e dd da e o ad ti 42 Show Launch dialog ii is 42 Close Upload Dialog after successful Upload All 0 0000 000202 e eee eee eee eee ee eee 42 Saving Projects from Old Version 2 022 22 e cece cece eee eee cee cece e cece cece ee ceeceeeeees 42 Be ICE AAN Sct eh A 42 Channels AAA Nila obs eee teh is 43 A A em Rta STS ORC pert NMS ey nee eee eer ne 43 New timeline properties 2 0 22 c eee cece cece cece cece cece cece eeccececeecee
243. ol Control key is a string e g slider002 set_control_ value controlKey value set_control_state controlKey stateName set_page pageName Change the current page of the user interface set_locked lock Lock or unlock the TPC lock true of false set_enabled enable Enable or disable the user interface enable true of false Accessing the current state of the digital inputs on this Controller digital index Boolean value on input index 1 to 8 Accessing the values of DMX inputs on the local Controller DMXIN channel The value of the specified channel 1 to 512 get_dmxin x Returns a DMXIN object for port x is 1 or 2 Checking the local Controller number get_controller_number Returns the number of this Controller Checking the status of timelines local to this Controller is_timeline_running num Is timeline with specified user number between start and end time Is timeline with specified user number actually in control of fixtures on is_timeline_onstage num this Controller 209 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Injecting a trigger Equivalent to clicking a trigger in the web control screen Fires the trigger with the specified number Additional arguments are passed as variables inject_trigger num Timeline control Note that unlike a normal trigger action these will only affect the local Controller This can be a powerful additional feature in certain situations If you want to fire a timeline syst
244. om the task bar Mac OS X drag to trash Remove the card from the reader Reinsert the Compact Flash card into the MSC X reboot Reinsert the card into the MSC X and replace the front panel Reconnect the mains supply to reboot and then your project programming 201 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual AVC Recovery Tool The AVC Recovery Tool is a standalone utility for updating the firmware for both processors in the AVC Cur rently this tool can only be run on Windows AVC Recovery Tool When to use it To update the firmware for both processors in the AVC The AVC has two processors Reloading firmware from Designer updates the firmware for one of the processors the DSP but not the other the MCU Occasionally we release updates for the MCU as well as for the DSP and at this point the AVC Recovery Tool must be used To recover corrupt firmware It is possible although rare for the firmware to become corrupt when updating using the Designer software par ticularly over an Ethernet connection An AVC with corrupt firmware as indicated by the status LEDs see can not be updated using the Designer software and so the AVC Recovery Tool must be used instead 202 AVC Recovery Tool How to use it Connect the AVC via USB Use a DC supply to power the AVC and then connect to a PC with a standard USB cable If prompted to install the USB driver follow the steps in the Found New Hardware wizard
245. on allows the playback speed of a particular timeline to be modified on the fly You can select which timeline you want to control or get the timeline number from a variable The rate is specified as a per centage where 100 is the programmed rate 200 would be double speed and 50 would be half speed The rate can also be driven by a variable da Set Timeline Position The set timeline position action allows the playback position of a particular timeline to be modified on the fly typ ically the timeline would be paused to prevent it running on by itself You can select which timeline you want to control or get the timeline number from a variable The position is specified as a percentage where 0 is the start and 100 the end The position can also be driven by a variable 109 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual 2 Set Timecode Use this to set the timecode position for one of the six Time Sources set the appropriate timecode format Set Fixture RGB Use this to inhibit a fixture s RGB levels selectively either to a fixed value or to track a variable The latter makes for some very interesting realtime effects when used in conjunction with 2D and Media presets Set a fade time to introduce the change Clear Fixture RGB Use this to clear one or all fixture RGB inhibitions see above set a fade time to release the change s dh Set DALI Level Use this to set an intensity level on DALI fixtures patched to a spec
246. on is set here e Effect select the default LED effect Off Static Slow Flash etc e Intensity set the default LED intensity 0 will equal the Minimum LED Intensity as set above See advanced triggers for usage and BPS learning IR for infrared operation 163 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Report Designer can automatically produce reports to aid in producing documentation for the project s Fima bi Pj b APE POE Ti Pip e a Report toolbar Use this to select one from the range of reports Equipment Lists all the fixtures in the project The complete fixture identification is shown complete with user annotation plan position and patch information Group Lists all the groups in the project Members are listed and group usage is indicated Patch Lists the complete patch data All Timelines Provides a summary of all the timelines in the project 164 Report Timeline Provides a summary of each timeline Use the pull down to select the timeline Trigger Provides a summary of the trigger programming Complete with user annotation Network Lists all the Controllers and Remote Devices in the project KiNet Lists all the KiNet power supplies that have been added to Controllers in the project Font Lists the fonts used in Dynamic Text presets on timelines in the project Report spreadsheet All the reports are presented in spreadsheet form although none of the cells is editable t
247. on the coloured button select a colour and press Ok To move a colour click and drag the coloured button To add a new colour click anywhere on the slider where there is no button To remove a colour right click on the coloured button Period the number of seconds that the noise takes to loop Count the number of times that the noise should loop over the length of the preset X the horizontal scale higher numbers will produce more variation horizontally Y the vertical scale higher numbers will produce more variation vertically Depth the coarseness of the noise Rate the rate at which the noise varies Seed the seed of the pseudo random noise copying this value to another preset will create the same noise Randomise picks a new seed abc Dynamic text Renders a text message which can be changed at runtime Colour the colour of the text Period the number of seconds that the message takes to scroll over the matrix Count the number of times that the message should scroll over the length of the preset Text the text to render Font the font to use to render the text see the Fonts dialog below Scroll the scroll direction of the text Seamless Loop if the text is set to scroll setting this will remove the gap between the end and the start Alignment if the text is set to not scroll this is the alignment of the text Left Centre Right Mirror flips the text left to right Flip flips the text top to botto
248. on until released You should always release timelines when they are not actively affecting output More information about the differences between loop and hold at end can be found here Transparency Transparency is a very processor intensive effect for Controllers to generate Having one or two layers of trans parency on some fixtures will be fine but having several layers on a fully patched MSC 4 may cause some play back to be choppier than normal AVC Timeline Restrictions AVCs don t support timelime pausing position setting or playback rate changes 206 Lua scripts Lua scripts We use a scripting language called Lua which has been extended to provide functionality specific to the Unison Mosaic Controllers Tutorials and reference manuals for the Lua language can be found at www lua org We will not attempt to document the Lua language here but just the Unison Mosaic specific extensions Please contact support if you need assistance with preparing a script or if you would like some examples as a starting point Lua script editor The Lua Script Editor allows you to edit scripts from Triggers Conditions and Actions and Custom presets within Designer The Script Editor is launched by pressing the Launch Editor button in the trigger properties Ptas Jag ie LE Pl oS E N MM The main area of the editor is the code editor where you enter the source code of the script The code editor will colour the Lua syntax to a
249. or automated light with only a colour wheel Use the Group intensity preset to set static or dynamic intensity Create Mover presets to control the scroller or colour wheel as required 82 Program Working with timelines Matrices These are the Pixel Matrices created in Setup and Media only Matrix Media and Custom presets can be applied to this category In many ways creating matrices and working with these powerful presets is the preferred way to go with Designer Movers Unlike the categories above these rows do not specify a fixture selection but are instead simply a placeholder for any Mover presets created in the project The fixture selection is a property of the Mover preset depending as it does on the fixtures selected when the preset was created More rows can be added as required by right clicking in the Browser and selecting New Movers Row similarly to remove them DALI These rows are for the DALI ballasts and groups and will only appear if some DALI fixtures have been added to the project see DALI Note that each DALI interface has its own set of rows due to the restrictions of the DALI standard Only DALI presets can be applied to this category EJ AVC These rows are for AVCs and will only appear if audio visual devices have been added to the project Only AVC presets can be applied to these rows see Working with the Audio Visual Controller Timeline row priorities While the Latest Takes Pr
250. or use it as a seed to generate ran dom offsets for each fixture in the group Each of the sliders corresponds to a sine wave of a specific frequency The frequency of Sub is defined by the Period the default is 30 seconds 1 30Hz First will be twice as fast Second twice as fast again and and Third twice as fast as Second The value of each sine wave is used to fetch a value from a set of pre generated random values and the four results are summed The sum is used to select a position in the colour gradient to output to the fixtures Mix the different frequency components using the sliders to select how much of each component you want So if you are looking for a relatively steady flicker you might have a lot of Sub with a little bit of Third to stop it looking too regular If you want a more chaotic looking flicker then you might have less of Sub and First and more of Second and Third It really is something you have to experiment with If you want the overall flicker to have a different speed change the Period and everything will shift accordingly If you ve got a set of slider values that you like and you want to copy the effect to another group but not have both groups flickering identically then just click the Randomise button to change the offset Hue Fade Performs a fade in hue between two defined points 74 Program Preset types amp properties e Start Colour defines the hue at the start of the preset and the satur
251. ost 135 Remote Devices a eet o ts LO da os 136 Network Controller connection o oooooococcccccccccccccccncnccn cnn 137 RR O A RN EN 137 y la RES Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Connecting the Controller via USB 2 002 2202 lec cece cee cee eect eee eee eens 137 EME a occ ey arse ects E N 137 DACP e AAA II A mea eee TON Oe Oo Ok A 137 Link local DHCP error 0 0 0 22002 cece cece cece cee cee eee ee cee cee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 137 Statie IP ODHOMAl A ta 137 A AAA AA RM 137 DM o o bn e ol e tt A 138 Managed switches and firewalls 0 oooocccccccccccccccccccccccccccn cee cee tec e cece ee eee eeeeeee 138 eDMX considerations ii geet A a ais 138 Network WINKOW A 138 Sol O 139 To update a Controller s firmware 2 22 222 cee cece e ee eee eee e eee cece ec eeeeeeeeeeceeseees 139 Network Controller association _ 2 2 2 22 o ccc ccc cece cece eee cece cece nes 141 Project vs real Controllers 00 00 22 2 occ cece ccc cece ccoo nono 141 Managing project TPCs and MSCs 202 2 coco 141 To add and set the type of a project TPC or MSC 2 2 2 ce cece eee eee eee 142 To delete a project TPC or MSC 02 ccc cece ce ec cece eee cee cece eee nnno 142 Managing project AVCS occ cnc 142 Associating project Controllers with real Controllers 0 00 00 2000 2 e eee eee eee eee eee ee 142 To associate a Controller o 2 22 22 c ccc cece cece cece cee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees
252. ostra pte o a a St nesta uae a siones 91 a AA A 92 AUTE sa o e aa 92 Timing amp transitions lis 92 AAA AT 92 A eT eT ne ered ee een Te EEO ee Ee 92 PAV DOCK A A ea aaa ett aa noe eas vie ae toa A O 92 A E rene A 92 Players amp limitations rt ais 93 Dare OE MA A a a A e UOT SY Set ENT 93 Timing transitions amp precedente 94 A A A A me ore ee ON EE 94 TANS IH OM UI nr na in e a S 94 A Feta Mee oR ae eh neg ci Re ee la ee Sot 94 FR a o eee ee ee eras ee Oe eek one Za a 94 FM Vics ces A eee a ek a cea a o e a 94 Transition skews Group amp Mover presets 1D 0 00 0200222 e cece cece eee ce cee cee cece eee ee eeees 94 SW IR o e aE PRE We NOPE e POC TS a as EN OT 94 Ba AA A ees oceania bs 95 FSM sence ae ee ag artes ae eee eases eh epee ere epee eee ees 95 AA 95 Transition skews Matrix 4 Media presets 2D 00 0oooooocccccccccccccccccccccccccnccncccnccnc noc 95 SKEW O a ern e a a es ce ela in MN 95 e O SR A 95 o A AS IE 95 SN A A RS 95 AA A A A 96 TOGE OVENICEW ir os Do De ieee ae A a id 97 Creating a Migger usara ed e ri aa 97 COnMOQUMNG atm ts cia es 97 Inhibiting a trigger 25 oath ne et Sona e peice aanste ok 98 Incompletely defined triggers 0 202 2 cece cece cece cee cece ccoo 98 Trigger order amp matching 0 2 0 2 o ccc e cece ccc cee eee ee cee cee eee e eee eee eee ee eeeeceeeeeeeeees 98 Changing the trigger order 0 0 22 o occ cece cee cee cee cee eee cee cece cece eee rnor 9
253. ou can set an alpha value to blend the colour with the clip running on the main row This preset does not require a player eu Audio mixer Used to set the levels of the main effect and live input audio can only be placed on the audio mixer row By default only the main row audio is output but this preset allows you to alter the mix to include the effect and live input audio Timing amp transitions All the AVC presets provide control for an In and Out time each with the option to select a transition effect Dis solve Wipe etc Use the Transition pane with the preset selected on the timeline In Specifies the duration of the transition analogous to the fade time in lighting The default is O seconds When two clips abut on a timeline row it is the second clip s In time that is used to perform the overall transition from one to the other and not the first preset s Out time See below Out Specifies the duration of the fade out release of a preset when no preset immediately follows it on a timeline row The default is O seconds Playback Precedent For flexibility and consistency with lighting playback each AVC row operates independently using the Latest Takes Precedent Plus LTP system It is thus possible for example to create timelines that contain just main 92 Program Working with the Audio Visual Controller row programming and timelines with just overlay row programming so that these can be mixed at playb
254. ously when this process has completed successfully 139 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Once all the connected Controllers have compatible firmware you can associate them with project Controllers and configure their hardware and any attached Expansion modules 140 Network Controller association Network Controller association It is here that you connect your project programming in Designer with real networked Unison Mosaic Controllers PROPERTIES TAB _ lt MANAGE CONTROLLERS CONTROLLER IDENTIFICATION SSE Sy i A CONTROLLERS IN THE PROJECT amp ON THE NETADRK lt MANAGE REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICES INTHE PROJECT amp ON THE NETWORK Project vs real Controllers The list of Controllers is split into two sections At the top is the list of project Controllers which may or may not be associated with real Controllers Underneath is a list of all the unused real Controllers found on the network that have not been associated with project Controllers When you create a new Designer project a single MSC with 2 output universes is added to get you started These project Controllers are purely virtual and so must be associated with a real Controller on the network before you can or IMPORTANT You can only associate a Controller running the same firmware as Designer Controllers running incompatible firmware will be displayed in red To update a connected Controller s firmware see
255. pari Mezilla Fineton aok me i p Ma Bhk g View output Select the Protocol DMX Port to examine a numerical snapshot of the control data being output refreshed every 5 seconds Select DVI to examine a graphical snapshot of the pixel matrix output Use in conjunction with Control and Status pages to debug an installation Park and Unpark Password protected if set Enter admin for the User Name and then the password Park allows you to lock the value of a particular channel without actually altering your programming This can be useful to turn off a fixture that is misbehaving temporarily or to make sure a working light stays on while you are programming Park can be accessed from the output view of the web interface simply enter the channel or range of channels and the value at which to park Parked channels are shown in red within the output view There is the option to Unpark from the same view Parked channels will remain parked when you upload shows or output live However all parked channels will be cleared if the Controller is reset or the power is cycled 169 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual ptos MSCI Foyer LPC Mrgani Morita Fivefar olka He pa Ne Feia bokss J FL E T E A de pc 149 0 e ri Ed Cigtal inputs DMX Select the DMX input or Expansion Module s if any connected to examine a snapshot of the DMX values being input useful for debugging DMX triggering and control Digital inputs Us
256. pond to multiple sliders by using variables the syntax is the same as for Serial and Ethernet Input triggers e g slider lt 3d gt will match a slider with the control key slider001 or slider002 etc and capture the number as a variable See actions that use variables for how to make use of the captured variables The value of the slider will be captured as a variable The slider value will always be the first variable any vari ables captured from the control key string will be stored in subsequent variables MH TPC Colour Change Whenever a colour picker in a TPC user interface is touched triggers of this type will be checked for a match Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Picker drop down list from the Touch Editor pro ject see Controller Properties The Picker field should be set to the Control Key of the colour picker you re interested in this is a property of col our pickers that is set in Touch Editor Either pick a control key from the list or type it in You can use one trigger to respond to multiple colour pickers by using variables the syntax is the same as for Serial and Ethernet Input triggers e g colour lt 3d gt will match a colour picker with the control key colour001 or colour002 etc and capture the number as a variable See actions that use variables for how to make use of the captured variables The RGB colour will be captured as a variables 1 2 and 3 Any variables captur
257. poses e Absorb on match uncheck to prevent the trigger absorbing the match see below e Parameters the data required for each trigger type varies by type so refer to the appropriate trigger descriptions 97 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Inhibiting a trigger For testing purposes it is sometimes useful to inhibit one or more triggers to examine more clearly the operation of others A trigger can be inhibited by setting the controller number to None so that no controller processes the trig ger the row details will be displayed in grey Incompletely defined triggers If triggers conditions actions are not completely defined then they are highlighted in red to indicate that they need further attention Trigger order amp matching The order in which triggers are displayed in the Trigger screen is the order in which they are tested by the system Once a trigger is successfully matched then if Absorb on match is checked no further triggers are tested for that event the event is absorbed Thus this trigger order is important particularly when using conditions If you had two identical triggers in your show then assuming they had no conditions only the first one encountered would ever be matched However if you add a condition to the first trigger then it will only match when the condition is true and when it is false the second trigger will match instead The ability to have the same trigger have different results ba
258. project file click the clear button Set the backlight brightness for normal operation and for when the TPC has been inactive for a period of time The inactivity time is also set here along with the time before the screen turns off completely 149 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Set whether the backlight brightness should automatically adjust for changes in the ambient light level and whether the screen should turn on if the proximity sensor detects someone walking up to it AVC AV devices can be configured to set the output format for your connection to the device Composite S video or Component as well as the input format Choose a background colour for the video screen default is black In situations where it is necessary to lock the refresh timing of the video screen to be the same as another video signal then you should connect the other video signal to the appropriate AVC s video input and select the Gen lock enabled option IMPORTANT Genlock is only required in very specific circumstances such as when the screen is being viewed by cameras and it should be left unselected in all other situations The AVC s default audio level can be set here the default is main row audio at full 255 Playback Refresh Rate TPC and MSC only Select between Normal 33Hz default recommended High 44Hz or Low 20Hz useful for older fixtures with DMX compatibility issues Real Time If your project uses r
259. r file storage and retrieval typically the exported Designer project file to ensure that this remains on site with the installation for future maintenance Note that files to be transferred in this way must adhere to the MS DOS 8 3 naming con vention File transfer should not be confused with Upload To transfer files to and from a Controller s memory card 1 Select the Controller 2 Press the File Transfer button on the Controller toolbar 3 A file browser will open to allow you to move files to and from the Controller s card the password will be required to gain access if one has been set 4 Close the file browser to finish 143 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Mac OS X users Pressing the File Transfer button in the Network pane will launch an FTP client on Mac OS X By default this cli ent is Finder and Finder doesn t allow write access to FTP servers In order to send files to a Controller from Mac OS X you will need to install another FTP client We recommend Cyberduck http cyberduck ch which is free When you first run Cyberduck you should be prompted to make it the default FTP client You should choose to do this If you are not prompted or Cyberduck is not used as the FTP client when attempting to perform a file transfer to a Controller go to the Preferences in Cyberduck and under the FTP tab there is a Default Protocol Handler option Set this to Cyberduck Controller status The fields in the con
260. r the length of the timeline unless overridden by another Mover preset such an override taking place by fixture parameter kind on the Latest Takes Precedent basis For example a Mover preset that only sets a fixture s beam parameters will not interfere with a 87 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual previous Mover preset that set its position This position will remain active until such time that a Mover preset is encountered that does set this fixture s position in which case this new position will now become active TIP lt is possible to add more Mover rows and delete them so that more than two Mover presets can be run sim ultaneously right click gt New Mover Row It is important to remember to set the intensity for movers by dragging the Intensity preset onto the timeline to determine when and for how long the movers are on Movers that can colour mix should have a Fixed Colour or an effect preset applied to turn them on and set their colour DALI presets DALI presets can be dropped onto the DALI ballasts and groups for each DALI interface in the project see DALI DALI presets should be thought of as commands instructing the DALI ballasts or groups to fade to a level or scene with the ballasts retaining this level or scene indefinitely regardless of the state of the timeline Unlike DMX fixtures there exists no notion of a released default state and so DALI ballasts must be explicitly turned off with a preset B
261. ral Patch Timelines Triggers Network Advanced Intensity model C Percent 8 bit Colour model 4 RGB O Coy Number of backups to keep 1 ie Autosave interval Never Show Launch Dialog at startup Close Upload Dialog after successtul Upload All When saving project loaded from old version Always Ask Cancel Intensity model Choose whether intensity and DALI presets are programmed using Percent 0 gt 100 or 8 bit 0 gt 255 values Colour model Choose whether colours are specified using RGB additive or CMY subtractive values the latter might feel more natural for moving light console users Number of backups Designer can keep a number old versions of the project file when you save and it is here that you set the number of old files to keep Before saving your project File gt Save or Ctrl S Designer will rename the project file on 41 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual disk by adding the current time and date to the file name such as my_project_bak_ 2007 04 18 15 58 09 mdp If you already have the specified number of backups the oldest backup will be removed from the disk Use File gt Save As to produce manual backups of the project at each important programming milestone Autosave interval Designer can periodically create an automatic backup of your programming and it is here that you turn this feature on and set the backup interval in minutes Designer will maintain a backup file named my_p
262. rce use the Controller setting to specify which Controller has the TPC RIO and leave the Device as Local To trigger from a RIO D set Device to RIO D and select the number of the RIO D or leave this set to Any to cause the trigger to attempt to match against DALI input from any RIO D In this case the RIO D number will be captured as variable The RIO D TPC with TPC RIO and DALI S Expansion Module snoop the DALI bus and so the trigger can be set up to respond to any DALI commands Command select Direct Level 0 gt 254 Scene or Relative Level Address select All Group 0 gt 15 or Ballast 1 gt 64 Min Max select the level to match for Direct Level triggering or Scene select the scene 1 gt 16 for Scene matching or Type select the type of Relative Level command to match The RIO D and TPC RIO both recognise DALI input from Light Sensors and Occupancy Sensors that utilise eDALI When triggering from an Occupancy Sensor select which state is to be matched When using a Light Sensor specify what range of light level 0 gt 254 is to be matched See the table below for light levels DALI Bus Power RIO D or TPC with TPC RIO required 108 Triggers Advanced Use this trigger if you want to act upon a change of the electrical state of a specific DALI bus Buses can be in one of three states Correct Power Incorrect Power and No Power BPS Button The BPS has eight buttons which can be used as triggers
263. reated the Custom Presets folder will not be displayed 81 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Program Working with timelines Now that we ve taken a look at the preset types let s see how to apply them to create a timeline lt CREATE SELECT amp PLAY TIMELINES CONFIGURE SELECTED PRESETS PRESET FOLDERS Creating a timeline To create a timeline click New Timeline and a fresh set of blank rows will appear to the right of each Browser entry Use the pane to name the timeline the default length of which is 5 minutes which can be changed using the Length text box as required timeline length is really just a user interface setting and can generally be left at the default value Timeline row categories There are five categories of timeline row which determine the preset type that can be deployed on them E Groups and fixtures The majority of the timeline rows will be your groups of fixtures the all groups created by the system as you added fixtures and the g you made to organise your programming Only Gra can be applied to this category Click the plus sign to expand a group and expose its members Y A fixture or element within a compound fixture capable of colour mixing for example an RGB LED or auto mated light with CMY colour mixing Use the Group colour presets to set static or dynamic intensity and colour A fixture incapable of colour mixing for example a conventional light with without a scroller
264. reen or projector then you will want to add one or more AVCs However unlike MSCs project AVCs are added or deleted only when you add or delete a gen eric AV fixture in Setup Associating project Controllers with real Controllers Once you have added and configured your project Controllers all that is required for programming and simulating you must associate them with real Controllers on the network To associate a Controller Select the project Controller by clicking the left hand button the row will highlight In Controller Properties use the Device Serial pull down to chose a real Controller of the same type to asso ciate the serial number can be found on the base of the AVC MSC 1 2 amp 4 TPC and rear of the MSC X 3 The real Controller will move from the Unused Controllers list and fuse with the project Controller so com pleting the row details NO To identify a Controller beacon 1 Select an associated project Controller or unused Controller Press the Beacon button on the Controller toolbar all the Controller s status LEDs will flash The screen backlight of the TPC will pulse 3 Press Beacon again to return the Controller to normal operation 142 Network Controller association Once all your project Controllers have been associated with real Controllers you can configure them test your pro gramming on the installation itself and finally upload to the Controllers for stand alone operation Time
265. res 2 hours on a fully patched MSC 2 and so you can easily replace the card for one of greater capacity please contact support for recom mended cards 186 Frequently asked questions Are there any diagnostic tools The LED status indicators on the Controllers serve a dual purpose In normal operation they indicate system func tionality and activity In an error state they provide diagnostics refer to the Installation Guide for details There is also an MSC recovery procedure and an MSC X Recovery Tool When should I use reset The reset button provides a convenient way to cycle power It has exactly the same effect There is no recom mendation to reset the Controllers periodically Should I keep Controllers in the field up to date with the latest firmware No not unless you know that a problem you are having would be solved with an update or you need to change the programming and need the new Designer features For minor tweaks it s probably best to install the relevant Designer version and do it with that As a rule if it s working leave it be What warranty does ETC offer Unison Mosaic hardware is warranted for 5 years Please contact support if you are experiencing any issues What user serviceable parts are there in a Controller or Remote Device The Unison Mosaic product range has been designed for longevity and reliability There is almost nothing user ser viceable apart from a battery for the realtime clock and
266. ro grammers guide for help on creating a custom preset from scratch 66 Program Timeline Properties Program Timeline Properties With no presets selected the Timeline Properties pane is displayed E CREATE SELECT amp PLAY TIMELINES CONFIGURE TIMELINE Name Give your timeline a name here a descriptive name will help you identify the correct timeline when creating and viewing the status and control pages Number Every timeline has a unique number which is primarily for reference but can be changed if necessary The timeline number is used to identify a timeline for creating rs for example when using scripts and when using the web interface s command line Length The default timeline length is 05 00 00 5 minutes and you will need to increase this before placing or extending presets beyond this time The maximum timeline length is 24 hours to prevent them becoming unmanageable use triggers to stitch together multiple timelines to create longer time frames Priority Use the pull down to select a priority level for the timeline High the timeline will never be overridden Above normal Normal the timeline behaves normally and can be overridden Below normal Low the timeline can not override other timelines 67 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Time source Use the pull down to select a time source for the timeline to follow e Internal the timeline will run autonomously although play
267. ro channels Designer has been developed to get the most out of compound fixtures typically LED bat tens tubes and tiles by driving each pixel individually without help or complication virtual intensity channels are created as required and arrays can be constructed onto which effects and media far more powerful than any built in function can be applied and precisely controlled If in doubt please contact support 185 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Hardware Which revision of MSC 1 amp 2 hardware do have MSCs with serial numbers 006xxx and higher are a revised version of the original hardware The core func tionality is the same but the revised hardware features improved performance and enhanced connectivity such as RS485 and DMX inputs Below is a list of the distinguishing features to help tell the hardware apart from a visual inspection e Product name on the front label of the revised MSC is MSC product name on the original hardware is MSC 1 or MSC 2 The channel capacity of the revised hardware is indicated on the serial number on the rear of the unit e Revised MSC has an Output LED on the front original hardware does not e Revised MSC has a 3 pin multi protocol serial connecter original hardware has a 9 pin D type RS232 con nector e Revised MSC has no expansion bus connector on the side original hardware does e Revised MSC has an SD card slot on the side original hardware has a Compact Flash card s
268. roject_auto mdp which can be opened to retrieve recent programming in the event of a software crash This file will be deleted if the Designer project is closed normally Show Launch dialog Choose whether the Launch dialog is automatically opened at startup default uncheck this box to suppress this dialog Close Upload Dialog after successful Upload All Check this to have the Upload Dialog close automatically after a successful Upload All Saving Projects from Old Version Choose what Designer should do when saving projects that were last saved in an earlier version of the software This can be a useful prompt to keep a backup of your work Patch Select the Patch tab to change the default settings for patching 49 Preferences Preferences General Patch Timelines Triggers Network Advanced Channels Per iow 16 if 3 Cancel Channels per row The Channels per row entry box lets you determine how many DMX channels per row are displayed which is use ful for organising the display for complex fixtures set this number to be a multiple of the number of channels a fix ture uses to get a neater tabulated display Timeline Select the Timelines tab to change the default settings for timelines and presets 43 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Preferences de ES General Patch Timelines Triggers Network Advanced New Timelne Properties Mame Unnamed Timeline Length 5 00 0
269. roller whose log you wish to view Press the Clear button to clear the log 195 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual TPC recovery The TPC has a built in failsafe against firmware problems it stores two versions of firmware So if one copy of the firmware fails to load or becomes corrupted due to a loss of power during a firmware reload the other can be used instead However in the event that the TPC will not startup there is a method to recover the TPC using the memory card Please follow these instructions carefully DARON CO O ON Remove the memory card from the TPC and insert it into your computer Wipe all files on the memory card ensure you have made any necessary backups Locate the firmware directory in the Designer installation directory or app bundle Copy the file tpc fw from the firmware directory to the memory card On the memory card rename the tpc fw file to toc app Reinsert the memory card into the TPC and restart the TPC The TPC will boot but will take longer to boot than normal Please be patient and wait for the Active LED to illuminate continuously Connect to the TPC using Designer and reload the firmware as normal Remove the memory card from the TPC and insert it into your computer again Delete the toc app file from the memory card Reinsert the memory card into the TPC and restart the TPC To locate the firmware directory in the app bundle on Mac OS X please follow these steps PwWN gt
270. rt of a networked system to learn IR codes all that is required is PoE power and the donor remote control To enter Learn Mode 1 Enter by pressing the CFG config button This is located underneath the magnetic overlay at the top left of the display underneath the Reset button e Thescreen will display the IR configuration interface To learn an IR code 1 Press the Set button alongside the code to be learnt e A progress indication will appear on the left of the row 2 Within ten seconds point the IR remote at the TPC and press the desired key e The progress indication will be replaced with a tick icon when the code has been learnt To test an IR slot 1 Point the IR remote at the TPC and press a key e Ifthe IR code received is associated with an IR slot the slot will be highlighted 2 Release the key on the IR remote e The IR slot will no longer be highlighted To erase an IR code 1 Press the Clear button alongside the code to be erased e Thetick icon next to the code will disappear To exit Learn Mode 1 Press the CFG config button e The screen will display the user interface for the loaded presentation or indicate that no user interface is present on the memory card 240 BPS learning infrared receiver BPS learning infrared receiver The BPS may be taught to recognise up to 8 different infrared IR codes from a standard IR remote control When a key on the remote control is pressed d
271. rto only trigger when the temperature enters a specified range Enters range Enters range is generally more useful when you are using temperature changes to trigger timelines but Changes in range would be required if you were using the temperature reading as a variable passed to a Set Intensity action to control the intensity for a group 115 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual TPC actions Set TPC Control Value Use this action to show feedback on TPC controls by changing their current value s Currently the Slider and Col our Picker controls support this Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Control drop down list from the Touch Editor project see Controller Properties Set the Control field to the target control key or use the variable injection syn tax to make this action work for several controls with similar control keys the syntax is the same as for the Serial and Ethernet Output action Set the Index field to the index of the value that should be changed For a Slider this should always be 1 but for a Colour Picker it could be 1 2 or 3 to set red green or blue The index can alternatively be set from a variable Fin ally choose the value to set or elect to set this from a variable Set TPC Control State Use this action to show feedback on TPC controls by changing their appearance The theme applied to an Touch Editor project contains various states for each control
272. running the Designer software will need greater performance particularly the OpenGL graphics system as the project size increases For very large projects or projects where some of the above limitations are restrictive please contact support to discuss your requirements in advance Best Practices Just like any other computational device Controllers have a finite amount of resources available to them 205 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Triggering and playback expectations The Unison Mosaic system is designed to spread the load across all Controllers in a project You can aid this by patching fixtures as evenly as possible across all Controllers As well as lighting playback Controllers are often used as interfaces to a wider system This was intentional and is why the system is so flexible but bear in mind that if a Controller is being asked to deal with a substantial amount of incoming triggers or outgoing actions Such as Ethernet or serial communications then this may have a negative impact on show playback and system responsiveness If you have any questions about this please contact support with your project requirements and we ll be happy to advise Looping and holding at end If you need a timeline to run continuously we d always recommend setting it to hold at end rather than loop where appropriate A looping timeline requires significantly more processing power because the Controller has to track the time positi
273. s are provided from the Media window to peruse these vendors websites to obtain additional media for your project 64 Media Media Slots Select the Media Slots tab Media slots are placeholders for Media Presets and can only be played on MSC Pixel Matrices Create a Media Slot by clicking Create New in the Media Slots pane A Media Slot can be renamed using the name text box underneath the Media Slots directory The selected Media Slot can be deleted by clicking the Delete button The content for Media Slots is created using a separate utility application Unison Mosaic MediaManager When you have finished creating your Designer project go to File gt Export for Media Manager to save details about your Media Slots to a mdx file Create a new project in MediaManager and import the mdx file You can now program content onto each media slot It is possible to import mdx files from multiple Designer projects into a single Medi aManager project in order to aid media management for large installations Please refer to the MediaManager help for further details Whenever you make a change to the fixtures patch or programming in your Designer project you must go to File gt Export for Media Manager and then import the generated file into your existing MediaManager project When you ve exported your media from MediaManager you can upload it to your controllers using Unison Mosaic RemoteManager Please refer to the RemoteManager help
274. s condition will test whether the last received value for a particular DMX channel is within the specified range The Port setting is only necessary if using DMX IN Expansion Modules with the original MSC hardware In this case you can select between port 1 and 2 in the order they are connected to the MSC l Script Use this to run a Lua script where the returned value determines whether the condition is true or not Press Launch Editor to open the script editing dialog If you can not achieve what you want with the conditions provided It is almost certain that a script can be defined to solve your problem The Unison Mosaic Controllers support a scripting language that can be used for handling complicated con ditional triggering or other advanced control requirements The user can write scripts and set them to run in response to any trigger event From within a script you can do all the things that you can do with a trigger in the triggers screen access passed in variables test conditions and perform actions but you can also define more complicated conditional statements and perform mathematical operations Designer provides sample scripts which are located in Program Files at ETC Mo saic Designer resources scripts conditions WARNING Scripts are an advanced feature intended to solve problems that cannot be addressed in any other way They are not as user friendly as the normal triggers interface and incorrectly written scripts will
275. s for further information on Paradigm integration DMX IN The TPC and MSC X support Art Net and sACN input Select the Art Net or sACN universe to listen to For the original MSC 1 amp 2 hardware the DMX Input Expansion Module allows one or more Controllers to be con trolled by any USITT DMX512 compatible system There are no configuration options In both cases see advanced triggers and conditions for usage RS485 The RS485 Expansion Module allows one or more Controllers to receive or transmit RS485 serial command strings to facilitate interfacing to show control and user interface devices The configuration options are Receive Transmit check the appropriate box as required Baud rate select the baud rate Data bits select the number of data bits typically 8 Stop bits select the number of stop bits Parity select the parity type See advanced triggers and conditions for usage LTC The LTC Expansion Module reads all Linear Timecode LTC formats allowing a presentation to be synchronised with audio visual or show control equipment The configuration options are e Route To select one of the six Timecode Buses to which the timecode should be routed e Regenerate for select the number of frames that should automatically be generated in the case of loss of a valid signal e Ignore jumps for select the number of frames that should be considered a valid jump in the timecode value The Timecode Viewer is av
276. s in the project together with user annotation are listed here and can be fired by clicking on them Since a network of multiple Controllers share triggers firing triggers from one Controller s web interface will trig ger all the Controllers in the project Triggers on the default Control web page will not test conditions create a custom page if condition testing is required Dynamic text slots All the Dynamic text slots are listed with their current value You can edit any text slot and changes will take effect according to the preset settings on the timeline immediately next cycle on timeline restart Configuration Password protected if set Enter admin for the User Name and then the password 172 Web interface Default pages N AB Fiero USET Foes LPC gt Configurstica harita Firei atj me tia Nes Pelo A u Qe E Pe di Bee 109 0 ideado map AN E Settings Put Ara AO AA All the Controller s configuration settings are displayed and can be changed here see configuration for details Remote upload In addition at the bottom of the page is the means to upload a project file remotely via the web interface as an alternative to uploading directly from Designer See the network section to learn how to generate a file for remote uploading IMPORTANT Controllers must be running the same version of firmware as the Designer software Uploading a project file to a Controller running different f
277. s tab will be opened automatically and a description of each issue will be listed so that you can take corrective action or you can ignore and proceed if you like Issue will provide the specific details Controller isn t associated with a physical controller Controller is associated with serial number which isn t found on the network Controller has an IP address clash Controller is found on the network but has the wrong firmware Controller is on the wrong network Controller uses the same network for management and protocol ports Solution Associate the Controller see Controller association Connect the Controller see Controller connection Check the Controller s IP settings don t clash with any other devices on the network see Controller con figuration Update the Controller s firmware see Controller con nection Change the Controller s IP settings see Controller configuration MSC X network interfaces must be connected to the same physical network if they are both on the same IP network This issue serves as a reminder The time server cannot support all of the RIO Ds in the pro There are more RIO Ds in the project than the Con ject Controller new location information will make internal clock differ from local time Controller internal clock differs from local time by greater than 5 minutes Controller has Reset to Defaults DIP switch set Controller
278. s to ensure that such timelines are explicitly released when no longer needed Uploading was working ok but now always fails The memory card has become corrupt and must be formatted use network configuration or the web interface When try to Upload I see a list of issues instead Designer will check things like triggers and hardware configuration to make sure that there are no incon sistencies If any issues are found the Issues tab will be opened automatically and a description of each issue will be listed so that you can take corrective action see Issues Is there a way of seeing what the Controller is doing Yes Controllers generate a log which can be viewed either via the web interface or from within Designer using View gt Controller Log on the main toolbar 191 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual F Comroller Log Window a Siwt Condi AM Cnn IF Man 14 40 18 Meno nega ales papd kad ieia SPARE used PEO bee MATTEL A 1 He 14 2 139 Ars Cee Hua ee 70 Aes core TELA 1 a HAL PICA Sl re Lia Use the Select Controller pull down to view the Controller of interest the verbosity detail of the log can be changed using Controller configuration get a Magic number does not match error when opening a project file You are trying open a project file that was created and saved with a later major version of Designer for example using Designer v1 1 x to open a file created with v1 2 x While we endeavour to maintain b
279. se addresses by default The bottom half of the Network window allows you to manage and configure any Remote Devices in the project and found on the network 159 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual CONFIGURE SELECTED DEVICE Project vs real Remote Devices The list of Remote Devices is split into two sections At the top is the list of project devices which may or may not be associated with real devices Underneath is a list of all the unused real devices found on the network that have not been associated with project devices Managing project Remote Devices To add and set the type of a project Remote Device 1 2 3 Press the Add Device button on the Remote Device toolbar In the Add Remote Device dialog select the device type RIO 80 RIO 44 RIO 08 RIO A RIO D BPS Choose the device s number the address selected on the device itself see Associating Remote Devices below Choose the device s controller Press OK the Remote Device will be added to the project and associated to a real device if one of the cor rect type and address is found on the network 160 Network Remote Devices To delete a project Remote Device 1 Select the project Remote Device by clicking the left hand button the row will highlight 2 Press Delete Device on the Remote Device toolbar 3 The Remote Device will be removed from the project and if no longer associated at all the real device will move to the Unused list R
280. sed on a condition is very powerful For instance you might have a single digital input that starts one timeline during the day and another during the night Changing the trigger order You can either select and drag the trigger up or down within the management area to redefine the order or use the ES and Y buttons on the Trigger configuration pane Absorb on match In some cases it is useful for a matched trigger not to absorb the event and thus allow triggers further down the list so there exists the option to disable the default behaviour for triggers other than Realtime amp Astronomical clock which default to unchecked by unchecking the Absorb on match box for each trigger as required Conditions If you wish to constrain the trigger with a condition then drag one from the directory and drop it into the Condition field of the trigger or press the F button on the Condition configuration pane and use the pull down menu to select the required type see conditions Up to 32 conditions can be applied to each trigger in this way and you can use the lt and gt buttons to select each one for configuration Configuring a condition e Type the condition type e NOT check to invert the operation of the condition e Parameters the data required for each condition type varies by type so refer to the appropriate condition descriptions 98 Trigger Overview Removing a condition Use the E and gt buttons to sele
281. selected based on the level of activity Hopefully by now you have a pretty good idea of how you could keep a count of the number of digital inputs using script The new element here is a need for a 15 second timer We don t do this using script alone but make use of the timeline facilities the Controller already offers First the easy bit for each digital input there is a trigger and they all run the same very simple script count count 1 Create a timeline that has no lighting programming but has a flag at 15 seconds We set the timeline to loop and add a startup trigger that runs it A trigger on that flag will now fire every 15 seconds while the Controller is running and we set it to run the following script make sure that count has a value not first time IE cota Chen decide which of the 4 timelines to Ttun LE Count lt 5 then stare came liane 1 elseirr count lt 0 then Stari Gimeline 2 elseif count lt 15 then stare bime lane 3 else start timeline 4 end end now reset count count 0 Ideally we should also run this script on startup to initialise count otherwise any digital inputs during the first 15 seconds will try to use count before it has a value and the script will fail this will not harm anything or cause the Controller to fail it will just leave rude messages in the activity log Initially we have got the timer timeline running continuously What if we only wanted to count for
282. selecting to install the driver automatically Run the tool On Windows this tool can be launched from the Start menu under Programs gt Mosaic gt Designer Unison Mosaic Designer must be closed before launching this tool To update the firmware to the latest version v1 11 press Update Firmware and the process will begin taking a few seconds to complete during which time you must not disturb the USB connection the PC nor the AVC in any way Should this process be interrupted or fail for some reason then try again Press Exit to finish 203 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Software release notes Release Notes These are provided with the installation Readme file Software Licences GPL Portions of this software are licensed under the GNU General Public License version 2 The license is available in the file gpl v2 license txt contained in the Unison Mosaic Designer install directory To obtain this software either visit www carallon com or send a stamped self addressed envelope containing a blank CD to GPL Compliance Carallon Limited Studio G20 Shepherds Building Rockley Road London W14 ODA England 204 System limits amp capacities System limits amp capacities Unison Mosaic Designer imposes the following project limits which can not be exceeded Groups 1024 Fixtures 30000 Discrete or compound fixtures uc clemenis 60000 Elements or pixels within compound fixtures eg 18 per James Tho m
283. ss set to establish a permanent connection Static IP optional It is sometimes desirable to set a Static IP address so that the IP address of the Controller is always known DHCP served IP addresses can change Refer to Controller configuration Multicast Unison Mosaic Controllers and Remote Devices also use a block of Multicast addresses for discovery and Remote Device communication so these addresses must be available 230 0 0 0 230 0 3 1 230 0 3 2 amp 230 0 3 3 137 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Default gateway Must be consistently set to either nothing or a valid IP address Managed switches and firewalls Managed Ethernet switches and your PC s Security Firewall can conspire to make life difficult by blocking Mult icast addresses for example ETC recommends the use of Unmanaged switches and disabling your PC s Fire wall if you re experiencing connection problems eDMX considerations While the MSC X has a second dedicated Ethernet Protocol port with its own IP settings the TPC and MSC 1 2 amp 4 must share their single Ethernet port However this single Ethernet port can be configured with two IP addresses making it easier to manage routing of output protocol data See Controller Protocols For further information about the Controller hardware and its input output ports please refer to the Installation Guide supplied with the unit or on the CD in PDF form Network window Once you have conne
284. t Intensity taking a level from the input The inject trigger function allows us to pass additional arguments after the trigger number that will be available to the action as trigger variables Interpreting data from a wind direction sensor A Controller is controlling an LED fa ade on all four sides of a tower block A wind direction sensor is connected to the Controller via RS232 Every second it sends the character X then a 3 digit number to the Controller which is the wind direction in degrees The client wants the windward side of the building to always be red the leeward side to be blue and the other two sides to be green We ll create four timelines that correspond to the correct lighting for the wind on each face of the building We then need an RS232 input trigger that matches the three digit decimal number as a wildcard so that it will be stored as a trigger variable The wildcard for this would be X lt 3d gt for more information on this refer to the manual Whenever the RS232 input trigger makes a successful match it will run the following script get the value in degrees dir variable 1 which face is getting the wind LE dir lt 30 Aachen stare TIMELINE elseif dir lt 180 then start timeline 2 eLsert dir 270 then Start timeline 3 else start timeline 4 end 222 Trigger Programming Guide Of course here have assumed that the corners of the building neatly line up with 0 90 180 and 27
285. t Timeline Statuses ooo nn 247 SAN PE RESPONS Caer eens aoe och awe eet era ace ee ey eee 247 NO a o Ee Ee Nee a ene eer nae 247 ESAS E AN A A MEST AT ERR ES SNE 247 Sample Response ns 247 PU OS a pi A AS A NI She cre teen 248 18 Contents Get Global Lua Variables Example Glossary Sample Response Notes 19 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Welcome Introduction Welcome and thank you for using version v1 11 of the Unison Mosaic Designer software This release offers some significant improvements and additional functionality over earlier versions see what s new for details WARNING Projects saved with v1 11 can not be opened with earlier versions so please make sure to back up your programming prior to installation Platforms Unison Mosaic Designer is designed to run on a Microsoft Windows 7 Vista or XP SP2 or Apple Mac OS X 10 4 x or later Intel or PowerPC personal computer As the application is of a highly graphical nature a large monitor is recommended 1024x768 minimum and the extensive use of OpenGL graphics routines will benefit from a high performance graphics card USB or Ethernet support will be required to connect to the Unison Mosaic hardware Apple QuickTime Apple QuickTime 6 5 or later must be installed to run Designer and QuickTime 7 is supplied on the Unison Mosaic Designer installation CD QuickTime is also available for download at Apple QuickTime Player Help Overview
286. t cea A A AT 239 A A A A E A IAEA 239 a A II A EE 239 TPC learning infrared receiver occ 240 To enter Learn ed 240 To learn an IR code 2 2 2 eee cece ee ee eee eee eee eee eee cece aana 240 TOTES slot a nn GC re Te Oe mT 240 WOMCFASC ANS COC cosida ies a ut adie cnet a anaes ea 240 Toexit Leam nd do AD 240 BPS learning infrared receiver ccoo 241 ToenterLeam Mode orsin co acai iad bd See tate ott cola Lae i a ance ae a 241 To learn an IR code sucias 241 TO erase MIR COM ooe ate Si ee E A a ad a a 241 To test an IR code oo ne 241 o MN MOOG EA A A A E NN E 242 A AS ES 243 Fixture plan file format CSV ccc0s ecccecudeseviebonerwvotetcdeeedebecwnduecewiedwevedsa ededededveeeeted ods 243 e VIN A ie Sha ae eee aera E ie oe eee PO 243 BPO GUIS DOSINONSVNAX a O eee ew 243 DAAT O csi ee eet pda se oe Re tac teenies Aue oceano ote eu tene aes 243 Pixel matrix file format CSV _ 0 0 2200 o cece cece eee ccoo 244 Fixture position syntax A 244 3 AA cee ees a A E eet poe atest 244 Web server query interface occ 245 SI A DE TR vO te eae REE REN CENT OC o Te RC OY Fe 245 C ON AIMGING Sits tans ee ne A ee i ete os 245 Get Controller SEUA a Soa A ti 245 Sample RESPONSE sscrsruitn det rte ii io teria ados bla 245 A A A A EN A IN 246 Get Current Time nn 246 Sample Response ns 246 GEETE S sus ala a eee Pe a ia e eee PE een ReneS 246 Sample RESPONSE hago tee ts a ye halen td ae ahi teu dates ears hades 246 Ge
287. t this timeline status is only pertinent to the Controller being accessed For example the accessed Controller may report that a timeline is Running Inact ive because its fixtures are not contributing to the output while another Controller may well be Running Active because its fixtures are contributing to the output In such systems the complete status can only be determined by interrogating all Controllers Groups All groups are listed with their current intensity level 167 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Use this page in conjunction with the Control and Log pages to interrogate and debug an installation Log VU Peares MET Foyer LPC Log gt Mozilla Pareto le LA A Far lua To HA E E BEI 68 0 Teo wap Ke 3 ACTION Start Timeline Media mayhem 1 55 Trigger d fird Fram web interface 9 13 ACTION Start Timeline Default 3 Si ario mt Te d 9 13 Memory u oge after project load taral GO595kB ue SBBRE free 20006 Startiag Cline serves j Project onlqueld be4d8783 47 050 Jeo 765bp685 05020994 19 13 Project leaded Desiqrer Help PO May 19 19 13 Astro Clock Hert uarie 04 52 00 Hert 01304 t 21 03 00 l i j j 4 4 j i 1 Cosfiguring RE232 baud 38400 data bite B parityinos tap bita 1 z 9 13 Cees ti e i nos 19 19 13 ORT 1 Daylight Saving On 9 Hay 18 19 13 Etartisa te l d project Ej j j j a Reca ve project waved
288. te Devices Select a band that is available for that device or reconfigure the RIO see Remote Devices The RIO s input has been configured incorrectly see Remote Devices The RIO s input has been configured incorrectly see Remote Devices The RIO s input has been configured incorrectly see Remote Devices Reconfigure the Ethernet bus to use a different port Reconfigure the Ethernet bus to use a different port Configure the DHCP server to use a 10 xxx XXX XXX IP address Reconfigure the Protocol port to use a 10 xxx xxx xxx IP address Reconfigure power supplies to use unique IP addresses Reconfigure the Controller to use a 10 XXX XXX XXX IP address 181 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Reconfigure the Protocol port to use a valid IP Controller doesn t have a valid IP address for Network 2 address Controller doesn t have a interface file for the screen llas i ne project doesn t have an associated Touch Editor file see Controller Properties Controller TPC has been configured with a TPC RIO as but there is no TPC RIO discovered becca g on Controller TPC has patch for DMX 1 but has not been Soe lead ee E DMX output Alternatively remove DMX patch from configured with a TPC RIO or proxy MSC iheconiroller 182 Frequently asked questions Frequently asked questions Software Is the free software a cut down demo version No The free Designer software is the full software pa
289. ted DALI Interfaces see DALI 34 Setup Project properties Audio visual AV fixtures Select Generic Video from the drop down of manufacturers Choose the appropriate type of device PAL or NTSC 16 9 or 4 3 and drag it onto the plan just as you would for a lighting fixture However unlike other fixtures this will automatically add a project AVC to control that device see Controller Association Similarly duplicating or deleting these AV fixtures will automatically add or delete AVCs as required It is important to appreciate that AV fixtures are treated differently to lighting fixtures in that they are directly coupled to an AVC which takes the same name and thus require no patching The AV fixture and its AVC should be thought of as a single integrated entity See Working with the Audio Visual Controller for information about pro gramming AV fixtures and AVC playback Import fixture plan You can use File gt Import Fixture Plan to import a fixture layout from a CAD application via a CSV file see fixture plan file format Export fixture plan You can use File gt Export Fixture Plan to export a fixture layout to a CAD application via a CSV file see fixture plan file format If you have any fixtures selected you will be prompted to export all or only those selected Fixture Identification With a fixture selected the top two fields detail the fixture s manufacturer manufacturer id and model model id they are
290. ted protocol A Controller or Remote Device can be configured to receive RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex in the Network view see Controller interfaces and Remote Devices A TPC with TPC RIO can receive RS232 full duplex To receive serial from a Controller s serial port leave Device as Local and use the Controller setting to specify which Controller s serial port should be considered the input source If you re using an RS485 expansion module with the original MSC hardware select which module should be the input source by setting the number next to the Device 1 Controller serial port 2 1st RS485 expansion module 3 2nd RS485 expansion module only used if two RS485 modules are connected For the MSC X the number next to the Device setting selects which of the two RS232 ports should be the input source Alternatively set the Device to a RIO and select the RIO number 105 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Now define the string of input characters to be matched as the trigger There are three formats in which serial strings can be entered A series of hexadecimal characters 0 9 a f A F where pairs of values are interpreted as a ao byte Decimal A series of decimal characters 0 255 separated by characters ASCII A series of ASCII characters The special characters n for new line r for carriage return and t for tab are supported Additionally each byte can be replaced with a wildcard to match a
291. ternate ballasts Function Test Schedule Time 03 00 Repeat Monthly Every 1 months On darla e On dayfweek Last Sunday Duration Test Schedube Time 02 00 Repeat Weekly Every weeks Test information is stored on the memory card of the controller responsible for that interface This information can also be viewed via the web interface Specify a ballast s Prolong time in the Setup tab Upload configuration Once you have configured all your DALI interfaces and programmed all your DALI scenes you must upload the configuration to each DALI interface in turn so that this data can be stored on the DALI ballasts themselves Select an interface using the pull down on the DALI toolbar and press the Upload Configuration button a progress bar will track this rather slow procedure 59 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Mover This window need only be used if there are fixtures in the project that have control parameters other than intensity and colour mixing Examples include most automated lights which above and beyond position pan amp tilt might also include gobo and effects wheels E ae a OUTPUT LIVE SELECT FIXTURES CREATE PRESETS The Mover window is where one sets these other parameters and it comprises four sections On the left is the Browser in the middle the Plan Top right is the directory of Mover Presets within the project and below that is th
292. that allows for bi dir ectional communication with the fixture for remote configuration and diagnostics purposes RS232 ElA 232 an industry standard communications protocol for computing and telecommunications equip ment RS485 ElA 485 an industry standard communications protocol for computing and industrial equipment T timeline The framework used to determine which presets are applied to which fixtures when and for how long Roughly analogous to a cuelist V variable A value that can be captured from an input string that is used to determine the outcome of an action 250 Glossary W watchdog A hardware device that monitors a microprocessor and automatically forces a reset if the micro processor stops responding wildcard A method of specifying which character s of an input string should be ignored as padding Wildcards are also captured as variables and can be considered such if used to determine the outcome of an action 251
293. the DMX driver ICs Please contact support if you are experiencing any issues Standards compliance The Unison Mosaic product range is manufactured to the highest quality in compliance with international stand ards refer to the product s Installation Guide for details Network What are the differences between connecting to a PC via USB and Ethernet The USB connection is all about temporary convenience hence it s location on the front of the box the main con nectors may be difficult to get to in a fully wired equipment rack Out of the box the initial computer connection is via USB to set up IP an address in readiness for an Ethernet connection It is an easy way to connect again loc ally to edit and upload a project but USB has some disadvantages e Output Live refresh rates are lower e Limited cable length 187 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual How do the Unison Mosaic products cope with sharing a network with other non lighting devices Unison Mosaic products can happily sit on any network They do not broadcast a high volume of messages and will only listen to Unison Mosaic specific messages What about remote focus units portable control stations IR etc With a wireless network access point any PDA with wireless capability can be set to browse to the Controller s web interface The web interface includes status monitoring and logging hyperlinks of all trigger events anda command line The BPS and TPC
294. the basic concepts that are needed to understand or write useful scripts for the Controllers For more extensive information on the Lua language there are two documents both of which are available online at http www lua org or can be bought as books from Amazon e Lua 5 0 Reference Manual e Programming in Lua 225 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Note that Unison Mosaic currently uses Lua 5 0 rather than the newer Lua 5 1 although the differences are irrel evant for the kind of scripts we are focusing on here 226 Custom Preset Programming Guide Custom Preset Programming Guide Custom Presets use a Lua script to define an effect that can be played back on a Matrix You can use this to cre ate effects that are not available as standard in Designer Custom Presets are managed using the Media window Basics Custom presets use Lua scripts to define an animation For each pixel x y of each frame of that animation a pixel function is called which returns three numbers between 0 and 255 which represent the red green and blue components of the colour of that pixel Pixel 0 0 is in the top left of the frame with the positive x axis pointing right and the positive y axis pointing down Here is the most simple example of a custom preset Listing 1 function pixel frame x y return 255 070 end This fills every pixel of every frame with red If you do not return all three components of the pixel s colour the
295. the real world At its most basic you can define which timeline to begin on startup but for more complex environments with external triggers you can define a detailed script even 26 Overview incorporating conditions if necessary See Trigger reference Simulate F8 Simulate allows you to view a representation of your project in plan format You can play individual timelines to check your programming then run the whole project including triggers A set of buttons allow you to simulate external triggers in order to test your programming properly See Simulate reference The Simulator can also be opened in its own window so that it is permanently available typically on a second monitor Tear off click and then drag to the right the Simulate mode tab or press Ctrl Apple F8 to open this window Network F9 This is where you manage your Unison Mosaic hardware assigning connected Controllers to the Controllers in your project configuring their input output interfaces and any attached Expansion Modules or connected Remote Devices See Network reference Report F10 Here you can view and organise spreadsheet style reports listing the elements within the project for example fix ture schedule patch triggers This is useful in providing documentation about the installation for future reference and to aid maintenance Reports can be exported as tsv files Tab Separated Values for importing into an Excel spreadsheet for for
296. the right hand side and can be activated by clicking on them Activating a trig ger will automatically start the simulator clock press Reset to reset all timelines and triggers Simulator controls Start Pause Toggles between Start and Pause accordingly the keyboard spacebar can also be used 129 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Skip backwards amp forwards When the simulator is running or paused these buttons skip backwards or forwards in 10 second increments Reset Resets the simulator the simulated triggers Project mode only and releases playback so if Output Live is enabled the venue will go to black fixture defaults Rate fader Adjusts the simulator s playback speed not the timeline s programming from Ox paused gt 1x normal default position gt 16x fastest Note that Reset does not reset this setting so remember to set it back to 1x normal when you ve finished Program window play head Timeline mode only In the Program window when simulating a timeline in Timeline mode the simulator s current playback position is marked by the play head a black vertical line and arrow on the timeline ruler i F I You can grab the play head for manual positioning by clicking on and dragging the arrow along the ruler akin to scratching since you are now driving the simulator by hand at whatever speed and in whatever direction you choose very useful for examining transitions in detail for
297. the value changes within the specified range Changes in range or to only trigger when the value enters the specified range Enters range Enters range is generally more useful when you are using DMX to trigger timelines but Changes in range would be required if you were using a DMX channel as a variable passed to a Set Intensity action to control the intensity for a group lui Audio Input The RIO A has a stereo balanced line level audio input that can be used as a trigger The original MSC hardware can be used with an audio expansion module though the RIO A offers a great advance in performance To use an MSC with an audio expansion module as the input source use the Controller setting to specify which Controller has the expansion module and leave the Device as Local If two audio modules are connected set the port number to match which module should be the input source To trigger from a RIO A set Device to RIO A and select the number of the RIO A or leave this set to Any to cause the trigger to attempt to match against audio input from any RIO A In this case the RIO number will be captured as variable Use the Channel setting to specify whether the trigger should match against the left or right audio channel or the combination of the two only available for RIO A Now select which frequency band to use or leave this set to the overall volume of the channel Each audio module analyses the incoming audio as 5 frequency bands Ea
298. ticular area of the imported media Import pixel matrix You can use the Import button to import pixel layout from a CAD application via a CSV file see pixel matrix file format Media Presets Select the Media tab Media presets can only be played on MSC Pixel Matrices Media is imported by clicking Create New in the Media Presets pane A dialog will open as shown above for you to browse to wherever your media files are located enable Thumbnails view to preview them Designer supports most common media files indeed anything that QuickTime supports and it matters not at all the resolution of the media clips as the software will up down scale as required when the Media Preset is placed on a Matrix during programming In short no media preparation should be required The first frame is used as their thumbnail in the directory they can be named using the name textbox at the bottom of the directory pane and they can also be deleted Imported Media is automatically resized to fit a Pixel Matrices Render Window the hatched area of the Matrix Only fixtures pixels within this Render Window will receive the media which is why Render Windows should typ ically be cropped see above to force the media to fit onto just the fixtures Designer ships with sample media clips kindly provided by Projected Image Digital Mode Studios and Digigobos Four samples are installed with the application the others reside in the Sample Media folder on the CD Link
299. to execute real time triggers on startup This will ensure that all real time triggers are executed from a user specified time to the current time to reinstate the correct playback state in case the Controller is restarted for some reason eg power loss watchdog or remote reset NOTE Real Time triggers are only tested by the Time Server and then shared over the network so any conditions are tested on the Time Server only ms Astronomical The Controller is also equipped with astronomical clock algorithms which automatically generate the correct sun rise sunset and twilight times for the location of the installation see project properties use the configuration pane to select between sunrise sunset dawn or dusk and to specify an offset negative or positive in minutes Two versions of dawn and dusk are offered using the two definitions of twilight civil and nautical Please see Wikipedia for an explanation of these terms A Controller properties option exists to ensure that all astronomical triggers are executed from a user specified time to the current time to reinstate the correct playback state in case the Controller is restarted for some reason eg power loss watchdog or remote reset 101 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual NOTE Astronomical triggers are only tested by the Time Server and then shared over the network so any con ditions are tested on the Time Server only Lunar As well as astronomical triggers
300. to a Controller s protocols will only take effect after an upload 153 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Network Controller Interfaces Choose the Interfaces tab to configure the input output interfaces for a Controller including any Expansion Mod ules CONFIGURE SELECTED CONTROLLER IMPORTANT Changes made to a Controller s interfaces will only take effect after an Configure TPC RIO TPC only Check the Configure TPC RIO box if you want to see TPC RIO interfacing options fora TPC Inputs MSC 1 2 8 4 and TPC with TPC RIO only Check the Check State At Startup box if you want the inputs to be read and acted upon in tt at startup The inputs of the revised MSC and TPC RIO can be individually configured as either Contact Closure Digital or Analog with the latter two modes allowing for the threshold or range to be selected The maximum voltage range is 0 24V and the smallest measurable change is 0 25V 154 Network Controller Interfaces Serial Port s not standalone TPC Use these fields to configure the Controller s integrated RS232 or RS232 485 serial port s specifying the baud rate the number of data and stop bits as well as any parity bits used to match the settings of the connected device Note that the Controllers do not use a specific serial protocol but instead can generate or match any serial string by setting up the appropriate triggers That being said the serial port on the revised MSC
301. to an OS Xkeyboard shortcut change Shift and Alt work as described for Windows 25 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Overview The Designer software is the tool provided to configure and program the Unison Mosaic Controllers and Remote Devices The Controllers have been designed specifically for the architectural and installation markets and as opposed to DMX frame store solutions offer genuine lighting audiovisual and show control functionality Lighting amp video is programmed on timelines with a particular timeline having control data for one some or all the lighting fixtures being controlled Multiple timelines are supported and so a single unit can control multiple distinct zones or more complex presentations can be programmed with external triggers coming from multiple systems The software offers powerful functionality with a simple and intuitive graphical user interface Most operations can be performed with mouse clicks typically left click for selection and right click for context sensitive options amp Commands and drag and drop Creating a project is broken down into ten sections use the mode tabs down the left hand side of the application or the function keys in brackets to toggle between them Setup F1 In Setup you add your fixtures to the plan arrange them in groups or customize their behaviour Use the Prop erties pane to import a bitmap for the plan set the plan s size and grid spacing and specify the g
302. to determine what these flags will do Learn timing When simulating a single timeline flags can be dropped interactively after pressing the Add Trigger Flag button to enter learn timing mode Press F to drop a flag at each appropriate playback time then depress the Add Trigger Flag button to exit learn timing or click anywhere on the timeline in which case a final flag will be dropped Locking timelines When clicking on presets to edit their properties it is sometimes all too easy to move or stretch them by accident so it is possible to lock a timeline using the Lock button on the timeline toolbar When a timeline is locked it is only possible to edit the preset properties moving or stretching them is prohibited Press the Lock button again to unlock 85 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Program Working with presets Applying presets At its most basic let s for example make a fixture or group of fixtures go green Select the Group folder and the Fixed Colour preset within and drag this onto the appropriate timeline row so that it starts at the required time say at O seconds on the left A 10 second long red strip the default length and colour will appear already selected for manipulation via the Preset Properties pane on the right Fixed Colour preset properties are limited to colour and timing use the colour picker to select green and set a fade time and skew as required f you have the Sim ulate window open yo
303. troller spreadsheet provide status information Number The unique identifier given to each Controller in the project Mam The user name given to each Controller in the project typically a name that identifies the Controller s purpose or location Time Server Yes indicates that this Controller set as the Time Server Type The type of Controller Serial Number The Controller s serial number as found on the base of the Controller If connected via Ethernet the Controller s IP address which is either statically assigned or eee obtained from a DHCP server USB Yes indicates that the Controller is connected via USB Firmware The Controller s firmware version which must match that of Designer Bootloader The Controller s bootloader version Memory Card Size The size of the Controller s memory card this can be user upgraded if required Show Name The name of the project that has been uploaded Watchdog Yes indicates that the Controller s watchdog is turned on Used Channels The number of used channels on the Controller Capacity The number of available unused channels on the Controller ines Yes indicates that the Controller has joined the Designer session because it has been associated and the project files match Output Live Check this box the default if you want the Controller to participate in Output Live see below Disabling Output Live While all the other columns give status feedback the Output Live cell is editable and allo
304. ts to make com plete looks on the fly It also allows different transitions to be applied to each kind so that gobos could fly in one after another using a skew while position moves more slowly and as a whole longer fade no skew Using Output Live While the mover icons give a fair degree of feedback about your programming by visualising colour and gobos for example other parameters are not visualised and so must be programmed live press the Output Live button on the main toolbar to do so Output Live is not possible without patched and associated Controllers Note that if you wish to program or edit a preset that requires one or more other presets to be on stage for example rotating Zooming and focusing a gobo where the position is set by another preset then you must also be simulating a timeline that runs those presets Editing a mover preset To edit an existing preset just click on it and select the fixtures for adjustment note that included fixtures will be shown with a blue halo on the plan and fixtures currently selected for edit with a red halo Any timelines on which the preset is deployed will automatically update to reflect the edits made 61 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Deleting and copying a mover preset Right click on a preset to delete or copy it the latter function being useful in making similar presets that vary only slightly say just the gobo being used 6D Media Media This window ser
305. tton in a TPC user interface is touched triggers of this type will be checked for a match Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Button drop down list from the Touch Editor project see Controller Properties The Button field should be set to the Control Key of the button you re interested in this is a property of buttons that is set in Touch Editor Either pick a control key from the list or type it in You can use one trigger to respond to multiple buttons by using variables the syntax is the same as for Serial and Ethernet Input triggers e g but ton lt 3d gt will match a button with the control key button001 or button002 etc and capture the number as a vari able See actions that use variables for how to make use of the captured variable The Event defaults to Click which is a complete press and release touch action Other options are Press Release Held and Repeat like the BPS Button trigger ik TPC Slider Move Whenever a slider in a TPC user interface is moved triggers of this type will be checked for a match Set the Con troller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Slider drop down list from the Touch Editor project see Controller Properties The Slider field should be set to the Control Key of the slider you re interested in this is a property of sliders that is set in Touch Editor Either pick a control key from the list or type it in You can use one trigger to res
306. turning to our vertical band example we are going to introduce animation by changing the height of each band over time Listing 6 width of the bands in pixels band width 4 space between bands in pixels band spacing 1 get the combined width of band and separator local total band width band widthrband spacing get the number of visible bands local bands width total band width modulo operator ab function mod a b return a mMmath floor a b b end Che pixel TUNGGON function pixel frame x y if mod x t tal band wrath gt band width then in band separator retirer 005 0 end get the band in which this pixel falls local band math floor x total band width get the fraction through the effect local t frame frames get the height of the band in which this pixel falls local band herght mati s id band bands t math prir2p 1 72 229 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual adjust y to be relative to the center of the effect y y height 2 0 5 gt decide if this pixel is inside the band if math abs y height 2 lt band height then retr oo Ub else TEtura UUU end end We are using a sine function to set the height of each band where the argument to the sine function is offset based on the index of the band and the current fraction through the effect The result of this is that the height of each band differs from its neighbour according the sine fun
307. tware par ticularly over an Ethernet connection An MSC with corrupt firmware as indicated by the status LEDs see troubleshooting can not be updated using the Designer software and so the Legacy MSC Recovery Tool must be used instead How to use it Connect the MSC via USB Use either a DC supply or PoE to power the MSC and then connect to the PC with a standard USB cable When first connecting an MSC to a Windows PC you will be prompted to install the Unison Mosaic USB drivers via the Found New Hardware wizard Follow the default instructions answering No then Auto to the prompts to install both drivers the process will happen twice once for the MSC s data port and then again for the control port Run the tool On Windows this tool can be launched from the Start menu under Programs gt Mosaic gt Designer On Mac OS X the tool can be launched from wherever the Designer software was installed typically in Applications or Desktop Unison Mosaic Designer must be closed before launching this tool To update the bootloader to the latest version 0 5 press Update Bootloader and the process will begin taking a few seconds to complete during which time you must not disturb the USB connection the PC nor the MSC in any way Interrupting this process can corrupt the bootloader image and render the MSC inoperable Press Exit to fin ish and then launch the tool again to update the firmware To update the firmware to the latest versio
308. type This action lets you change the active state for a con trol Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Control and State drop down lists from the Touch Editor project see Controller Properties Set the Control field to the target control key or use the variable injection syntax to make this action work for several controls with similar control keys the syntax is the same as for the Serial and Ethernet Output action It is also possible to use the wildcard character to change multiple con trols at once For example using button would set all controls with a key that begins with button to the spe cified state Select the state from the drop down list or choose to set the Control to its default state ll Set TPC Control Caption Use this action to change the caption of TPC controls including Labels Set the Controller number to a particular TPC in order to populate the Control drop down list from the Touch Editor project see Controller Properties Set the Control field to the target control key or use the variable injection syn tax to make this action work for several controls with similar control keys the syntax is the same as for the Serial and Ethernet Output action Finally enter the text to set as the new caption Variables can be used in this text using the same syntax as for the Serial and Ethernet Output action E Set TPC Page Use this action to chage the current page shown on
309. u can now simply click Start and you ll see these fixtures fade to green using the time and transition you have just entered and after 10 seconds fade back to black using the default release time of 2 seconds Presets can be moved and stretched on the timeline using the mouse to vary their start end and length or altern atively you can type exact values into the Timing fields top right Click View Transitions to display the fade and release timing graphically which can also be stretched using the mouse as an alternative to typing fade and release time values into the Timing pane So getting slightly more adventurous let s say you want the fixtures to remain green for longer say 20 seconds and then fade to a rainbow effect Firstly either drag the end of the green preset to 20 seconds on the timeline or set the end or length value to be 20 seconds via the Timing fields Now select the Rainbow Effect preset also in the Group folder and drag this onto the timeline immediately following the green preset so it starts at 20 seconds and set its period to be 2 seconds with a Spread offset type Again use the Simulate window to view this new programming click Reset then Start TIP Hold Shift while dragging for finer resolution centisecond Hold Ctrl Apple while dragging to snap to the start end of other placed presets Programmed groups fixtures or elements i e those with at least one preset applied are shown in blue in the
310. u will need to note it s serial number label on back Select the project Remote Device by clicking the left hand button the row will highlight Select the correct device type and the desired address in the range 16 gt 100 Select the Remote Device s serial number from the pull down menu of devices found on the network The real device will move from the Unused list and fuse with the project device so completing the row details IRUN Once all your project Remote Devices have been associated with real devices you can configure them test your programming on the installation itself and finally upload to the Controllers for stand alone operation 161 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Remote Input Output RIO device properties Serial Port The RIO 80 RIO 44 and RIO 08 have a multi protocol serial port that can be configured to either RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex operation The configuration options are Type select RS232 or RS485 as required Baud rate select the baud rate Data bits select the number of data bits typically 8 Stop bits select the number of stop bits Parity select the parity type I O Configuration The RIO 80 RIO 44 and RIO 08 differ by virtue of the number and type of I O ports RIO 80 Eight inputs no outputs amp serial port RIO 44 Four inputs four outputs amp serial port RIO 08 No inputs eight outputs amp serial port Inputs can be individually configured as either Contact
311. ue for year month day hour minute and second this should be easy to understand If the whole mask is set for a component of the date that component is always satisfied as being Before or After the current time If the mask contains multiple but not all values in a component of the mask only the first set value is taken For example if the day of the week component has Monday and Tuesday set this is interpreted as being Before or After Monday When the operator is Before or After the day of week is only considered if every value of the day component is set so it will be satisfied on any day of the month 119 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual NOTE Conditions are always tested on the Controller that handles the trigger Real time triggers are always handled on the Controller designated as Time Server But if you use real time conditions in situations where they will be tested on Controllers that are not the Time Server then it is up to the user to make sure the time and date are set correctly on all the Controllers and not just on the Time Server although they should synchronize auto matically ma Astronomical The Controllers are also equipped with astronomical clock algorithms which automatically generate the correct sunrise sunset and twilight times for the location of the installation see project properties Astronomical conditions can be used to limit the operation of a trigger to daytime or nighttime by sele
312. ugh to the controllers DMX ports With an MSC selected the bottom of the protocols pane will show the eDMX Pass Thru settings Select which universe the DMX port will be transmitting Note that with an MSC 2 you ll be able to choose a different universe for each DMX port on the controller There is also the option to auto revert to the pro ject s output if eDMX isn t received for a specified amount of time Note that only Art Net and sACN are currently supported for eDMX pass thru Art Net output customisation By default a controller with less than 30 universes of Art Net patched will broadcast all data until a device requests unicast for a specific universe Controllers with more than 30 Art Net universes patched will only uni cast data to devices requesting universe data and will not automatically broadcast There is the option to Disable Broadcast for a controller The controller will still unicast data to devices that request it There is also the option to Always Broadcast on a per universe basis This will force the controller to always broadcast that universe s data Always Broadcast will override the Disable Broadcast option 53 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual DALI This window need only be used if there are DALI ballasts in the project and one or more RIO Ds or DALI M Expan sion Modules are being used Overview The Digital Addressable Lighting Interface DALI is a digital serial control protocol for
313. ul to set the step size fade and delay times from variables 103 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual The fader modifies the programmed intensity for all fixtures within the group On startup all groups have their faders at 100 Where multiple groups containing the same fixtures have their intensity reduced then the decrease is cumulative Note that if you decrease intensity for one group you can only increase it again by acting on the same group Applying an increase intensity action to a different group will have no effect even if that group contains the same fixtures you would be trying to move a different fader Set AVC Master Sets the video brightness and audio volume of the output of an AVC 104 Triggers Advanced Triggers Advanced Unison Mosaic Controllers support numerous serial communication ports and optional Remote Devices and the following advanced triggers amp actions together with conditions variables and Lua scripts provide powerful show control functionality Indeed above and beyond a Controller s lighting amp AV control capabilities a Controller can be used to tie together numerous pieces of equipment with various interfaces to yield a robust and fully integrated show control solution Advanced trigger types U Analog Input The revised MSC and TPC with TPC RIO hardware has 8 inputs that can be configured as digital or analog inputs in the Interfaces tab of the Network view The RIO
314. ull down to select which DALI interface the Module is assigned to Only one Module can be assigned to each interface of which there can be up to 4 see DALI for adding and removing DALI interfaces 157 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual DALI S The DALI Slave Expansion Module allows one or more Controllers to be controlled by any DALI compatible sys tem see advanced triggers for usage The Module snoops the DALI bus and does not typically require a ballast address However some controllers may not function unless ballasts are detected in which case use the Num ber Of Ballasts setting to have it emulate one or more ballasts 158 Network Remote Devices Network Remote Devices Please refer to the documentation supplied with the units for hardware details and installation instructions Connection Remote Devices can only be connected using a Power over Ethernet PoE connection so a suitable PoE repeater or switch must be provided TCP IP Since the Remote Devices do not use TCP IP connection is more straightforward than with the Controllers simply connect them to the network and use the thumb wheel on the device to set an Address see Associating Remote Devices below Multicast Remote Devices do however use a block of Multicast addresses for communication so these addresses must be available 230 0 0 0 230 0 3 1 230 0 3 2 amp 230 0 3 3 Please be aware that managed Ethernet switches which may block the
315. ultiple discrete items of larger AV equipment The AVC incorporates a live input so that a camera or other video feed can be mixed with its internal playback There is also an internal effects unit supporting picture in picture and luma key effects Finally a separate overlay downstream key is supported which could either be a customer logo or text including scrolling text from an external source Schematic of AV routing PLAYER ALLOCATION amp TRANSPORT AUTOMATICALLY DETERMINED AT PLAYBACK BASED ON REALTIME DEMAND VIDEO con auno PLATER B HPEGI i ed VOAR CATA STO ED Ohi COMPACT FLAGH CARO BACKGROUND MAIN EFFECT 1 OVERLAY E gt S OUTPUT E J Maia i i mmm a a a a ia 1 COMPOOTE i IDES COMPONENT SAALTHOIUE 1 DISTAL BUCA AUDIO MIXER ul ale INPUT Tay gt COM POBME 5 WIDED Teen tf tee fee ef nf oe on ARLE LODUE ALD CONTROLLED BY TIMELINE AOW PROGRAMMING 89 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Timeline Rows Each AVC has four rows although only one is shown by default Click the plus sign to expand this main row to expose these more advanced control rows Only AVC presets can be applied to these rows but not necessarily all AVC rows and a preset s behaviour may change depending on the row on which it is placed EJ Main Used for the primary full screen image and or audio E Effect Used for picture in picture PIP and luma keyeffects e Fullscreen us
316. up to but not including the first n character received A terminator cannot be another variable it must be a literal character so lt s gt lt d gt is not a valid trigger lt s gt or lt S gt e Send a NULL character 0x00 to the Controller to indicate the end of the string This NULL character is assumed and is not shown in the Designer interface You can also say that you want to capture a string with a predetermined number of characters For example lt 4s gt will capture 4 bytes and store it as a string There is no need for a ter minator in this case Note that if the input data does not match the wildcard type then the trigger does not match So if you have spe cified the wildcard lt 3d gt and the input is ASCII 12y then the trigger will not match because the 3 characters were not all of the required decimal type When using Ethernet Inputs the last two variables in the trigger will be the IP address and the source port number of the device the message was received from If triggering from a RIO s serial input the RIO number will be captured as the first variable if set to Any fd MIDI Input In short MIDI messages you can capture data 1 and or data 2 into a variable by checking the Capture check box If both are checked data 1 is variable 1 and data 2 is variable 2 For some short messages i e Pitch Wheel the two data bits are treated as a single 14 bit value To capture this 14 bit value check Capture for data 1
317. ure 5 fading over 6 5 seconds Clearing all fixtures settings cal tx where x is an optional time in seconds Examples ca Clear settings for all fixtures immediately cat10 Clear settings for all fixtures fading over 10 seconds Multiple Commands Multiple commands can be applied from a single command line if separated by commas Examples 1 100 1r0 1b0 19255 Set intensity of fixture 1 to 100 red and blue to 0 and green to 255 1ct5 4r255 4 75 t5 Clear settings for fixture 1 fading over 5 seconds set red for fixture 4 to 255 immediately and then set intensity of fixture 4 to 75 fading over 5 seconds Interaction with timeline playback Settings applied from the command line are applied as if from a high priority timeline so they will override all nor mal timeline programming until cleared Fades to and from command line settings behave just like fades between timelines 175 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Web interface Custom page s To add a custom web page or set of pages to the web interface on a Controller go to the File menu and choose Custom Web Interface This will open a dialog that shows the files that currently make up your custom web interface Custom Web Interface 213 Backed hilos 7 a Fier enna Default Sime Pu Assetslmages LFE modules render pg 10580 betes rima LPT cercar po 16277 byes Arde MS ord po ES bytes Ameme
318. uring normal operation the BPS will react as though one of its 8 but tons has been pressed The BPS does not have to be part of a networked system to learn IR codes all that is required is POE power and the donor remote control To enter Learn Mode 1 Enter by holding down the bottom two buttons while pressing and releasing reset e The buttons will display a clockwise chase sequence 2 Release the bottom two buttons e Each button will flash quickly 4Hz if an IR code has been learnt or slowly 1Hz if not e Nonetwork communication will operate while in Learn Mode e Learn Mode will automatically exit after 60 seconds of inactivity To learn an IR code 1 Briefly press and release a single button which should learn the IR code e The button will start flashing rapidly GHZ and the other buttons will extinguish 2 Within ten seconds point the IR remote at the BPS and press and hold the desired key e The buttons will display a clockwise chase sequence when the IR code has been learnt 3 Release the key on the IR remote e The button now will be flashing quickly 4Hz to indicate that it has an IR code stored To erase an IR code 1 Press and hold for three seconds the button which should erase its IR code e The buttons will display a clockwise chase sequence when the IR code has been erased 2 Release the button e The button will now be flashing slowly 1Hz to indicate that it has no IR code stored To test an IR code
319. urmircsec C gt Once ox s Choosing Every day means all years months and days are in the mask so they will all satisfy the condition Similarly Any Time means all hours minutes and seconds are in the mask so any time will satisfy the con dition Once a week means only one day of the week is in the mask so the condition is only satisfied when tested on that day of the week Choosing a particular date or time means that only that date or time is set in the mask so no other will satisfy the condition Using the Advanced mode you can create more versatile masks Date and Time Day Hame Day Mori Yes Hours Minutes Seconds Sunday 10 Jaway 4 2000 Al i A A For example for the condition to be satisfied between 10pm and 4am you would highlight all years months days days of the week minutes and seconds in the mask but only set 22 23 0 1 2 and 3 in the hour mask Thus the condition will only be satisfied when the current hour is between 10pm and 4am Another example might be if you wanted the condition to be satisfied in every tenth minute on Sundays Here you would highlight all years months days hours and seconds in the mask highlight only Sunday in the Day Name and highlight 0 10 20 30 40 and 50 in the minutes If the operator is set to Before or After the condition is satisfied if the current time is before or after the time set in the mask If the mask contains a unique time a single val
320. ves two purposes to edit or manually create Pixel Matrices of fixtures for use as a media play back screen and to import Media AVC amp Custom Presets into the system _ CREATE MATRICES lt SELECT PRESET TYPE POPULATE RENDER WINDOW IMPORT MEDIA PRESETS The window comprises 3 sections On the left is the Browser in the middle the Pixel Matrix editing area and on the right are the Presets panes Pixel Matrices To create Pixel Matrices automatically from the plan recommended 1 Goto 2 Select the fixtures you want to include in the Matrix 3 Press the New Pixel Matrix button on the Browser toolbar the software will automatically create a Matrix with the fixtures correctly positioned and the Render Window cropped to best fit 4 Name the Pixel Matrix using either the textbox on the toolbar or right clicking gt Rename in the Browser To create a Pixel Matrix manually 1 Press Create New on the toolbar a default 50x50 Render Window the hatched area will be created and the Browser populated 2 Populate the Render Window by dragging on fixtures from the Browser 3 Adjust the size of the Render Window by using the Width amp Height fields on the toolbar or the Crop button see below to best fit 4 Name the Pixel Matrix using either the textbox on the toolbar or right clicking gt Rename in the Browser 63 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Typically you will place fixtures to mimic as closely
321. we will instead run the following script which timelines should we cycle through timeline 22 14 24 Los Loy Ly ZL 3 A eine Lane YY on first time of running initialise index if not index then 218 Trigger Programming Guide index l end start the timeline whose number is at entry index start timeline timeline index increment index index index 1 should we go back to the beginning of the table af Index gt 1 timeline then index 1 end How would this change if we wanted each button press to choose a timeline at random rather than cycling through them in order which timelines should we cycle through timeline 1 22 14 24y LOs Ls Ley Zi 4 A time Lane Y use the random function to set index index Math random lym timeline start the timeline whose number is at entry index start timeline timeline index Of course if the timeline selection is truly random then it will sometimes select the same timeline twice in a row If we wanted to prevent this from happening how could we do it which timelines should we cycle through timeline S E ee ae 2a ey Lege LL A Camerina find an index different from the old one while index oldIndex do use the random function to set index index math random ly 1 timeline end store the index for next time round oldindex index start the timeline whose number is at entry index
322. will halt at the first breakpoint that it encounters When the debugger is halted you can examine the values of variable in the script in the Watch tab below the source editor To execute the next line of code use Debug gt Step Over F 10 If the debugger is halted at a function call use Debug gt Step Into F 11 to step into the function To step out of the current function use Debug gt Step Out Shift F 11 To resume normal execution use Debug gt Run F5 To terminate execution immediately and return to editing the source use Debug gt Stop Ctrl F5 While a script is executing use Debug gt Break to halt execution at the current line Unison Mosaic language extensions for triggers Accessing the realtime clock local to this Controller realtime year The year realtime month The month 1 to 12 realtime monthday The day of the month 1 to 31 realtime weekday The day of the week 0 Sunday 1 Monday etc realtime hour The hour 0 23 realtime minute The minute 0 59 realtime second The second 0 59 NOTE The location of the Controller must be set correctly in project properties for these to return the correct val ues Accessing the calculated sunrise and sunset times local to this Controller sunrise hour The hour of sunrise 0 23 sunrise minute The minute of sunrise 0 59 sunrise second The second of sunrise 0 59 sunset hour The hour of sunset 0 23 sunset minute The minute of sunset 0
323. wn Mirror flips the text left to right Bold renders the text in bold Italic renders the text in italic Font the font to render the text in O 2D rainbow Renders a dynamic rainbow effect on a matrix e Colour specifies the start colour of the rainbow the saturation and intensity are maintained throughout the cycle Period the number of seconds that the rainbow takes to complete one cycle Count the number of times that the rainbow should cycle over the length of the preset Type the shape of the rainbow effect Linear Radial Conical Square Noise Perlin Noise or Bilinear Reverse reverses the direction of the wave If the Type is Linear Radial Conical Square or Bilinear the properties Angle Repeat and Count are available e Repeat the repeat style None Sawtooth Triangle e Count the number of repeats e Angle the angle in degrees of the wave Linear Conical amp Bilinear only 75 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Note that setting Repeat to None will only have an apparent effect when the Type is Radial It behaves like Saw tooth with a Count of 1 except that the area outside the unit circle is filled with the same colour as the edge of the unit circle rather than the effect continuing beyond a Count of 1 If the type is Noise e Seed the seed of the pseudo random noise copying this value to another preset will create the same noise e Randomise picks a new seed If the type
324. ws you to stop a Con troller from participating in Output Live This is useful for soft openings where you may have multiple Controllers in various geographical zones some of which are open to the public and so need to be protected from your pro gramming and testing efforts in another zone Uncheck this box to disable 144 Network Controller configuration Network Controller configuration With a Controller selected choose the Controller Config tab CONFIGURE SELECTED CONTROLLER Uniquely these settings are stored on the Controllers themselves not in the project or as part of the upload They can be changed here or by using the The Controller does not have to be associated with a project Controller to do so Network Use these fields to set a static IP address for the Controller by default the Controller is set to receive an IP address from a DHCP server If the IP settings have been stored on the Controller s memory card as a 7 or N cfg file then these fields will be greyed out Logging Select the verbosity detail of the log that can be viewed either via the or from within Designer using View gt Controller Log and selecting a Controller which can be connected via Ethernet or USB 145 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual orminolter Log Window az elect Comodo A Cea TT Ban 14418 heny aga tes ppd kad ieia SPAR usad PESO bem AIIE A 1 Ha 14 19 es Lleck Ht ee ST a ra 1 14
325. y pressing Delete Backspace or using right click gt Delete Selecting multiple presets To select more than one preset at a time for moving and editing properties or timing hold Ctrl Apple while clicking to build the selection or Ctrl Apple A to select all 88 Program Working with the Audio Visual Controller Program Working with the Audio Visual Controller Overview The Unison Mosaic Audio Visual Controller AVC is a companion to the Unison Mosaic MSCs It allows the same level of intuitive control for audio and video that the MSCs provide for lighting Like the MSC it is a rugged solid state device in a compact DIN rail mounting enclosure Video and audio con tent is stored on a memory card 2GB card provided as standard with instant access no seek time to any clip for playback Video content is MPEG2 at full D1 resolution that is DVD quality and the aspect ratio can be either 4 3 or 16 9 anamorphic Video output is selectable as composite S Video or component signals along with stereo balanced analogue However the fundamental difference between the AVC and other video playback devices is that the AVC incor porates two separate players and a vision mixer This means that it can respond immediately to external triggers and perform graceful transitions dissolves wipes etc between two clips This is a huge advantage for any sort of interactive or themed application and allows the compact AVC to replace m
326. yback per formance In the case of multiple Controllers each Controller only stores the control data required for its patched fixtures and utilised trigger interfaces and not those of the other Controllers thus providing a scalable solution Can the project file be retrieved from the Controller s No not unless you explicitly store it as an exported project mde file on the Controller s memory card To do this you must either remove the card from the Controller and plug it into the PC or use the File Transfer feature Archiving a project Export the project File gt Export or Ctrl E and save the mde file on one or more of the Controller s memory cards and keep a version for yourself safe together with the relevant Designer installer IMPORTANT lf you lose the project file you will have to start from scratch 134 Network Overview Network Overview Unison Mosaic products are designed to operate on an Ethernet network for maximum scalability and the range can be split into two classes Controllers The primary processing brains in a system designed to operate as single stand alone units or co operatively as ascalable system automatically synchronised and managed over the network All Unison Mosaic Controllers have an integrated web interface for remote management Controllers use TCP IP for communication and as a result need to be correctly configured typically via USB see Controller connection
327. yte or group of consecutive bytes can be matched by specifying a wildcard and the value stored as a variable Multiple wildcards can be used and each will store into the next available variable There are three types of wildcards supported Will match any single character or byte and store its raw value 0 255 as the next variable lt c gt or lt C gt You can add a length to the wildcard to match multiple characters and treat them as a single number so lt 4c gt would match a 32 bit number Maximum length 4 Will match a decimal character ASCII 0 9 and store its numeric value 0 9 as the next vari able You can add a length to the wildcard to match multiple decimal characters and treat them as a single number so lt 4d gt would match four decimal characters and treat them as a number from 0 9999 Maximum length 10 lt d gt or lt D gt 123 Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual Will match a hexadecimal character ASCII 0 f and store its numeric value 0 15 as the next variable You can add a length to the wildcard to match multiple hexadecimal characters and treat them as a single number so lt 2x gt would match two hexadecimal characters and treat them as a number from 0 255 Maximum length 8 lt x gt or lt X gt Will capture a string of arbitrary length To determine where the string ends you must either e Specify aterminator yourself For example the trigger lt s gt n would capture everything

Unison Mosaic Designer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents